AF3224C MS - v00

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
002350MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
002350MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
B156
B220
GESTETNER
DSc424
DSc432
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LD124c
Aficio 3224C
LD132c
Aficio 3232C
SAVIN
C2410
C3210e
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
DATE
05/2005
COMMENTS
Original Printing
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol

What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF)
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS................................................................1-2
1.2 COPIER (B156/B220)................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-3
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-4
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-5
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-6
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456).....................................................................1-13
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-13
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-13
1.4 LCT (B457) ..............................................................................................1-17
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-17
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)....................................1-21
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-21
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) .................................................................1-24
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-24
1.7 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) ........................................................................1-26
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-26
1.8 SHIFT TRAY (B510)................................................................................1-30
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-30
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490) .................................................................1-33
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-33
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509) ...........................................................................1-35
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-35
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-36
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)............................................................................1-38
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-38
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) ............................................................1-42
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-42
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006

1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) ..............................................................1-46
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-46
1.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ........................................................1-49
1.15 PRINTER OPTIONS..............................................................................1-50
1.15.1 POSTSCRIPT 3 (B769) ................................................................1-50
1.15.2 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)...........................................1-51
1.15.3 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (B581) ....................................................1-52
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-53
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-53
1.15.4 IEEE 1284 (B679).........................................................................1-54
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-54
1.15.5 IEEE802.11B (G813) ....................................................................1-55
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-57
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN ............................1-58
1.15.6 BLUETOOTH (B736) ....................................................................1-59
1.15.7 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS ...............................................1-59
1.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................1-60
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-60
1.16.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL ....................................................1-61
1.17 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ..........................................................1-64
1.18 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................1-66
1.19 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-68
1.20 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-70
1.21 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) ........................................................1-72
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 MAIN UNIT ................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ..............................................................2-2
2.1.3 PM TABLE........................................................................................2-3
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE ....................................................................2-6
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................3-1
3.2 FILTERS....................................................................................................3-1
3.3 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-2
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................3-2
3.3.2 APS SENSORS ................................................................................3-2
3.3.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY...............................................................3-3
3.3.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER .....................................................3-5
B156/B220
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP .............................................................................3-5
3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD.....................................................................3-8
3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR..........................................................................3-8
3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ................................................................3-8
3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-11
3.4 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-13
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION .......................................................3-13
3.4.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................3-14
Adjusting for Image Skew ...................................................................3-16
D-Phase Adjustment ...........................................................................3-17
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment.............................................................3-18
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD ...................................3-19
3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................................................3-20
3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................3-21
3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY............................................................................3-21
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ............................................................3-24
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER.............3-25
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR .............................3-27
3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT .........................................................3-27
3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT .................................3-27
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT.......................................................................3-28
3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT......................................................3-28
3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER .....................................................................3-28
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT.............................................................................3-29
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-29
3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-29
3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD ..........................................................................3-30
3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER ...............3-30
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ..............................3-31
3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS .............................................................................3-32
When installing the fusing lamps ........................................................3-32
3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT.....................................................................3-33
3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE...........................................3-33
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS ...........................................................3-34
3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT ...............3-34
3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR,
AND CLEANING ROLLER ..........................................................3-35
3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR ..........................................3-36
3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS.........................................................................3-37
3.8.14 FUSING ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER BELT SENSORS ..........3-38
3.8.15 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS.........................................3-39
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT ..........................................................3-41
3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD ............................................3-41
3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR.............................................................3-42
3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1..............................................................3-45
3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS .....................................................3-45
3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2..............................................................3-46
3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1................................................................3-47
3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2................................................................3-47
SM
iii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-48
3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD.................................................3-48
3.10.2 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD................................3-49
3.10.3 HDD..............................................................................................3-50
3.10.4 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD ..............................................3-51
3.10.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT................................................................3-52
3.11 DRIVE UNITS........................................................................................3-53
3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-53
K Development Units ..........................................................................3-53
C, Y and M Development Units...........................................................3-53
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTORS..........................................................3-54
3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-54
3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX ..........................................................................3-55
3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR ................................................................3-55
3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 ............................................................3-56
3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR.................................................................3-56
3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2 ............................................................3-57
3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-57
3.11.10 OIL PUMP ..................................................................................3-58
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT ...........................................................................3-59
3.12.1 PRINTING ....................................................................................3-59
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-59
Blank Margin.......................................................................................3-60
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................3-60
3.12.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-61
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification........................................................3-61
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration........................3-61
Main Scan Dot Position Correction .....................................................3-62
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................................................3-63
ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration ...........................3-63
ARDF Skew Adjustment .....................................................................3-64
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT.........................................................................3-65
3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) ..........................................3-65
3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..............................................3-66
Copy Mode .........................................................................................3-66
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-70
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ...........................................3-72
White Level Check ..............................................................................3-72
White Level Adjustment ......................................................................3-72
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .........................................................3-75
3.16 CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH ..................................................3-76
3.16.1 BREAKER ....................................................................................3-76
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL.........................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................4-1
B156/B220
iv
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2006
4.1.2 SC TABLE ........................................................................................4-2

4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ....................................................................4-21
4.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................4-21
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................4-22
4.3 IMAGE TEST MODE ...............................................................................4-22
4.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................4-22
4.3.2 VPU TEST ......................................................................................4-22
SP4-907-1: VPU Test Pattern: R ........................................................4-22
SP4-907-2: VPU Test Pattern: G ........................................................4-22
SP4-907-3: VPU Test Pattern: B ........................................................4-22
4.3.3 IPU TEST .......................................................................................4-22
4.3.4 GAVD TEST ...................................................................................4-22
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-23
4.4.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-23
4.4.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................4-25
4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ........................................................4-25
4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS ..4-26
4.6 SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES..................4-27
4.6.1 SKEWED IMAGES .........................................................................4-27
4.6.2 TRAPEZOID IMAGES ....................................................................4-27
4.6.3 PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES .........................................................4-28
4.6.4 CHECKING THE IMAGE WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN .........4-29
4.6.5 CORRECTING THE IMAGES ........................................................4-30
Flowchart ............................................................................................4-30
Action..................................................................................................4-31
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Starting the SP mode............................................................................5-1
Quitting the SP mode............................................................................5-1
SP Mode Touch Screen........................................................................5-2
Copy Window for Test Printing .............................................................5-3
Working on SP Mode Menus ................................................................5-3
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-4
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE.............................................................................5-5
SP1-XXX: (Feed) ..................................................................................5-5
SP2-XXX: (Drum)..................................................................................5-9
SP3-XXX: (Process) ...........................................................................5-17
SP4-XXX: (Scanner) ...........................................................................5-20
SP5-XXX: (Mode) ...............................................................................5-28
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals) ......................................................................5-53
SP7-XXX: (Data Log)..........................................................................5-56
SP8-XXX: (Data Log2)........................................................................5-66
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1) ....................................5-100
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK .............................................................................5-101
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803) ..............................................5-101
Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size .....................................................5-104
Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size ....................................................5-104
Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size ..................................5-104
Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End ..........................5-104
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)...........................................................5-105
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)........................................................5-106
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK .........................................................................5-107
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804) ...........................................5-107
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008) ........................................................5-110
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118) .....................................................5-110
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990).......................................................5-111
5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY ...........................................5-111
Total Count .......................................................................................5-111
Details on the Most Recent Jams .....................................................5-111
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................5-112
Total Count .......................................................................................5-112
Details on the Most Recent Jams .....................................................5-112
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801) ................................................5-113
Using an SD card..............................................................................5-113
Without Using a Flash Memory Card ................................................5-114
5.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-115
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..............................................................5-115
Service Table Key.............................................................................5-115
5.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO THE PRINTER CONTROLLER .........5-117
5.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE.................................................................5-118
5.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE.........................................5-118
SP1-XXX (System and Others).........................................................5-118
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-118
5.3.2 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) .............................................5-119
5.4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ......................................................................5-120
5.4.1 FIRMWARE ..................................................................................5-120
5.4.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-122
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) ..................................................5-122
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) .............................................5-123
5.5 SOFTWARE RESET .............................................................................5-124
5.6 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET............................5-124
5.6.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET .........................................................5-124
5.6.2 COPIER SETTING RESET ..........................................................5-125
5.7 USER TOOLS .......................................................................................5-126
5.7.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS..................................................5-126
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display........................5-126
System Settings ................................................................................5-126
Copier/Document Server Features ...................................................5-126
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................5-126
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-126
Counter .............................................................................................5-127
5.8 DIP SWITCHES.....................................................................................5-127
5.9 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE ..........................................................5-128
B156/B220
vi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Overview...........................................................................................5-129
Move Exec ........................................................................................5-129
Undo Exec ........................................................................................5-129
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG...................................................................5-130
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG .........5-130
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ...................5-133
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY .........................................5-134
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .......................................................5-135
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-135
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-135
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-135
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS........................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS ....................................................................6-3
Layout ...................................................................................................6-3
Drive Power Path ..................................................................................6-4
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .........................................................6-5
Scanner Unit .........................................................................................6-5
Image Transfer .....................................................................................6-6
Paper Path............................................................................................6-7
Development Units................................................................................6-8
Boards ..................................................................................................6-9
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE.............................................................................6-10
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................6-10
6.2.2 CONTROLLER ...............................................................................6-12
6.3 COPY PROCESS....................................................................................6-14
6.4 PROCESS CONTROL ............................................................................6-16
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-16
6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS .......................................................6-16
Six Steps.............................................................................................6-16
When is Process Control Done? .........................................................6-16
Supplementary Information on Process Control .................................6-17
6.5 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-19
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-19
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-20
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-20
ARDF Mode ........................................................................................6-20
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-21
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-23
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-23
6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-24
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-24
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-24
SM
vii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
White Level Correction........................................................................6-24
Others .................................................................................................6-24
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-25
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-25
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ...................................................................6-26
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-26
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-26
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-26
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-27
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-27
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-27
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Selection) ................................................................6-28
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-29
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-29
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-30
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-32
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-33
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-33
6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................6-34
Power Supply......................................................................................6-34
Grid and Wire Cleaning.......................................................................6-34
Quenching ..........................................................................................6-35
6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE ..........................................................................6-36
6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT .........................................................6-36
Bottle Detection ..................................................................................6-36
Waste Toner Collection.......................................................................6-37
Drive ...................................................................................................6-37
6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT ....................................................6-38
Drive ...................................................................................................6-38
Belt Mark Detection.............................................................................6-38
Transfer Roller ....................................................................................6-39
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT .................................6-40
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning .............................................................6-40
Waste Toner Collection.......................................................................6-40
Set Switch and Full Sensor.................................................................6-40
Contact Mechanism ............................................................................6-41
Power Supply......................................................................................6-42
Drive ...................................................................................................6-42
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-43
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-43
6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT...............................................6-44
Speed .................................................................................................6-44
6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR ................................................6-44
6.8.4 LD UNIT..........................................................................................6-44
6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-45
Front Door...........................................................................................6-45
Circuit..................................................................................................6-45
Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism ...............................6-46
B156/B220
viii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-47
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-47
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-48
Replacing Units...................................................................................6-48
Distinguishing the development unit with the one for the B051 series ....6-48
Memory chip .......................................................................................6-48
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-49
Drive ...................................................................................................6-49
Rollers and Agitators...........................................................................6-50
Shutter ................................................................................................6-50
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION.............................................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Toner Near-End Detection ..................................................................6-51
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-52
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-52
6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM ..........................6-54
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-54
Reverse Rotation ................................................................................6-55
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE..........................................................................6-56
Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers ................................6-56
Doctor Roller.......................................................................................6-56
6.10 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-57
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-57
Transport Speed .................................................................................6-58
Friction Pad.........................................................................................6-58
6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................6-58
Feed and Vertical Transport ...............................................................6-58
Registration.........................................................................................6-58
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT .................................................................................6-59
Lift Mechanism....................................................................................6-59
Paper End/Near-End Detection ..........................................................6-59
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-60
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-60
Switch Pattern.....................................................................................6-60
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..............................................6-61
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-61
Jammed Paper Release .....................................................................6-61
Image Transfer and Paper Separation................................................6-61
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM .....................................6-62
Timing .................................................................................................6-62
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-62
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY .........................................................................6-63
Circuit..................................................................................................6-63
Paper Transfer Roller Bias..................................................................6-63
Discharge Plate ..................................................................................6-63
Temperature/Humidity Control............................................................6-63
Roller Cleaning ...................................................................................6-64
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT......................................................6-65
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-65
SM
ix
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.2 DRIVE...........................................................................................6-66
6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS ....................................................6-67
Fusing Belt..........................................................................................6-67
Heating Roller Lamp and Pressure Roller Lamp.................................6-67
Fusing Bias .........................................................................................6-68
Fusing Unit SCs ..................................................................................6-68
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY.................................................................................6-69
Oil Supply ...........................................................................................6-69
Oil Supply ...........................................................................................6-70
Oil End Detection and Recovery .........................................................6-71
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................6-72
6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-73
Overview.............................................................................................6-73
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-74
Low Power Mode ................................................................................6-75
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-76
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................6-77
Drive ...................................................................................................6-77
Paper Jam Detection ..........................................................................6-77
6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-77
6.13 PRINT DATA PROCESSING ................................................................6-78
6.13.1 RPCS DRIVER .............................................................................6-78
6.13.2 PCL5C DRIVER............................................................................6-78
6.13.3 PS3 DRIVER ................................................................................6-79
CMS (Color Management System) .....................................................6-79
Gray Correction ..................................................................................6-79
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)............................6-79
Gamma Correction..............................................................................6-79
Toner Limitation ..................................................................................6-80
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .........................................................6-80
6.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB).....................................................6-81
6.15 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................6-82
6.15.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY .............................................................6-82
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten .................................6-82
Overwrite timing ..................................................................................6-82
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT) ...............................................7-1
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ...................................................................7-3
2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................................7-6
ARDF ....................................................................................................7-6
Bridge Unit ............................................................................................7-6
By-pass Tray Unit .................................................................................7-7
Duplex Unit ...........................................................................................7-7
Interchange Unit ...................................................................................7-7
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT .......................................................................................................7-8
Paper Tray Unit.....................................................................................7-8
Shift Tray Unit .......................................................................................7-8
1-Bin Tray Unit ......................................................................................7-9
500-Sheet Finisher................................................................................7-9
1000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................7-10
Upper Tray..........................................................................................7-10
Lower Tray..........................................................................................7-10
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408

SEE SECTION B408 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAPER TRAY UNIT B456

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B457


1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480

INTERCHANGE UNIT B481

BRIDGE UNIT B482

BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490

DUPLEX UNIT B509

SM
xi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510

FAX OPTION B750

SEE SECTION FAX OPTION B750 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

SEE SECTION AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810 FOR DETAILED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B156/B220
xii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM

TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE TABLES
DUPLEX UNIT B509
BYPASS TRAY UNIT B490
TAB
POSITION 7
BRIDGE UNIT B482
TAB
POSITION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
B750 FAX OPTION TYPE 3232
TAB
POSITION 5
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810
TAB
POSITION 6
INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range:
10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) (humidity to be 54% at

32C, 89.6F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 80% Rh (temperature to be 27C, 80.6F at

80%)
3. Ambient Illumination:
2000 lux or less (keep the machine out of direct

sunlight.)
4. Ventilation:
Air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person or more
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10 6 oz/yd3)
6. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:

1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner
2) Direct heat from a heater
7. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be exposed to corrosive gas.
8. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
9. Install the machine on a strong, level base.
10. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
SM
1-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz, More than 12 A
220 240 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 8 A
110 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 13A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10%
3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.
1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A: Over 100 mm (4")

B: Over 100 mm (4")
C: Over 550 mm (22")
D: Over 750 mm (29.6")
D
B156I501.WMF
B156/B220
1-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
Installation
1.2 COPIER (B156/B220)

1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ADF
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
2. Finisher
4. Duplex Unit
B156I502.WMF
3. By-pass Tray
SM
1-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack the copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit or LCT?

Yes
No
Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT

Install the Paper Tray Unit or LCT
Install the copier
Install the copier
Yes
Does the user require the By-pass Tray?
Yes
No
Install the By-pass Tray
Does the user require the Finisher?

Yes
No
Install the Bridge Unit
Install the Finisher
Does the user require the Shift Tray?

Yes
No
Install the Shift Tray
Does the user require the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit ?
Yes
No
Install the Interchange Unit
Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit
Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)
B156/B220
1-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
SM
Description
Paper Tray Decal
Model Name Decal
NECR
Factory Data Sheet
Filter Duct
Filter
Caution Decal Power/Paper
Decal Copy prohibition
Manual Holder
Operating Instructions System Setting
Operating Instructions Copy Reference
Operating Instructions Printer
Operating Instructions Security
Instruction Procedure Sheet
Sheet Notes for User
Screw for Manual Holder
Stamp
Cloth (ADF Standard version only)
Cloth Holder (ADF Standard version only)
1-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Qty
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
B156/B220
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B156I504.WMF
B156I505.WMF
[B]
[A]
B156I506.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT will be installed at the same time,
place the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and
the other options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused when the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Remove the tapes.
2. Open the front cover [A] and remove the shipping retainer [B].
B156/B220
1-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
[B]
[D]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B156I508.WMF
B156I507.WMF
[E]
B156I509.WMF
3. Open the right cover [A], and remove the red tags [B].
4. Open the left cover [C] ( x 2), and remove the red tags [D].
5. Pull out all development units [E] ( x 1 each).
SM
1-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
B156I511.WMF
6. Keep the development unit level and shake the development unit about 10
times from side to side.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the development roller or the development roller gear.
2) Use caution not to drop the cartridge or to damage it.
3) If the cartridge has not been shaken well, the machine takes a
longer time to initialize the development unit, or an error message or
SC350 is displayed. When either of them is displayed, turn the main
switch off and on.
B156/B220
1-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
[B]
[A]
B156I513.WMF
7. Reinstall the development units, and close the left cover.

NOTE: A white line or band may appear on one end of the paper if a
development unit is incorrectly installed. To correct this, pull out the
development unit partially (about 30 mm) and slowly reinstall it.
8. Remove the oil tank cover [A] (1 clip), and fill the oil tank to the maximum line.
NOTE: Do not fill the oil tank past the arrow [B].
SM
1-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
B156I514.WMF
[F]
[J]
B156I515.WMF
[E]
[D]
[C]
B156I516.WMF
9. Install the filters [A] and ducts [B] as shown.

10. Attach the appropriate model name decal [C] with cover [D] to the front cover.
11. Attach the caution decal [E] to the tray. Attach the copy prohibition decal [F] to
the top.
12. Pull the paper tray out, and adjust the side guides and end guide to match the
paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully, then push down the
green lock at the rear inside the tray.
13. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decals [J] to the paper trays.
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or
the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these
optional units.
B156/B220
1-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
[A]
B156I517.WMF
14. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A]
out.
15. Install the optional ARDF (EU model only) or the optional platen cover (see
ARDF Installation or Platen Cover Installation).
[C]
[E]
[B]
B810I504.WMF
[D]
B502I006.WMF
16. Install the stamp cartridge [B] if the ARDF [C] was installed.
17. Attach the cloth holder [D] to the left side of the scanner as shown. Then put
the cloth [E] in the cloth holder if the ARDF was installed.
SM
1-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
18. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
automatically performs the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the
Start button LED turns green.
19. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
20. Perform Automatic Color Calibration (ACC).
NOTE: Since this machine has been subject to color adjustment using
Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) at the factory, there is no need to
make automatic color calibration again if the customer is satisfied with
the image sample. If the customer is not satisfied, do the following.
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode Maintenance ACC Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart. Then, close
the ADF or platen cover.
4) Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel. The machine performs the
ACC.
21. If you want to enable the Ethernet NIB function, set SP5-985-001 to 1: enable.
If you want to enable the USB function, set SP5-985-002 to 1: enable.
NOTE: The defaults are 0: disabled.
22. Make sure that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Remove the double-sided tape from
the manual holder. Then attach it [A]
to the left side of the copier ( x 2).
NOTE: When you install the 1,000-Sheet
Finisher (B408), attach the
manual holder a different location.
[A]
B156/B220
1-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156I532.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Right Stand Bracket
Left Stand Bracket
Securing Bracket
Front Stand
Rear Stand
Screw M4x10
Knob Screw
Stepped Screw
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
2
B456I001.WMF
B456I002.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the strips of tape.
SM
1-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B456I103.WMF
[B]
[D]
[D]
[C]
B456I104.WMF
2. Remove the paper trays [A] from the paper tray unit and remove the shipping
retainers.
3. Install the front stand [B] ( x2).
4. Install the rear stand [C].
5. Attach the two stand brackets [D] ( x1 each).
B156/B220
1-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[C]
[D]
[B]
B456I215.WMF
[A]
[E]
B456I212.WMF
[E]
B456I106.WMF
6. Attach the cardboard guides [A] to each side of the paper tray unit [B].
7. Set the copier [C] on the paper tray unit [B]. Use the cardboard guides.
8. Remove the cardboard guides from the paper tray unit.
9. Remove the paper trays [D] from the copier and secure the paper tray unit
( x2).
10. Attach a securing bracket [E] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown
( x1 each).
SM
1-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B456I004.WMF
11. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the paper tray.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
12. Load paper into the paper trays.
13. Turn on the main switch.
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B156/B220
1-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.4 LCT (B457)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Right Stand Bracket
Left Stand Bracket
Securing Bracket
Front Stand
Rear Stand
Screw M4x10
Knob Screw
Stepped Screw
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
2
5
4
B457I007.WMF
B457I001.WMF
CAUTION
SM
1-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
LCT (B457)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B457I003.WMF
[E]
[D]
[E]
B457I104.WMF
2. While pressing the stopper [A] attached to the guide rail, pull out the large
capacity tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x2).
4. Install the rear stand [D].
5. Attach the two stand brackets [E] ( x1 each).
B156/B220
1-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
LCT (B457)
[C]
[D]
[B]
B456I215.WMF
[A]
B457I152.WMF
[E]
[E]
B457I156.WMF
6. Attach the cardboard guides [A] to each side of the LCT [B].
7. Set the copier [C] on the LCT [B]. Use the cardboard guides.
8. Remove the cardboard guides from the LCT.
9. Remove the paper trays [D] from the copier and secure the LCT ( x2).
10. Attach a securing bracket [E] to each side of the LCT, as shown ( x1 each).
SM
1-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
[A]
B457I005.WMF
11. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the LCT.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
12. Load paper into the LCT.
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B156/B220
1-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Scale Guide
DF Exposure Glass
Stud Screw
Knob Screw
Original Size Decal
Screwdriver Tool
Cloth
Holder
Qty
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
8
B386I500.WMF
B386I101.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
SM
1-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[G]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[H]
B386I107.WMF
[H]
[I]
B386I108.WMF
2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x 2).

3. Peel off the backing [B] of the double-sided tape attached to the glass holder.
4. Place the DF exposure glass [C] on the glass holder.
NOTE: When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point
[D] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
5. Peel off the backing [E] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
scale guide [F], then install the scale guide [F] ( x 2 removed in step 2).
6. Install two stud screws [G].
7. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown.
8. Secure the DF unit with two screws [H].
9. Connect the cable [I] to the copier.
B156/B220
1-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[B]
[A]
B386I110.WMF
B386I111.WMF
[C]
B386I501.WMF
10. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
11. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the
exposure glass.
12. Close the ARDF.
13. Attach the appropriate scale decal [C] as shown.
14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
15. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading
edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and
image skew (refer to Replacements and Adjustments Copy Adjustments).
SM
1-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.
1
Description
Interchange Unit
Qty
1
B481I101.WMF
B156/B220
1-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
Rev. 06/2005
Installation
[C]
[B]
[G]
[A]
B481I102.WMF
IMPORTANT: When installing the

Interchange Unit (Step 6), make
sure to insert both sides of the
interchange unit together, so that
the unit is parallel to the machine. If
you attach one side at a time,
duplex jams or noise from the
interchange unit can occur.
[F]
[E]
[D]
[F]
B481I103.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes.
2. Open the right cover [A] of the copier.
3. Open cover [B] and remove it.
4. Remove the connector cover [C] ( x1).
5. Open the cover [D] of the interchange unit.
6. Install the interchange unit [E] ( x1).
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harness at the front side.
7. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [F].
8. Reinstall the connector cover [G] which was removed in step 4 ( x 1).
SM
1-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
1.7 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
1-Bin Tray Unit
Tray
Sub-Tray
Tray Guide
Shield Mylar
Sub Paper Guide
Paper Guide
Tapping Screw M3x8
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
B156/B220
B480I101.WMF
1-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B480I107.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing this 1-bin tray unit, the optional interchange unit
(B481) must be installed.
2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover
[A] of the bridge unit.
If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step.
SM
1-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
B480I108.WMF
[E]
[C]
B480I102.WMF
[F]
[D]
B480I103.WMF
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the shield mylar [A].
Then attach the shield mylar to the 1-bin unit, as shown.
4. If the front right cover [B] is installed, remove it ( x1).
5. Remove the cover [C].
6. Install the 1-bin tray unit [D] ( x1).
7. Disconnect the connector [E] and remove the LED board [F].
B156/B220
1-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B480I104.WMF
[D]
B480I109.WMF
[E]
[G]
[F]
B480I106.WMF
8. Install the LED board [A] on the front right cover ( x1).
9. Reinstall the front right cover [B] ( x2, x1).
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the paper guide [C].
Then attach the paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown.
11. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the sub paper guide
[D]. Then attach the sub paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as
shown.
12. Install the tray guide [E].
13. Install the tray [F].
14. Install the sub-tray [G].
15. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM
1-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
1.8 SHIFT TRAY (B510)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Shift Tray Unit
Paper Guide - Large
Paper Guide - Small
Stepped Screw
Core
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
5
1
B510I111.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[E]
B510I102.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page).
2. Remove the cover [A] ( x1).
3. Replace screw [B] with a stepped screw [C].
4. Install the large paper guide [D] and two small paper guides [E], as shown.
B156/B220
1-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[F]
B510I211.WMF
[E]
B510I103.WMF
5. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

6. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x2).
7. Pass the harnesses [C] through the opening [D], and install the shift tray unit
[E], as shown.
NOTE: 1) Set the shift tray on the stepped screw.
2) The shift tray must be installed under the paper guides [F] installed
in step 4.
SM
1-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
[A]
B510I201.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
B510I202.WMF
8. Remove the screws [A]. ( x 6)

9. Remove the SD-card slot cover [B]. ( x 1)
10. Open the controller box [C].
[D]
[F]
[E]
B510I203.WMF
11. Connect the harness [D], as shown.

12. Attach the harnesses with clamps [E]. Then attach the core [F].
NOTE: Make sure that the core [F] does not cause damage to the harnesses.
13. Assemble the machine.
14. Turn on the main power switch.
15. Check the shift tray operation.
B156/B220
1-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)

No.
1
2
3
Description
By-pass Tray Unit
Tapping Screw
Decal
Qty
1
3
1
2
3
B490I001.WMF
[A]
B490I113.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page).
2. Remove the entrance cover [A] (x 2).
SM
1-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
[A]
[B]
B490I114.WMF
B490I002.WMF
3. Install the by-pass tray unit [A] ( x3, x1).

4. Attach the decal [B] as shown.
5. Turn the main power switch on and check the by-pass tray function.
6. Go into the SP mode. Change these SP settings.
SP1003
001
002
003
004
Default
(No By-pass tray)
0
2
2
0
By-pass tray
installed
2
0
0
2
Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration.
B156/B220
1-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Duplex Unit
Upper Bracket
Rear Holder Bracket
Front Holder Bracket
Clip
Tapping Screw M4x6
Tapping Screw M3x6
Qty
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
6
7
B509I101.WMF
SM
1-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
B509I102.WMF
[B]
B509I103.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B481)
must be installed.
1. Remove all tapes (see the previous page).
2. Remove five covers [A] ( x1).
3. Install three brackets [B] ( x1 each M4x6).
B156/B220
1-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
[D]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B509I104.WMF
[G]
[F]
B509I105.WMF
[E]
4. Set the duplex unit [A] on the brackets [B] (1 clip).

5. Attach the link [C] to the shaft [D] and secure it with the clip.
6. Remove the connector cover [E] ( x1).
7. Connect the cable [F] and secure the grounding wire [G] ( x1).
8. Install the connector cover.
9. Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function.
SM
1-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Bridge Unit
Rear Joint Bracket
Front Joint Bracket
Knob Screw
Screw M3x6
Screw M4x14
Core
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
B482I151.WMF
[A]
B482I500.WMF
CAUTION
2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it away into the machine.
B156/B220
1-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
[A]
[B]
[B]
B482I102.WMF
[F]
[D]
[C]
B482I209.WMF
[E]
[G]
B482I103.WMF
3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x1).

4. Remove two covers [B] ( x1 each).
5. Remove the connector cover [C] ( x 1).
6. Remove the rear cover [D] ( x2).
7. Pass the harnesses [E] through the opening [F], and install the bridge unit [G]
( x2).
8. Reinstall the front right cover.
SM
1-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
[A]
[A]
B482I207.WMF
[B]
[C]
B482I208.WMF
9. Remove the screws [A] ( x 6).

10. Remove the SD-card slot cover [B] ( x 1).
11. Open the controller box [C].
B156/B220
1-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
[C]
[A]
[B]
B482I206.WMF
12. Connect the harnesses [A], as shown.

13. Attach the harnesses with clamps [B].
14. Attach the core [C].
NOTE: Make sure that the core does not cause damage to the harnesses.
15. Reinstall the rear cover.
16. When the finisher (Machine code:
B408) will be installed, attach the
front joint bracket [D] and rear joint
bracket [E] ( x2 each).
17. Install the optional finisher (refer to the
finisher installation procedure).
[E]
B482I105.WMF
[D]
SM
1-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)

2
10
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
Qty
Front Joint Bracket

Rear Joint Bracket
Rear Joint Bracket
Grounding Plate
Copy Tray
Staple Position Decal
Screw - M4 x 14
Knob Screw - M4 x 10
Screw - M3 x 8
Knob Screw - M3 x 8
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
For
B022/B027/B031/
B089/B093/B097

--

(Use 3)

B408I502.WMF
For
B051/B052/
B156/B220
--------

--
--
For
B079/B082/
B135/B138

--

(Use 4)

= Necessary, --- = Not necessary
B156/B220
1-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: The following options must be installed before installing this finisher.
- Bridge Unit (B482)
- Paper Tray Unit (B456) or LCT (B457)
Also, the optional adjustment table (B488) is required.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
SM
1-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
[E]
[D]
[H]
[B]
[C]
B408I152.WMF
[G]
[I]
[F]
B408I114.WMF
2. Unpack the adjustment table (B488).

3. Set the finisher [A] on the adjustment table [B] and secure the finisher
( x 1).
4. Install the grounding plate [C] which is in the accessory box for the adjustment
table ( x 2).
5. Install the front joint bracket [D] ( x 2 - M4 x 14) and rear joint bracket [E] ( x
2 M4 x 14).
6. Open the front door [F], then pull the locking lever [G].
7. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever.
8. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw - M3 x 8) and close the front door.
9. Install the copy tray [I] (1 knob screw - M4 x 10).
10. Connect the finisher cable [H] to the main machine.
B156/B220
1-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B408I501.WMF
11. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.
12. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
SM
1-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Unit Holder
Entrance Guide
Shift Tray
Snap Ring
Knob Screw
Qty
1
1
1
2
2
B458I102.WMF
B156/B220
1-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B458I101.WMF
[C]
[B]
B458I103.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (B482)
must be installed.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
2. Install the entrance guide [A].
3. Remove the holder cover [B]. Then install the unit holder [C] (2 screws).
4. Re-install the holder cover [B].
SM
1-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B458I104.WMF
[B]
B458I105.WMF
5. Install the 500-sheet finisher [A] ( x1).

6. Install the output tray [B] as shown (2 snap rings).
7. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
B156/B220
1-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
Installation
1.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
[A]
B156I518.WMF
[C]
[B]
B156I519.WMF
1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Peel off the platen sheet [B] and place it on the exposure glass.
3. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [C] on the
exposure glass.
4. Gently close the platen cover.
SM
1-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15 PRINTER OPTIONS

1.15.1 POSTSCRIPT 3 (B769)
CAUTION
Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following
procedure.
[Slot 1]
[Slot 2]
[B]
[Slot 3]
[A]
B769I001.WMF
1. Remove the SD-card cover [A] from the machine ( x 1).

2. Make sure that the printed face [B] of the SD card points to the rear of the
machine. Then push it slowly into SD-card slot 2 (middle slot) until you hear a
click.
3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).
4. Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal to the front cover.
B156/B220
1-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.15.2 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)
CAUTION
Disconnect the main machines power cord before you start this procedure.
[A]
[B]
B609I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot A ( x 2).
2. Install the file-format-converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when you tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can cause this board to disconnect from the machine.
SM
1-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.3 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (B581)
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394
(FireWire), or Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B581I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B156/B220
1-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the User Tools/Counterkey.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
4. Press IEEE1394.
5. Press the following soft keys on the touch panel. Then select the following
settings:
IP Address
Select the AUTO-Obtain (DHCP) or Specify. When you select Specify,
you can set the IP Address and Subnet Mask manually.
IP over 1394
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394
as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables SCSI Print as
the default setting for the printing method.
Bi-directional SCSI Print
Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SM
SP No.
5839 004
Name
Host Name
5839 007
Cycle Master
5839 008
BCR Mode
5839 009
5839 010
IRM 1394a
Check
Unique ID
5839 011
Logout
5839 012
5839 013
Login
Login MAX
Function
Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: Standard, IRM Color Copy, and
Always Effective.
Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
1-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.4 IEEE 1284 (B679)

Installation Procedure
CAUTION
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B679I001.WMF
2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B156/B220
1-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
1.15.5 IEEE802.11B (G813)
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of the following network interfaces at the same
time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics),
IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
G813I001.WMF
2. Attach the wireless LAN board [B] to the controller board (Knob-screw x 2).
3. Install the wireless LAN card [C]. The printed side must point to the front of the
machine.
4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
SM
1-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
[C]
[B]
[A]
B529I008.WMF
If wireless LAN reception is not very good, install the extended antenna.
5. Remove the wireless LAN card [A] from the machine.
6. Remove the standard antenna [B] from the wireless LAN card.
7. Install the extended antenna [C] on the LAN card, as shown.
NOTE: The antenna jack must be at the bottom end.
8. Twine the extended-antenna wires seven or eight times.
9. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the antennas, and
stick the antennas on the machine.
B156/B220
1-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings Network (tab) Network I/F Setting
4. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either 802.11 Ad hoc, Ad hoc or
Infrastructure.
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required
on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128
bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects Active or Inactive. (Inactive is default.)
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps
5.5 Mbps
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
SM
140 m (153 yd.)

200 m (219 yd.)
270 m (295 yd.)
400 m (437 yd.)
1-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
10. Press Return to Default to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

Press Yes to initialize the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b
SP No.
5840 006
Name
Channel MAX
5840 007
Channel MIN
5840 011
UP mode
WEP Key Select

Name
SSID
WEP Key
WEP Mode
B156/B220
Function
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Function
Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
1-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.15.6
BLUETOOTH (B736)
CAUTION
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F
Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B]
(Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when
you tighten the knobscrews. Do not tighten
them manually. It can
cause this board to
disconnect from the
machine.
[A]
[B]
3. Install the Bluetooth card [C] in the

slot of the Bluetooth board.
[D]
[C]
4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
B736I001.WMF
1.15.7 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
(User Tools/ Printer Settings/ List Test Print/ Config. Page)
The same data can also be printed using the printer service mode.
(Print Summary 5.2.1)
All installed options are listed in the System Reference column.
SM
1-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
Rev. 06/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
1.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
z Supervisor login password
z Administrator login name
z Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings
must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.
2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication Machine Management is ON.
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.
3. Make sure that under Machine Management Administrator Tools is enabled
(selected).
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
ACCESSORY CHECK
The B156/B220 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
Qty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
B156/B220
1-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006
Installation
1.16.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL
[A]
B735I901.WMF
[B]
B735I903.WMF
1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.

2. Make sure that:
1) The box has two pieces of tape [A] attached to the corners in the photo,
AND
2) These two tapes are blank.
If you can see VOID on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the
components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline
via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any
tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated.
3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see VOID written on the box under
the tape [B]. This is normal.
4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option
is replaced due to a failure.
CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.
SM
1-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.16.2
Rev. 06/2006
INSTALLATION
NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2. But,
the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card slot 2.
Because of this, you must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first (
5.9) if the postscript option is installed and you want to install the Data
Overwrite Security unit. Move the Data Overwrite Security application (slot
3) to the SD Card that contains the Printer/Scanner application (slot 1).
1. If the machine is ON, turn the
operation switch and the main
power switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect
the network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
4. With the printed side of the SD
card [B] facing the rear of the
machine, install the DOS SD card
in SD card slot C2.
[A]
5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect

the network cable.
6. Turn the main power switch ON.
[B]
B735I001.WMF
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup).

8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
z
[A]: ROM Number/Firmware Version HDD Format Option
[B]: Loading Program GW1a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)

Loading Program GW2a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report:
ROM No. / Firmware

Version [A]
Loading Program [B]
Data Overwrite Security

Unit Type C
HDD Format Option:
GW1a_zoffy:
B7355050 / 0.04
B7355050 / 0.04
Data Overwrite Security

Unit Type D
HDD Format Option:
GW2a_zoffy:
B7355060 / 0.03
B7355060 / 0.03
B156/B220
1-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
firmware is upgraded.
If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B156/B220 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D.
If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
13. Turn Auto Erase Memory Setting ON:

User Tools >> System Settings >> Administrator Tools >> Auto Erase Memory
Setting >> ON
If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool
setting.
14. Exit User Tools.
15. Power the machine OFF/ON.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
[C]
14:13
Copies
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is displayed for a short time under the icon.
The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
SM
1-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
Rev. 06/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
1.17 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[B]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156I520.WMF
[D]
B156I524.WMF
[G]
[F]
B156I552.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2).
3. Remove the upper right cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the cap [D].
5. Install the bracket [E] ( x 2).
6. Connect the cable [F] to the I/O board and route it as shown.
NOTE: If the cable is installed correctly, the length [G] is about 140 mm.
B156/B220
1-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[F]
B156I526.WMF
[E]
[G]
B156I527.WMF
7. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B]
and insert the key counter holder [C].
8. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
9. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2).
10. Install the stepped screw [E].
11. Connect the cable [F].
12. Hook the key counter holder assembly [G] onto the stepped screw and secure
it ( x 1).
13. The restricted access control for the key counter is enabled by the Copier UP
mode.
SM
1-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
1.18 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[G]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B156I620.WMF
[E]
[H]
B156I531.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.

3. Remove the lower rear cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the oil tank [D].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [E] in the notch [F] in the controller box. Then, oil
does not fall from the pipe to the floor.
5. Connect the two connectors [G].
6. Install the oil tank at its initial position.
NOTE: When you install the oil tank, make sure that the position of the mark
[H] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
this, the oil is not correctly supplied to the fusing unit.
B156/B220
1-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B156I529.WMF
B156I528.WMF
7. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3), left scale [B] ( x 2), and exposure glass
[C].
NOTE: When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
8. Install the anti-condensation heater [E] ( x 2, x 1).
9. Reinstall the exposure glass and the scales.
SM
1-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER
1.19 TRAY HEATER
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B156I530.WMF
B156I620.WMF
[E]
CAUTION
procedure.
4. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
5. Pass the connector [D] through the opening [E].
6. Install the tray heater assembly [F]( x 1).
B156/B220
1-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
TRAY HEATER
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156I531.WMF
[B]
B156I551.WMF
[F]
7. Remove the oil tank [A].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [B] in the notch [C] in the controller box. Then, oil
8. Connect the two connectors [D].
9. Install the oil tank at its initial position.
[E] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
10. Connect the heater cable to the ac cable [F].
11. Reassemble the machine.
SM
1-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
1.20 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B456I502.WMF
B456I620.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.

2. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the joint brackets [D] ( x 1 each).
5. Remove the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit [E] ( x 2).
6. Slide out the paper trays from the optional paper tray unit.
B156/B220
1-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A]
[C]
[B]
[J]
B456I201.WMF
[H]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[L]
[G]
[K]
[I]
B456I292.WMF
7. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

8. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
9. Connect the heater connector [D] to the cable [E].
10. Remove the oil tank [F].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [G] in the notch [H] in the controller box. Then, oil
11. Install the clamp [I].
NOTE: Make sure that the ac cable [J] from the main machine goes behind the
bracket [K].
12. Connect the cable to the ac cable [J]. Then attach the cable with the clamp.
13. Install the oil tank and the rear covers.
[L] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
SM
1-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
1.21 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[B]
[D]
[E]
[D]
B457I502.WMF
[C]
[A]
B457I620.WMF
[F]
[G]
B457I501.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
2. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the joint brackets [D] ( x 1 each).
5. Remove the rear cover for the optional LCT [E] ( x 2).
6. Slide out the paper tray [F] from the optional LCT.
7. Push stopper [G] on the right slide rail and remove the paper tray.
B156/B220
1-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
Installation
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[B]
[C]
[L]
B457I251.WMF
[K]
[H]
[J]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[I]
B457I291.WMF
8. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

9. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
10. Connect the heater connector [D] to the cable [E].
11. Remove the oil tank [F].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [G] in the notch [H] in the controller box. Then, oil
12. Install the clamp [I].
NOTE: Make sure that the ac cable [J] from the main machine goes behind the
oil bracket [K].
13. Connect the cable to the ac cable [J]. Then attach the cable with the clamp.
14. Install the oil tank and the rear covers.
[L] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
SM
1-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 MAIN UNIT
Preventive
Maintenance
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
Oil supply unit
Fusing subunit
PCU
Charge corona unit
B156P501.WMF
SM
2-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
2.1.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES

IMPORTANT: You must remove toner from the waste toner bottles during each service
call.
B156P502.BMP
T/B waste
toner bottle
B156P503.BMP
O/B waste
toner bottle
T/B: Transfer Belt

O/B: OPC Belt
B156/B220
2-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
PM Table
After replacing a part, reset the PM counter for that part (SP 7-804).
Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance
70K
White plate
1st mirror
2nd mirror
3rd mirror
Front/rear rails
Exposure glass
Dust shield glass
(laser optics unit)
APS sensors
Prints
80K 120K
C
C
C
C
C
C
Developments
70K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Glass cleaner
Optical cloth and dry
cloth
Dry cloth
Around the PCU

70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
50K 120K 240K
EM
Charge corona unit
Replace as whole units

or individual parts
(listed below).
R
PCU
T/B waste toner bottle
ID sensor
O/B waste toner bottle
R
R
C
Remarks
C
C
C
Empty the bottle

Blower brush
Empty the bottle
Components Parts of the Charge Corona Unit

70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
50K 120K 240K
R
R
R
70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
60K 120K 240K
R
R
R
Charge Corona Wire

Charge Corona Grid
Charge Corona Cleaner
EM
Remarks
EM
Remarks
Development Unit
Development unit-C
Development unit-M
Development unit-Y
Development unit-K
SM
2-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Refer to the PM
counter for each unit.
Do SP 3-929 after you
replace a development
unit (see section 3.5
for details).
(Not reclaimed at the
reclamation center)
B156/B220
Preventive
Maintenance
Optical System
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
Paper Feed System

Prints
80K 120K
C
C
C
R
C
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
Prints
60K 80K 120K
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
70K
Idle roller (registration)
Registration sensor
Transport guide
Feed roller (main unit)
Vertical transport roller
Friction pad (main unit)
EM
Remarks
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Fusing Unit
Fusing subunit
Oil supply unit
EM
Replace as whole units

or individual parts
(listed below).
Thermistor
Fusing oil
Remarks
I
O
.Components Parts of the Fusing Sub Unit and Oil Supply Unit
Oil supply pad

Sponge roller
Fusing cleaning roller
Rear oil absorber
Front oil absorber
Front oil tank absorber
Long oil tank absorber
Rear oil tank absorber
Fusing cover absorber
Oil supply roller
Oiling roller
Pressure cleaning roller
Fusing belt unit
Pressure roller
Pressure roller strippers
Idle gear 28Z/35Z
Gear 47Z
Front spring plate
Rear spring plate
60K
R
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
75K 120K 240K
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
EM
Remarks
I, C
I, C
See Note 1
See Note 1
I, C
I, C
See Note 1
See Note 1
I, C
See Note 1
Note 1: Carefully remove paper dust and toner (for example, with a dry cloth).
B156/B220
2-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
75K 120K 240K
R
R
70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
75K 120K 240K
Exhaust filters
Ozone filter
EM
Remarks
EM
Remarks
Others
Breaker
Check the function

once a year. See
section 3.16.
By-pass Tray Unit

70K
Feed roller
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Friction pad
SM
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
2-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
Damp cloth
B156/B220
Preventive
Maintenance
Filters
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE

Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance
Duplex Unit
Idle roller (inverter)
Idle roller
(vertical transport)
Prints
70K 80K 120K
C
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Auto-reverse Document Feeder

70K
Pickup roller
Feed belt
Separation roller
Stamp
ADF exposure glass
Platen cover
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
I
C
C
Developments
75K 120K 240K
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
EM
C
C
Remarks
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Paper Tray Unit

70K
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
Large Capacity Tray

70K
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
B156/B220
2-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIAL TOOLS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
any of the procedures in this section.
: Clip ring
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

Part Number
A0069104
B6456700
B6456800
A0929503
C4019503
Description
Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set)
SD Card
USB SD Card Adapter
C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set)
20X Magnification Scope
3.2 FILTERS
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
[A]
[C]
[B]
1. Filter covers [B, D, and E]
[D]
2. Exhaust filters [A, C, G, and I]

3. Filter holder [F]
4. Ozone filter [H]
[E]
[I]
[F]
B156R819.WMF
[H]
SM
3-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[G]
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3 SCANNER UNIT

3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[A]
[D]
1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)

2. Left scale [B] ( x 2)
[B]
NOTE: After replacing the left scale,
adjust the scanner white
level ( 3.14).
3. Exposure glass [C]
NOTE: When reassembling, position the
glass marker [D] at the rear-left
corner.
[C]
B156R222.WMF
3.3.2 APS SENSORS
[A]
1. Exposure glass ( 3.3.1)

2. Original length sensor 1 [A]
( x 1, x 1)
[C]
3. Original length sensor 2 [B]

( x 1, x 1)
[B]
4. Original width sensor [C]

( x 1, x1)
B156R223.WMF
B156/B220
3-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
[B]
[A]
2. Rear cover ( 3.4.2)

3. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)
B156R004.WMF
[C]
5. Lens block assembly [C]
( x 4, x 4)
NOTE: Do not remove the paintlocked screws.
6. After reassembling, input the data
in accordance with the data sheet
included in the spare SBU unit (
SP4-540).
Refer to the diagram on the next
page.
Row No. 1: Numbers 1 to 6
please ignore
Row No. 2: Numbers 7 to 10
B156R224.WMF
please store in the following SP
modes
7: SP 4-540-001
8: SP 4-540-002
9: SP 4-540-003
10: SP 4-540-004
Row No. 3: Numbers 11 to 14 please store in the following SP modes
11: SP 4-540-021
12: SP 4-540-022
13: SP 4-540-023
14: SP 4-540-024
Before inputting the number, check whether it is + or (look at the data
sheet), then input a +ve or ve number accordingly.
7. Check the registrations ( SP4-010/011 Chapter 3, Copy adjustments)
NOTE: After replacing the left scale, adjust the scanner white level ( 3.14).
SM
3-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Inner cover [B] ( x 4)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
B156R999.JPG
B156/B220
3-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

2. Exposure lamp stabilizer bracket [A]
( x 2, x 2)
[A]
[B]
B156R007.WMF
3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP

[D]
[C]

3. Operation panel [A]
( x 5, x 1)
4. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2)
5. Scanner left cover [C] ( x 1)
[A]
6. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)

[B]
B156R002.WMF
[E]
7. Left frame [E] ( x 2)

8. Front frame [F] ( x 5)
[F]
B156R225.WMF
SM
3-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [B] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
9. Scanner I/O board ( 3.3.6)

10. Rear frame with the rear rail frame [A]
( x 9, x 1)
B156R103.WMF
11. Lamp guard [B] ( x 2)
[B]
[F]
12. Release the cable holder [C].
[C]
13. Pulley [D]

NOTE: Use caution not to
bend the pulley guides.
[D]
14. Push down the part [E]

15. Slide out the scanner lamp [F]
NOTE: After replacing the
scanner lamp, adjust
the scanner white level
( 3.14).
[E]
B156R101.WMF
B156/B220
3-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
16. Disconnect the connector [A].
[A]
17. Remove the paper length sensor [B]

( x 1).
19. Remove the cable guide [D].
[D]
Reassembling
When you install the scanner lamp,
make sure that the binding [E] is set as
shown. Also, make sure that the cable
that has a black tube is installed on the
cable guide as shown [F].
[B]
[F]
[E]
B156R102.WMF
The cable must not be loose. Move the

clamp [G] to adjust the tension in the
cable.
OK
NG
B156R104.WMF
[G]
SM
3-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
18. Remove the scanner lamp cable (

[C] with a screw).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD

[A]
1. Scanner right cover and scanner

rear cover ( 3.3.5)
2. Scanner I/O board [A]
( x 4, x 7)
B156R006.WMF
3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR

[B]
2. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, Spring x 1)
[A]
3. Timing belt [B]
B156R008.WMF
3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

1. Front frame ( 3.3.5)
[A]
2. To make reassembly easy, slide the

first scanner to the right
( Reassembling the Front Scanner
Wire).
3. Front scanner wire clamp [A]
4. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
( x 1)
5. Front scanner wire and scanner drive
pulley [C] ( x 1)
B156/B220
[B]
[C]
3-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R226.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

1. Pass the end with the ball [A] through
the left square hole from the front.
2. Position the center ball [B] in the
middle of the notch, as shown by the
arrow.
[C]
[A]
[B]
3. Pass the ball end [A] through the

notch on the right.
4. Wind the end with the ring [C]
clockwise three times; wind the ball
end [A] counterclockwise five times.
NOTE: The two red marks [D] should
meet when you have done
this.
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape,
so you can easily handle the pulley
and wire during installation.
[F]
B156R227.WMF
[H]
[G]
6. Install the drive pulley on the

shaft [E].
NOTE: Do not screw the pulley
onto the shaft yet.
7. Insert the ball end into the slit [F],
with the end going via the rear
track of the left pulley [G] and
the rear track of the movable
pulley [H].
[E]
SM
3-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R228.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
8. Hook the ring end onto the front

scanner wire bracket [A], with the
end going via the front track of
the right pulley [B] and the front
track of the movable pulley [C].
NOTE: Do not screw the
scanner wire bracket in
place yet.
9. Remove the tape from the drive
pulley.
[A]
[C]
[B]
10. Insert a scanner positioning pin

[D] through the 2nd carriage hole
[E] and the left holes [F] in the
front rail. Insert another scanner
positioning pin [G] through the
1st carriage hole [H] and the right
holes in the front rail [I].
11. Insert two more scanner
positioning pins through the
holes in the rear rail.
[D]
B156R229.WMF
[G]
[L]
[J]
[E]
[K]
12. Screw the drive pulley to the

shaft [J].
[H]
13. Screw the scanner wire bracket

to the front rail [K].
[F]
[I]
B156R230.WMF
14. Install the scanner wire clamp [L].

15. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: 1) After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd
carriages move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 10 through 15.
2) After replacing the carriage, adjust the scanner white level ( 3.14).
B156/B220
3-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

[A]
2. Scanner motor ( 3.3.7)
3. Left frame ( 3.3.5)
6. To make reassembly easy, slide to the

right ( Reassembling the Rear
Scanner Wire).
B156R103.WMF
[C]
[B]
7. Rear scanner wire clamp [B]

8. Rear scanner wire bracket [C] ( x 1)
9. Scanner motor gear [D] ( x 1)
10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive
pulley [E] ( x 1)
[D]
B156R231.WMF
[E]
SM
3-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Rear frame [A] with the rear rail frame

( x 9, x 1)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Pass the end with the ball [A]
through the right square hole
from the front.
2. Position the center ball [B] in
the middle of the notch, as
shown by the arrow.
[A]
[C]
[B]
3. Pass the ball end [A] through

the drive pulley notch.
[D]
4. Wind the end with the ring [C]

counterclockwise three times;
wind the ball end [A] clockwise
five times.
NOTE: The two red marks [D]
should meet when you
have done this.
B156R232.WMF
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and
wire during installation.
6. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.
7. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding pattern is a mirror image of that of the front scanner wire.
8. Perform steps 10 through 15 in Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire.
B156/B220
3-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.4 LASER UNIT

WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
CATION-CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT-LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION
CAUTION
VORSICHT
>PS<
B156CAUTION.WMF
B156R233.WMF
DANGER
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit.
This printer uses a class-1 laser beam with a wavelength of 650 nm and an
output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
SM
3-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.4.2 LASER UNIT
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156R924.WMF
B156I620.WMF
1. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)

2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Lower rear cover [C] ( x 2)
4. Remove the screw [D]. Then loosen the eight screws [E].
5. Move the controller box cover [F]
to the right, and then remove it.
6. LD unit cable [G] ( x 1)
[G]
B156R151.WMF
B156/B220
3-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
7. Open the left cover [A] ( x 2).

[C]
8. ID chip connectors [B] ( x 4)

9. Development units [C] x 4 ( 3.5)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B156R234.WMF
10. Left cover [D]

11. Open the front cover.
[D]
12. Lower left cover [E] ( x 3)
[E]
B156R235.WMF
[F]
13. Dust shield glass cleaner lever [F]
NOTE: The dust shield glass cleaner
lever is the blue lever at the
left side of the charge corona
unit ( 3.6.3).
B156R236.WMF
SM
3-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
[A]
14. LD cover [A] ( x 2)
15. Laser unit [B] ( x 4, Flat cable x 1)
NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the flat cable with
the blue side down.
[B]
B156R237.WMF
Adjusting for Image Skew

[A]
1. Positioning pin [A] ( x 1)

2. Loosen (x 4) [B].
3. Adjust the position of the laser unit
4. Fasten (x 4) [B].
NOTE: After changing the position of
the laser unit, do not reinstall
the positioning pin. Keep the
pin in a safe place.
[ NOTE]
[B]
B156R238.WMF
0.6mm
NOTE: When the image skews as

shown on the right, move the unit
1 mm in the direction of the black
arrow as shown in the diagram
above and to the right.
Paper feed
(A3 SEF)
B156R239.WMF
B156/B220
3-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
D-Phase Adjustment
This adjustment corrects the difference in density on the left and right sides of the
paper. The data sheet (distributed with the laser unit) is necessary for this
adjustment. After replacing the laser unit, do the following adjustment.
NOTE: 1) If the D-phase adjustment is not made, a difference in the density may
be seen. This difference can be conspicuous when the gray scale in the
Color Chart C-4 is copied or when an original is repeatedly copied.
2) The D-phase adjustment is necessary whenever a difference in the
density is seen. Keep the data sheet inside the front cover for future
use.
1. Print out the test pattern with SP5955-1 and select pattern 50 (
5.1.3).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Check if horizontal black stripes can

be seen.
a) If stripes cannot be seen
(Figure 2), the D-phase
adjustment is not required.
b) If stripes can be seen (Figure
1), the D-phase adjustment is
required. Go on to the next
step.
Feed direction
B156R241.WMF
3. See the value of Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2 below the bar code on the data sheet,
and find the range in Table 1 which
Adjustment
Mag. Shift
includes the value.
Error: LD1-2
SP2-951-1 SP2-951-2
11.8
10.3
8.9
7.5
6.1
4.7
3.3
1.9
0.9
1.1
2.1
3.5
4.9
6.3
7.7
9.1
10.5
4. Find the corresponding values of

Adjustment in Table 1, and input
them in SP2-951-1 and SP2-951-2
respectively.
For example, when the value of
Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2 on the
data sheet is 4.0, enter 3 in
SP2-951-1 and enter 0 in SP2951-2.
5. Print out the test pattern with SP5955-1 and select pattern 50.
6. Check if vertical black stripes can
be seen.
7. After you complete the test prints,
set SP 5-955-1 to 0.
SM
10.4
9.0
7.6
6.2
4.8
3.4
2.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
3.4
4.8
6.2
7.6
9.0
10.4
11.8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table 1
3-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment

1. Print out the test pattern with
SP5-955-1, then select pattern
15 ( 5.1.3).
2. Check if vertical black stripes
can be seen.
a) If stripes cannot be seen
(Figure 2), laser beam
pitch adjustment is not
required.
b) If stripes can be seen
(Figure 1), laser beam
pitch adjustment is
required. Go on to the
next step.
Feed direction
B156R240.WMF
3. To adjust the laser beam pitch,

tighten or loosen the screw [A]
on the LD unit holder.
[A]
4. Print out the test pattern with

SP5-955-1 and select pattern
15.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until
the black stripes disappear
(Figure 2).
6. After you complete the test
prints, set SP 5-955-1 to 0.
B156R242.WMF
B156/B220
3-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD
WARNING
Do not touch any edges of the polygon mirror, spring, or bracket. These
edges can cause serious injury.
1. Development units x 4 ( 3.5), LD cover
( 3.4.2)
2. Cover [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Before removing the cover, clean
the cover to prevent toner from
entering into the unit.
B156R243.WMF
[C]
3. Polygonal mirror motor [B]

( x 1, x 4)
NOTE: Do not touch the mirror
surface.
[B]
4. Synch. detection board (LSD) [C]

( x 1, x 1)
SM
3-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

CAUTION
Do not touch the development unit sleeves or ID chip terminals.
WARNING
Turn off the main switch before you start the procedures in this section.
1. Open the left cover [A] ( x 2)
2. ID chip connector [B]
3. Lift up the development unit [C],
and pull it out of the machine.
[B]
NOTE: Remove the units in the order

K, C, Y, M. For example,
before removing the M unit,
remove the K, C, and Y units
first.
[C]
4. Remove the dummy toner

cartridge from the new
development unit.
[A]
B156R234.WMF
5. Remove the toner cartridge from

the old development unit, and put
it in the new development unit.
6. Put the new development unit in the machine.
7. Turn on the main switch and start SP3-929 (Development Unit Replace).
1) Select the colors for the development units that you replaced.
2) Select 1.execute for the colors that you selected. Then, push OK.
3) Repeat 1) and 2) until all the colors of the replaced development units
are selected.
4) Go out from the SP mode.
Then, open and close the
front cover. The machine
does the development unit
set-up procedure.
NOTE: A white line or band may
appear on one end of the
paper if a development unit
is incorrectly installed. To
correct this, pull out the
development unit partially
(about 30 mm) [D] and
slowly reinstall it.
B156/B220
[D]
30mm
B156R246.WMF
3-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: 1) Before replacing any of the parts or consumables in this section, cover
the floor with cloth or some sheets of paper.
2) Never tilt the unit. The toner may come out of the unit.
3) When handling the unit, grasp the brown (front) and metal (top) grips.
Never touch the OPC (left) or transfer (right) belts.
4) After removing the photoconductor unit, cover it with a light-proof sheet.
Keep it in a dark place.
[B]
[A]
B156R247.WMF
1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Open the right cover [B].
3. Pull the unit out of the machine ( x 3).
4. Grasp the brown and metal grips.
5. Lift the unit and remove it.
SM
3-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6. Before you install the new PCU, remove the cap [C].
[C]
Install the new PCU carefully. If you install it too quickly, this will cause damage to
the quenching lamp support.
Deformed
B156/B220
3-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Replacement
and
Adjustment
If you removed or installed the left inner cover, make sure that the projections
shown here are below the cover (they must not be seen).
SM
3-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES

1. T/B waste toner bottle [A]
[A]
B156R248.WMF
2. O/B waste toner bottle [B]

NOTE: There is much more O/B
waste toner than T/B waste
toner. Dispose of the O/B
waste toner whenever you
work on the machine.
[B]
B156R249.WMF
Toner Disposal
1) Remove the cap [C].
2) Dispose of the toner according to local regulations.
[C]
T/B waste toner

bottle
O/B waste
toner bottle
B156R250.WMF
T/B: Transfer Belt

O/B: OPC Belt
B156/B220
3-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER

1. Modular cable [A]
2. Charge corona unit [C] (Loosen
[B])
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
B156R251.WMF
3. Front bracket ( x 1) [D]
[F]
[E]
4. Grid [E]
5. Rear bracket [F]
[D]
B156R252.WMF
[H]
6. Front wire cover [G]
[J]
7. Rear wire cover [H]
[G]
8. Wire cleaner [I]

9. Unhook the corona wire [J].
[I]
B156R253.WMF
SM
3-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
When you remove the charge corona unit, keep the unit level while you pull it out
carefully. Do not lower or turn the unit.
B156/B220
3-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR

1. Charge corona unit ( 3.6.3)
2. Front cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Motor [B]
[A]
B156R254.WMF
3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT

1. O/B waste toner bottle ( 3.6.2)
[A]
2. Photoconductor unit ( 3.6.1)

4. Drive gear [A] ( x 1)
[B]
5. Rear brace [B] ( x 1)

6. Front brace [C] ( x 1)
7. OPC belt cleaning unit [D] ( x 2)

NOTE: Hold up the photoconductor unit
while removing the OPC belt
cleaning unit.
[D]
[C]
B156R255.WMF
3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

[A]
1. Photoconductor unit ( 3.6.1)
[B]
2. Bracket [A] ( x 3)
3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit [B]
(spring x 2)
B156R919.WMF
SM
3-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT
1. Open the right lower cover [A].
2. Right cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B156R256.WMF
[A]
3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER

1. Brace [A] ( x 1)
2. Remove the screws ( x 4) for
the discharge unit.
NOTE: To remove the screws,
turn the roller unit [B] on
its pivot.
[B]
[A]
B156R403.WMF
3. Transfer roller [C]

( x 2, Bushing x 2, Bearing x 2)
[C]
B156R404.WMF
B156/B220
3-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before
beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause
serious burns.
NOTE: 1) After removing the fusing unit, see if oil had dripped from the exit of the
oil pipe.
2) Do not turn the main power on with the fusing unit out of the machine if
an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and the
machine will incorrectly detect oil.
[B]
1. Remove the screw [A], and pull

out the unit out of the machine.
2. Unhook the bottom stopper [B],
and grasp the rear end [C] of the
unit.
[C]
[E]
3. Slide the unit to the end of the

base plate [D].
4. Release the unit [E].
5. After you install a new fusing unit,
reset the PM counter with SP 7804-7.
[D]
[A]
B156R257.WMF
3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT

[B]
1. Fusing unit ( 3.8.1)

2. Put the fusing unit on a level
place.
3. Remove the cap [A] from the
fusing unit cover, and put it in the
oil supply opening [B].
[C]
4. Connector cover [C] ( x 1)
[D]
5. Oil supply unit [D] ( x 1)

NOTE: Do not touch the oiling felt.
NOTE: When reassembling, install
the oil supply unit, remove the
[E]
cap from the oil supply
opening, wipe the cap and the
[A]
cap holder [E] with dry cloth, and put it on the holder.
SM
3-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R258.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD

CAUTION: Empty silicone oil out of the oil supply unit into a vessel or container
before beginning the following steps.
[A]
1. Oil supply unit [A] ( 3.8.2)
[C]
2. Springs [B] x 2
3. Cleaning roller assembly [C]
( x 1, Shoulder screw x 1)
4. Stay [D] ( x 1)
5. Slide the pad [E] and pull it out.
NOTE: If you cannot put the springs in the
places, remove the cleaning roller
( 3.8.4).
[D]
[E]
[B]
B156R259.WMF
3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER

[B]
1. Oil supply unit ( 3.8.2)

2. Cleaning roller [A] (Bushing x 2, x
2)
[A]
3. Fusing sponge roller [B] (Bushing x

2, x 2, Spring x 2)
B156R260.WMF
B156/B220
3-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[D]
[B]
[C]
B156R261.WMF

2. Upper cover ( 3.8.6)
3. Oil supply roller [A] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 1, one-way clutch x 1)
NOTE: Make sure that the one-way clutch [D] is at the front side of the
machine.
4. Oiling roller [B] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 2)
SM
3-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS

2. Gear bracket [A] ( x 2)
[B]
3. Upper cover [B]

( x 1, shoulder screw x 1)
[A]
B156R262.WMF
4. Pull out the lamp (350W) [C] (

x 2).
5. Pull out the lamp (770W) [D] (
x 2, Cable x 1).
NOTE: 350W and 770W are
printed on the respective
terminals.
[D]
[C]
When installing the fusing

lamps
[F]
B156R263.WMF
Make sure that you install the lamp in the correct orientation. The beveled terminals
[E] must be at the front of the machine as
shown, and the square terminals [F]
must be at the rear. If not, paper
creasing and/or unsatisfactory fusing can
occur.
[E]
B156/B220
3-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R264.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT

1. Lamps ( 3.8.6)
[C]
2. Drive gear [A]
[B]
3. Hot roller lamp harness terminal [B]

( x 1)
4. Fusing inner unit [C] ( x 2, x 3)
B156R265.WMF
3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE

[A]
1. Fusing inner unit ( 3.8.7)

2. Pressure roller thermofuse [A] ( x 2)
B156R266.WMF
SM
3-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS

[F]
[C]
[B]
2. Fusing lamps ( 3.8.6)

[D]
4. Gear [A]
[E]
NOTE: Remove the gear before
removing the stripper pawl
assembly; otherwise, the
gear may be damaged.
[A]
5. Hot roller stripper pawl assembly [B]

(Spring x 1, x 2)
6. Hot roller stripper pawl [C]
B156R267.WMF
Reassembling
1. Put the spring [D] on the pawl.
2. Put the left end of the pawl in the square opening [E].
3. Put the front and rear ends of the pawl in the holder [F].
4. Confirm that the pawl moves correctly.
3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT

[C]
2. Springs [A] [B]

3. Separate the fusing belt unit [C] and
the pressure roller unit [D].
[B]
[D]
[A]
B156/B220
3-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R268.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR, AND

CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[G]
[C]
[F]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[E]
[D]
[B]
B156R269.WMF
1. Pressure roller unit ( 3.8.10)

2. Gear [A]
3. Spring [B] ( x 1)
4. Pressure roller stripper assembly [C] ( x 2)
5. Front bracket [D] ( x 1)
6. Bearing [E]
7. Pressure roller [F]
8. Cleaning roller [G]
SM
3-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R270.WMF

2. Pressure roller lower stay [A] ( x 2)
3. Pressure roller thermistor holder [B] ( x 1)
4. Pressure roller thermistor [C]
B156/B220
3-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS

[A]
B156R271.WMF
[D]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[L]
[K]
[J]
[I]
[E]
[H]
B156R825.WMF

2. Absorber 1 [A]
4. Absorber holder [B] ( x 1)
5. Absorber 2 [C]
6. Spring [D]
7. Absorber holder [E] ( x 1)
8. Absorber 3 [F]
9. Spring [G]
10. Base bracket [H] ( x 2)
11. Absorber holder [I] ( x 1)
12. Absorber 4 [J]
13. Absorber 5 [K]
14. Absorber 6 [L]
SM
3-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.14 FUSING ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER BELT SENSORS
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B156R051.WMF
1. Right cover
2. Pull the PCU out of the machine. ( 3.6.1)
3. Fusing entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. Fusing entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)
5. Transfer belt sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Transfer belt sensor [D]
B156/B220
3-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.15 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and wait until the paper exit unit cools down
before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The paper exit unit
can cause serious burns.
1. Open the right cover [A]

2. Upper right cover [B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B156R272.WMF
3. Open the front cover [C].

[D]
4. Upper front cover [D] ( x 1)

5. Paper exit upper cover [E]
[C]
[E]
B156R273.WMF
SM
3-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
6. Paper exit tray [A] ( x 2)

7. Paper exit lower cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
B156R274.WMF
[E]
8. Paper exit unit [C] ( x 3, x 1)

NOTE: Remove 2 connectors
before removing the unit.
To remove the last
connector, remove the unit
and turn it over. The
connector is on the bottom.
[C]
[D]
9. Paper exit sensor [D]

10. Paper overflow sensor [E]
B156R275.WMF
B156/B220
3-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT

3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD
1. Paper trays [A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B156R276.WMF
2. Slide out the shaft [B] ( x 1).

3. Feed roller [C] (1 hook)
[B]
[C]
4. Friction pad [D] (2 hooks)

[D]
B156R277.WMF
SM
3-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Front cover [A] (L-shaped pin x 2)
2. Remove the upper tray.
3. Rear cover, lower rear cover, and
lower left cover ( 3.4.2)
4. Right cover ( 3.7.1)
5. Paper exit tray ( 3.8.14)
[A]
B156R278.WMF
[D]
7. Dust shield glass cleaning lever [B]

8. Open the left inner cover door [C].
9. Left inner cover [D] ( x 2)
10. Right inner cover [E] ( x 3)
NOTE: Pull out the PCU when
removing the right inner
cover.
[C]
[B]
[E]
B156R279.WMF
B156/B220
3-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Replacement
and
Adjustment
11. Rear right cover [A] ( x 4)
[A]
B156R604.WMF
12. SD card cover [B] ( x 1)

13. Move the controller box [C] on its
hinge, away from the machine.
( x 6)
[B]
[C]
B156R605.WMF
SM
3-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[C]
14. Connector bracket [A]

( x 2, x 1)
15. Connector bracket [B] ( x 2)
16. Pull out the handle [B].
[B]
17. Loosen the two screws on the

paper feed clutch bracket
( 3.11.6).
18. Vertical transport clutch [C]
( x 1)
[A]
B156R606.WMF
19. Transport guide [D] ( x 1)
[D]
B156R280.WMF
20. While releasing the wire, remove the

transport stay [E] ( x 2, x 1).
NOTE: You can see the wire clip from
the rear of the machine.
21. Registration sensor [F] ( x 1)
[E]
[F]
B156R281.WMF
B156/B220
3-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1

1. Transport stay ( 3.9.2)
B156R282.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Paper feed sensor 1 [A] ( x 1)

NOTE: Unhook the rear two pawls
first, move the feeler, and
unhook the front pawl.
[A]
3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS

2. Feeler [A]
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1 each)
4. Paper near-end sensor [C] ( x 1
each)
[A]
B156R283.WMF
SM
3-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[C]
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2

1. Controller box ( 3.9.2).
2. Paper trays ( 3.9.1)
3. Connector bracket [A] ( x 3)
[B]
4. Vertical transport clutch [B] ( x 1)

5. Bushing [C] ( x 1)
[C]
[A]
B156R612.WMF
6. Roller unit [D] ( x 1, x 2)
[D]
B156R284.WMF
7. Roller bracket [E] ( x 1, Bushing x

1)
[F]
8. Paper feed sensor 2 [F]
[E]
B156R285.WMF
B156/B220
3-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1

2. Lower the feeler [A].
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Paper end sensor 1 [C] ( x 1)
[A]
[B]
B156R286.WMF
3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2

2. Lower the feeler [A].
3. Paper end sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)
[A]
[B]
SM
3-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R287.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD
2. SD card cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Move the controller box [B] on its hinge,
away from the machine ( x 6).
[A]
[B]
B156R605.WMF
4. Exhaust fan [C] ( x 2, x 1)
[E]
5. I/O board cover [D] ( x 4)

6. I/O board [E] ( x 29, x 7)
[D]
[C]
B156/B220
3-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R801.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.2 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Remove the screw [A], and then loosen
the eight screws [B].
[A]
3. Slide the controller box cover [C] to the

right, and then remove it.
[C]
[B]
B156R924.WMF
[B]
4. BICU board [B] ( x 14, x 7)

NOTE: 1) Compare the settings of the
dip switches on the old
board with the settings on
the new board. If they are
different, change the
settings on the new board
to make them identical.
2) When replacing the
controller board only; leave
the 14 connectors
connected, remove the
seven screws, and
disconnect the BICU board
from the controller board.
[B]
[C]
B156R817.WMF
5. Controller board [C] ( x 7, x 2)

NOTE: Remove the NVRAM, DIMMs, and optional boards from the old
controller board and install them on the new one.
SM
3-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.3 HDD
[A]
1. Controller box cover ( 3.10.2)

2. Disconnect the connectors [A] ( x 2).
3. Move the controller box, on its hinge, away
from the machine. ( 3.10.1)
4. HDD cover [B] ( x 5)
[B]
B156R823.WMF
5. Harness cover [C]
[D]
6. HDD bracket [D] ( x 4)

7. HDD [E] ( x 4, x 2)
After replacing the hard disk, do SP5-8531 to download the preset stamp data from
the machine firmware to the new hard disk.
Then switch the machine off/on.
[E]
B156R891.WMF
[C]
B156/B220
3-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.4 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD

[A]
1. Photoconductor unit ( 3.6)

2. Right inner cover ( 3.9.2)
B156R288.WMF
[B]
4. High voltage supply board [B]

( x 18, x 6)
NOTE: When reassembling, check
that the connectors are
correctly set.
W: White connector
Y: Yellow connector
G: Green connector
B: Blue connector
R: Red connector
B156R824.WMF
SM
3-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Photoconductor unit rail [A] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: When you remove the oil pipe from the oil tank, hang the left oil pipe in the
notch in the controller box. Then, oil does not fall from the pipe to the floor
(see section 1.18: Installation Anti-Condensation Heater).
1. Move the controller box, on its
hinge, away from the machine.
( 3.10.1).
[B]
2. Lower rear cover ( 3.4.2)
[A]
3. Oil tank [A]

4. Flywheel [B] ( x 3)
5. Duct [C] with bracket [D]
( x 5, x 1)
6. Oil tank holder [E] ( x 2)
[E]
7. Bracket [F] ( x 2)
[F]
[D]
[C]
B156R814.WMF
8. Power supply unit [G]

( x 9, x 6)
[G]
B156R815.WMF
B156/B220
3-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11 DRIVE UNITS

3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES
K Development Units
[B]
2. Unhook the locks [A] and pull out

the clutch [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the black clutch
connector to the CN 334
coupler.
Replacement
and
Adjustment

hinge, away from the machine
( 3.10.1).
[A]
B156R803.WMF
C, Y and M Development Units

1. Flywheel [A] ( x 3)
[D]
2. Clutch harness bracket [B]

(x 1, x4)
3. Unhook the locks [C] and pull out

the clutches [D] ( x 1).
When reassembling, connect the

clutches as follows:
Cyan clutch connector to the blue
coupler
Yellow clutch connector to the yellow
coupler
Magenta clutch connector to the white
coupler.
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R804.WMF
In the diagram B: Blue

Y: Yellow
W: White
SM
3-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTORS

( 3.10.1).
[A]
2. Development motor for black and

cyan [A] ( x 1, x 3)
3. Development motor for yellow and
magenta [B] ( x 1, x 3)
[B]
B156R805.WMF
3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR

( 3.10.1).
[A]
2. Flywheel [A] ( x 3)
3. Main motor [B] ( x 1, x 3)
[B]
B156/B220
3-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R806.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX

1. Move the controller box on its
( 3.10.1).
2. Main motor ( 3.11.3)
3. Y and M development unit clutches
( 3.11.1)
5. Tension spring [B]
[C]
[A]
6. PCU gear box assembly [C]

( x 1, x 5)
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure
[B]
B156R807.WMF
the tension spring [B] is
correctly installed. The spring maintains the tension of the timing belt that
transfers the drive power to the gear box.
3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR

1. Move the controller box, on its hinge,
away from the machine ( 3.10.1).
2. Fusing unit motor [A] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B156R289.WMF
SM
3-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Harness bracket screws [A] ( x 2,

x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1

1. Move the controller box, on its hinge,
away from the machine ( 3.10.1).
[D]
2. Pull out the handle [A].

3. Connector bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Handle guard [C] ( x 2)
[C]
5. Paper feed clutch bracket [D]

( x 1, bushing x 2)
[A]
[B]
B156R811.WMF
3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR

( 3.10.1).
[B]
3. Pull out the handle [A].

4. Connector bracket ( 3.11.6)
5. Handle guard ( 3.11.6)
6. Paper feed motor [B] with gears
( x 1, x 6)
NOTE: When reassembling, make
sure the vertical transport
clutch is in position.
[A]
B156R810.WMF
B156/B220
3-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2

( 3.10.1).
[A]
2. Flywheel ( 3.10.5)
3. Duct [A] with bracket [B]
( x 1, x 1)
4. Pull out the lower tray.
5. Connector bracket ( 3.11.6)
6. Paper feed clutch assembly [C]
( x 1, x 3)
[C]
B156R812.WMF
3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH

( 3.10.1).
2. Unhook the lock [A] and pull the
clutch out [B] ( x 1).
[A]
[B]
SM
3-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R290.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.10 OIL PUMP
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B156R822.WMF
1. Move the controller box, on it hinge, away from the machine ( 3.10.1)
2. Pipes [A, B]
NOTE: 1) Keep a piece of waste cloth at hand. Oil may drip from the pipe.
2) When reinstalling the pump, make sure to attach the upper tube
correctly to the oil exit [C]. If not, oil may leak inside the machine.
3. I/O board cover ( 3.10.1)
4. Oil pump bracket [D] ( x 3, x 1)
5. Oil pump [E] ( x 2)
Install the correct way up. There are two tabs at the top of the pump.
B156/B220
3-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT

3.12.1 PRINTING
NOTE: 1) Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you
start these adjustments.
2) Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-955-1, No.11) to print the test
pattern for the following procedures.
3) Set SP 5-955-1 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust
them using SP1-001.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-002.
Tray
Any paper tray
By-pass feed
Duplex
1st paper tray
2nd paper tray
3rd paper tray (optional
paper tray 1), or LCT
4th paper tray (optional
paper tray 2)
By-pass feed
Duplex, side 2
SP mode
SP1-001-1
SP1-001-9
SP1-001-12
SP1-002-2
SP1-002-3
Specification
SP1-002-4
2 1.5 mm
3 2 mm
B
A
SP1-002-5
SP1-002-1
SP1-002-6
B156R291.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
SM
3-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the
specifications, adjust the leading/back side edge trim margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and front side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode
SP2-101-4
SP2-101-1
SP2-101-3
SP2-101-2
Trailing edge
Front edge
Leading edge
Back edge
Specification
3 2 mm
2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
3 2 mm
2 1.5 mm
A
B
B156R292.WMF
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
Main Scan Magnification

1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP5-955-1, No.5).
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-100-1 if
necessary. The specification is 1%.
B156/B220
3-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and
make a copy from one of the feed stations.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 to

adjust if necessary.
Standard: 1.0%.
A
A: Sub-scan magnification
B156R293.WMF
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make

a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,
and adjust them with the following SP modes if
necessary. Standard: 0 2 mm.
Sub-scan
Main-scan
SP mode
SP4-010
SP4-011
B156R294.WMF
SM
3-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
Main Scan Dot Position Correction

NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, adjust the printer registration.
1. Enter the Copy SP mode and open SP4-932.
2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value.
3. Touch the COPY Window key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode.
NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. This is because color displacement
cannot be checked properly in text mode.
4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do
this.) If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the
SP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantly
extend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step.
5. Press the SP Mode to return to the SP mode. Adjust the SP settings until the
output is acceptable.
SP4-932-1
SP4-932-2
SP4-932-3
SP4-932-4
B156/B220
Picture element correction red left edge

Picture element correction red right edge
Picture element correction blue left edge
Picture element correction blue right edge
3-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration
B
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A: Sub-registration
B: Main registration
B156R295.WMF
B156R294.WMF
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code
SP6-006-1
SP6-006-2
SP6-006-4
SM
What It Does
Main Scan Registration
Sub-Scan Registration (Simplex)
Main Scan Registration (Duplex)
3-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Adjustment Range
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
ARDF Skew Adjustment
1
3
2
B156R297.WMF
When making a copy using the ADF and the image is skewed, do the following to
fix the skewed image.
NOTE: Before doing the following steps, make sure to confirm whether or not the
copy images made in platen mode and test patterns are not skewed.
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge.
3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment.
4. Move the right hinge position to correct the skewed image.
5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image.
6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
B156/B220
3-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT

3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC)
The machine automatically calibrates the printer gamma curve. the ACC Test
Pattern is printed by the UP mode. The machine scans the test pattern and
corrects the printer gamma by comparing the ideal setting with the current image
density.
The ACC should be performed any time when the customer is not satisfied with the
image quality.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
The previous settings of the ACC can be loaded with SP5-610-6.
SM
3-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION

NOTE: Normally, the ACC is enough to adjust the color balance to achieve the
optimum print output. The printer gamma correction is only required for
fine-tuning to meet user requirements.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified using SP modes.
The SP value will be applied to the gamma curve created during ACC.
The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
Adjust only the Offset values.
NOTE: Never change the Option values (default values are 0).
Highlight (Low ID)
Middle (Middle ID)
Shadow (High ID)
ID max
Offset
Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes:

Text (Letter) mode: full colour
Photo mode: full colour
Text (Letter) mode: single color (SC)
Photo mode: single color (SC)
SP 4-918 screen: The screen with SC on it is for single colour mode settings. The
other two screens are for full colour mode settings.
B502R500.WMF
B156/B220
3-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select Copy SP.
4. Enter SP4-918 and select the screen that you are going to adjust.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( the
tables below).
- Photo Mode, Full Colour Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Shadow (High ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Level on the C-4 chart
Highlight (Low ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
4
SM
K Highlight (Low ID)

(C,M, and Y)
<on the full color
copy>
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.
3-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: 1) Never change an Option value (default value is 0).

2) Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Middle (M), Shadow (S),
and then Highlight (H).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
- Photo Mode, Single Colour Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K)
Shadow (High ID)

(K)
Level on the C-4 chart
Highlight (Low ID)

(K)
4
Adjustment Standard
on the C-4 chart.
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Shadow (High ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Level on the C-4 chart (K)
Highlight (Low ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
4
B156/B220
Adjustment Standard
on the C-4 chart.
3-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Step
1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K)
Shadow (High ID)

(K)
Level on the C-4 chart (K)
Highlight (Low ID)

(K)
4
Adjustment Standard
on the C-4 chart.
NOTE: After adjusting shadow as explained above, text parts of the test pattern
may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm
pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of
shadow again until it is.
SM
3-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour -
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are five adjustable modes selected by printer SP1-102:
1800 x 1200 photo mode
1800 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 graph mode
600 x 600 photo mode
600 x 600 text mode
Highlight
Shadow
Middle
IDmax
K
SP1-104-1
SP1-104-2
SP1-104-3
SP1-104-4
C
SP1-104-21
SP1-104-22
SP1-104-23
SP1-104-24
M
SP1-104-41
SP1-104-42
SP1-104-43
SP1-104-44
Y
SP1-104-61
SP1-104-62
SP1-104-63
SP1-104-64
Adjustment Procedure
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select Printer SP.
5. Select SP1-102 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Shadow, Middle, and then
Highlight.
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105.
B156/B220
3-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control
test sheet printed in the printer SP mode.
For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be
the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
C4 test chart
Text
Photo/Graph
1
-
2
1
1
3
2
2
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
9
9
7
12
11
8
13
13
9
16
16
10
-
C4 test chart
10
Text
10
Photo/Graph
11
9
12/
13
12
14
C4 test chart
Test Text
sheet Photo/Graph
1
-
2
1
1
3
2
2
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
9
7
10
11
8
12
13
9
16
16
10
-
10
Text
10
16
Photo/Graph
10
7
12/
13
13
16
Test
sheet
Test
sheet
C4 test chart
Y
SM
Test
sheet
3-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
15
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customers requirements.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Check the scanner white level after the left scale (with the white reference plate),
scanner lamp, 1st or 2nd scanner (carriage), or the lens block assembly is replaced.
If the white level is not correct, adjust the level.
White Level Check

1. Load the following paper (referred to as standard paper in this section) into
the paper tray.
Hammermill Copy Plus, 20 lbs. (North America)
Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe)
2. Print out the ACC test pattern (User Tools Maintenance ACC).
3. Put the ACC test pattern on the exposure glass.
4. Stack 250 sheets or more of the standard paper on the ACC test pattern.
5. Scan the ACC pattern.
6. Remove the stack of the standard paper and the ACC test pattern from the
exposure glass.
7. Put Color Chart C-4 on the exposure glass.
8. Activate the full color, text/photo mode.
9. Copy Color Chart C-4.
10. Check whether any of the coloured patches in column 2 (in the gradation
pattern area right below the caption COLOR CHART C-4) are printed. Also,
check that yellow patch 10 does not contain any other colours.
11. If any of the patches in column 2 is printed, or if yellow patch 10 contains other
colours, adjust the white level ( White Level Adjustment). If not, adjustment is
not required.
White Level Adjustment

1. Perform as instructed in White Level Check.
2. Activate the SP mode.
3. Select SP5-990-002 and print out the SP mode data list.
4. Select SP4-902-002 (G_DATA1) and read the value.
5. Compare the value with the values in table 1 (when Hammermill Copy Plus is
used) or 2 (when Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color is used).
6. Increase or decrease the values in SP4-885-1, 886-1, and 887-1 if necessary.
7. Check the white level as instructed in White Level Check.
NOTE: The machine may have some other trouble when this adjustment causes
abnormal outputs or when this adjustment is not effective.
B156/B220
3-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 1: Hammermill Copy Plus, 20 lbs. (North America)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
247
:
:
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
SP4-885-001
(Reference
Adjustment: R)
+17
+15
+14
+13
+12
+10
+9
+8
SP4-886-001
(Reference
Adjustment: G)
+13
+12
+11
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
SP4-887-001
(Reference
Adjustment: B)
+17
+16
+15
+13
+12
+11
+9
+8
No adjustment is
required.
-8
-10
-11
-13
-14
-15
-17
-18
-20
-21
-23
-24
-26
-28
-29
-31
-32
-34
-35
-37
-39
-40
-6
-7
-8
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-8
-10
-11
-13
-14
-16
-17
-19
-20
-22
-23
-25
-27
-28
-30
-31
-33
-35
-36
-38
-40
-41
Decrease the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Necessary
adjustment
Increase the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 255, add 17 to the value in SP4-885001, 13 to the value in SP4-886-001, and 17 to the value in SP4-887001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 247, do not change any values in
SP4-885-001, SP4-886-001, and SP4-887-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 236, subtract 8 from the value in
SP4-885-001, 6 from the value in SP4-886-001, and 8 from the value
in SP4-887-001.
SM
3-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
SP4-902-2
(G_DATA1)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 2: Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe)

SP4-902-2
(G_DATA1)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
247
246
245
244
243
242
:
:
232
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
SP4-885-001
(Reference
Adjustment: R)
+23
+22
+21
+20
+19
+17
+16
+15
+13
+12
+11
+10
+8
SP4-886-001
(Reference
Adjustment: G)
+18
+17
+16
+15
+14
+13
+12
+11
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
SP4-887-001
(Reference
Adjustment: B)
+23
+21
+20
+19
+18
+17
+15
+14
+13
+12
+11
+9
+8
No adjustment is
required.
-9
-10
-12
-13
-15
-16
-18
-19
-21
-22
-24
-25
-27
-29
-30
-32
-34
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-16
-17
-18
-19
-20
-22
-23
-24
-25
-8
-10
-11
-13
-14
-16
-17
-19
-20
-22
-23
-25
-26
-28
-30
-31
-33
Decrease the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Remarks
Increase the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 255, add 23 to the value in SP4-885001, 18 to the value in SP4-886-001, and 23 to the value in SP4-887001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 242, do not change any values in
SP4-885-001, SP4-886-001, and SP4-887-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 231, subtract 9 from the value in
SP4-885-001, 7 from the value in SP4-886-001, and 8 from the value
in SP4-887-001.
B156/B220
3-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Press , press , and then press 5 times to open the SelfDiagnostics menu.
B156R298.WMF
B156R299.WMF
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press ).

3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
SM
3-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH
3.16 CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH

3.16.1 BREAKER
CAUTION
Before you test the breaker, always make sure that the main power switch
is off. Do not try to test the breaker switch with the copier power turned on.
1. Make sure that the main power is

turned off.
[A]
2. Make sure that the power cord of the

copier is connected to the power source.
3. Check if the mark on the breaker
switch [A] is shown. If is shown, the
breaker switch is turned on.
4. Push the test button [B] of the breaker.
This turns off the breaker switch (it goes
from the right to the center position).
[B]
IMPORTANT
If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:
Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the
power supply.
Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center
position, replace the breaker switch.
5. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and the mark on the switch is
shown.
6. Turn the breaker switch to the left position first. Then turn it to the On position
(right position).
B156/B220
3-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
Definition
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation
panel. The machine is disabled. The user
cannot reset the SC.
SCs to disable only the features that use the

defective item. Although these SCs are not
shown to the user under normal conditions,
they are displayed on the operation panel only
when the defective feature is selected.
SCs that are not shown on the operation
panel. They are internally logged.
The SC is displayed on the operation panel.
Turning the operation switch or main power
switch off then on resets the SC. The SC is
redisplayed if it occurs after the main power
switch is turned on again.
Reset Procedure
Turn the main power switch off
then on before entering SP mode.
Reset the SC (push "EXECUTE"
with SP5-810), then turn the main
switch off then on again.
and on.
Logging only
and on.
NOTE: 1) All SCs are logged.

2) When an electrical circuit board has a problem, check the connections
before replacing the PCBs.
3) When a motor has a problem, check the mechanical load before
replacing the motor or sensor.
When a Level D SC code occurs
A screen opens on the operation panel to tell the user that 1) an error occurred, 2)
the job that the machine does at that time will be erased, and 3) the machine will
reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The user can: 1) stop until the machine reboots automatically after a short time, or
2) touch Reset on the screen to reset the machine immediately, and go back to
the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch Reset, the next message tells the user that 1) the
machine reset automatically and 2) the previous job was lost and must be done
again. After the user reads the message, the user touches Confirm on the screen.
The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the
user turns the machine off and on.
If the operator touches Reset to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
If the Remote Service System is used, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center
SM
4-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Level
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
4.1.2 SC TABLE
No.
Definition
101
D
120
121
142
144
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
Exposure lamp error

The standard white level is not
properly detected when scanning the
shading plate. (The shading data
peak does not reach the specified
threshold.)
Scanner home position error 1

The scanner home position sensor
does not detect the "off" condition
during scanning.
does not detect the "off" condition
during initialization.
Scanner home position error 2

does not detect the "on" condition
during initialization.
when starting to scan.
when the scanner returns.
White level detection error

The white level cannot be adjusted
within the target during auto gain
control.
SBU communication error

The operation software version for the
SBU does not match the installed
SBU.
Exposure lamp defective

Lamp stabilizer defective
Exposure lamp connector defective
Standard white plate dirty
Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty
SBU defective
Scanner I/O board or SBU defective

Scanner motor defective
Harness between scanner I/O board
and scanner motor disconnected
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
Scanner I/O board or SBU defective

Scanner motor defective
Harness between scanner I/O board
and scanner motor disconnected
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
Dirty exposure glass or optics section

SBU board defective
BICU board defective
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
Update the BICU software.

Replace the SBU.
4-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
195
199
201
220
221
230
231
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
IPU error
The self-diagnostic error for the IPU
occurs immediately after the main
power is turned on.
Serial number mismatch

Serial number stored in the memory
is not correct.
NOTE: Check the serial number with
SP5-811-002.
If the stored serial number is
incorrect, contact your product
specialist for details of how to solve
the problem.
PSU fan error
The PSU fan low signal is detected
for 2 seconds when the PSU fan
controller sends the high signal to the
PSU fan.
Polygon motor error
The polygon motor starts operating
or changes its speed. The lock
signal is not detected within 5
seconds.
The polygon motor stops operating.
The lock signal is still detected
for 3 seconds.
The polygon motor is operating.
The lock signal remains undetected
for 0.5 seconds.
IPU board defective

BICU board defective (defective
connection between ASICs)
NVRAM defective
BICU replaced without original NVRAM
PSU fan defective

Disconnected or damaged harness
Defective polygon motor

Defective harness
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
161
D
1st beam synchronization error

A polygon motor lock is detected; the
LD door is closed; and the LD
remains on. The LD error (1st
beam synchronization error)
continues for 0.5 seconds.
Disconnected synchronization detector

board
Defective LD unit
Defective BICU
2nd beam synchronization error

A polygon motor lock is detected; the
LD door is closed; and the LD
remains on. The LD error (2nd
beam synchronization error)
continues for 0.5 seconds.
Disconnected synchronization detector

board
Defective LD unit
Defective BICU
FGATE on error
A transfer belt mark is detected.
No FGATE on signal is detected
within 1 second.
Defective BICU
FGATE off error

An FGATE assert signal is detected.
The FGATE negate signal is not
detected within 30 seconds.
Defective BICU
4-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
241
D
280
282
300
302
305
350
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
LD error
An LD error continues for 0.5
seconds. (After an LD error is
detected, an LD error release is
written to the GAVD chip during
monitoring.)
Image transfer belt mark detection error
An imaging process starts. No
belt mark for the first color is
A color imaging process starts.
A belt mark other than the one for
the first color is not detected within
8 seconds after a former belt mark
has been detected.
GAVD communication error
Data is transferred. The status
register in the BICU does not get to
the ready condition within 10
milliseconds.
Charge corona unit electrical leak
The supply to the charge corona unit
is continuously output, and the unit is
operating at the minimum PWM duty
value. 1 Volt (or more) returns for
300 milliseconds.
Charge grid electrical leak
The returning voltage N from the OPC
unit is detected for 60 ms.
N 1/2 output value
Charge corona unit cleaner error

Cleaning starts. The lock signal
is not detected within 30 seconds.
Cleaning starts. The cleaner
starts to turn. The lock signal is
The lock signal is detected while
the unit is moving away from the
home position. The next lock
signal is detected within 6 seconds
after the unit has turned toward the
home position.
Development short circuit error
A development process starts. The
returning voltage stays at 1V or less
within 0.48 seconds.
Defective LD unit
Defective BICU
Poor electrical connection between
sensor and BICU
Defective BICU
Short circuit in the charge corona unit

Defective high voltage supply board
Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
Defective PCU installation (OPC belt)

Short circuit in the charge grid
supply board)
Defective PCU installation (OPC belt)

Defective cleaner
Incorrect charge corona unit installation
Toner fallen into the cleaner drive
mechanism
Short circuit in the development unit

supply board)
4-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
353
401
Symptom
Possible Cause
Development motor 1 error

Development motor 1 changes its
speed from half to normal.
1) Motor 1 does not detect a 0.3second lock signal within 0.9
seconds.
2) Motor 1 does not detect the
lock signal for 0.3 seconds
after it detected a 0.3-second
lock signal before.
The development motor starts
3) Motor 1 does not detect a 1second lock signal within 3
seconds.
after it detected a 1-second
lock signal before.
Development motor 2 error
Development motor 2 changes its
speed from half to normal.
3) Motor 2 does not detect a 0.3second lock signal within 0.9
seconds.
after it detected a 0.3-second
lock signal before.
The development motor starts
5) Motor 2 does not detect a 1second lock signal within 3
seconds.
after it detected a 1-second
lock signal before.
1st transfer (image transfer) circuit open
The returning voltage N from the
image transfer unit is detected for 60
ms.
N 1/2 output value
Defective development motor (Y & M)

Too much load on the development unit
(Y & M)
Defective harness connection
Defective development motor (K & C)

Too much load on the development unit
(K & C)
Defective harness connection
Open circuit in the image transfer belt

supply board)
410
2nd transfer (paper transfer) electric leakage (+)

Short circuit in the paper transfer unit
Paper transfer starts. The positive
(+) output is at the minimum PWM
duty value. The returning voltage
does not reach 4.29 V or less for 60
supply board)
milliseconds.
411
2nd transfer (paper transfer) electric leakage ()

Paper transfer starts. The negative Short circuit in the paper transfer unit
() output is at the minimum PWM
duty value. The returning voltage
stays at 4.75 V or more for 60
supply board)
milliseconds.
SM
4-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
352
D
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
412
D
420
421
430
440
460
461
480
Symptom
Possible Cause
2nd transfer (paper transfer) disconnection (+)

Right cover not closed
paper transfer unit is detected for 180 Defective transfer roller contact
ms.
mechanism
N 1/2 output value
supply board)
Discharge error (fusing bias)
Fusing bias short circuit
fusing unit is detected for 60 ms.
Scratched fusing belt
N 1/2 output value
supply board)
Discharge plate error

discharge unit is detected for 60 ms.
N 1/2 output value
D
B156/B220
Transfer belt cleaning error

discharge unit is detected for 480 ms.
N 1/2 output value
Main motor error

The main motor starts. The lock
signal does not continue for 0.1
second within 1 second.
The main motor starts. The lock
signal is detected and operation
proceeds normally. The lock
signal is not detected for 0.1
second.
The main motor changes its speed.
The lock signal does not
continue for 0.1 second within 1
second.
Temperature sensor error
The output is 4.5 V (or higher) or 0.3
V (or lower) for 12 seconds.
Humidity sensor error
The output is 4.5 V (or higher) or 0.3
V (or lower) for 12 seconds.
ID sensor error
The ID sensor is being calibrated
(process control, step 1) While the
LED is off, the output voltage is 0.5 V
or lower.
Short circuit in the discharge plate

supply board)
Short circuit in the transfer belt cleaning
unit
supply board)
Defective main motor
Too much load of the main motor drive
Defective temp./ humidity sensor

Defective circuit
Defective connector
Defective temp./ humidity sensor
Defective circuit
Defective connector
Defective ID sensor
Defective circuit
Defective connector
4-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
503
504
515
520
521
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Transfer belt mark detection error

The main motor is operating or
changes its speed. The lock
signal is detected. The belt mark
sensor signal is not detected for 0.2
second in normal speed mode or
0.4 second in half speed mode.
3rd tray error
The tray lift motor turns on. The
top of the paper stack is not
detected for 18 seconds.
The tray is set. The top of the
paper stack is detected. The
bottom plate is lowered. The
stack detection is not cleared within
7 seconds. These steps are
repeated 4 times.
4th tray error
The tray lift motor turns on. The
top of the paper stack is not
The tray is set. The top of the
paper stack is detected. The
bottom plate is lowered. The
stack detection is not cleared within
7 seconds. These steps are
repeated 4 times.
Duplex unit communication error
A connection error occurs.
The signal is sent from the copier to
the duplex unit every 3 seconds
while paper is not transported by
the unit. However, the duplex unit
does not respond within 5 seconds.
Fusing unit motor
The motor starts or changes speed.
continue for 1 second within a 3second interval.
The motor starts. The lock signal
is detected and operation proceeds
normally. The lock signal is
interrupted for 1 second.
Paper feed motor error
The motor starts or changes speed.
continue for 1 second within a 3second interval.
The motor starts. The lock signal
is detected and operation proceeds
normally. The lock signal is
interrupted for 1 second.
Defective main motor

Image transfer belt out of position
Belt mark blurred or absent
Defective paper height sensor

Defective tray lift motor
Defective paper height sensor

Defective tray lift motor
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
481
D
Defective duplex unit board

Defective BICU
Defective IOB
Defective connection (Main unit Duplex unit)
Defective fusing unit motor
Defective paper feed motor
4-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
530
D
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
551
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
Fusing fan motor error
The main power is turned on.

The fusing fan lock signal is

The fusing fan is activated. The
fusing fan lock signal is not
Thermistor disconnection (heating roller)
The fusing unit starts warm up to the
print ready temperature. The
temperature does not reach 0C for
10 seconds.
Fusing warm-up timeout (heating roller)
The main switch is turned on or a
cover is closed. The heating roller

does not reach the warm-up
temperature within 4 seconds.

Overheat error (heating roller)
The heating roller thermistor detects
220C for 5 seconds.
Overheat error (heating roller)

230 C.
Defective fusing fan

Disconnected or broken harness of the
fusing fan
Defective thermistor
Thermistor loose connection
Defective connector
Defective lamp (loose connection,
thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
Incorrect detection (loose thermistor
connection, fusing - drawer loose
connection)
Short circuit
Defective BICU board
Defective PSU
Short circuit
Defective PSU
Full power error (heating roller)
Fusing unit warm-up is complete.
The heating roller stops turning.

The heating roller lamp keeps
outputting the maximum power for 12
seconds.
Unstable temperature (heating roller)
unstable temperature increases or
decreases within 60 seconds.

Zero cross error
The main power is turned on and the
machine checks how many zero

cross signals are generated during
500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross signal
generated is more than 66 or less
than 45 and when this condition is
detected 10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
Thermistor disconnection (pressure roller)
The pressure roller thermistor detects
7C or lower for 80 seconds.

Fusing - drawer loose connection

Replace the PSU.
FU12 is open.

Defective harness
Defective connector
4-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
553
554
555
556
557
570
571
572
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Warm-up time over (pressure roller)

The main switch is turned on or a
cover is closed. The fusing
pressure roller does not reach the
ready temperature within 200
seconds.
Overheat error (pressure roller)
The pressure roller thermistor detects
165C for 5 seconds.

Incorrect detection (thermistor loose
connection)
Loose connection
Defective PSU
Low temperature error (pressure roller)

During standby or operation, the
pressure roller thermistor detects
60C or less for 5 seconds.
Incorrect detection (thermistor loose
connection)
Full power error (pressure roller)
Fusing unit warm-up is complete.
The fusing pressure roller stops
turning. The pressure roller lamp
keeps outputting the maximum power
for 150 seconds.
Unstable temperature (pressure roller)
The pressure roller thermistor detects Thermistor loose connection
unstable temperature increases or
decreases within 60 seconds.
Zero cross over error
The main switch is turned on; the
Noise from a power supply line
fusing relay turns on. The detected
zero cross is out of the target range
(less than 45 or more than 65).
The zero cross is detected more than
65 in ten cases out of eleven zero
cross detections.
Fusing oil end
500 sheets of paper have been output
since oil end was detected.
Fusing oil overflow

The oil overflow sensor detects oil.
When the machine covers are
closed, the oil supply unit is not
detected.
When the machine covers are
closed, the fusing unit is not
detected.
Oil overflow sensor error
The oil overflow sensor power is
turned off. The oil overflow sensor
does not detect the oil overflow
condition.
Insufficient oil (the oil tank in the rear of

the machine)
Defective oil pipe
Defective oil pump
Defective oil end sensor
Defective oil end sensor

Defective oil overflow sensor
Defective sensor cable
Oil supply unit not installed
Defective oil overflow sensor

Defective harness
Defective BICU
4-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
552
A
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
620
D
630
632
633
634
635
Symptom
Possible Cause
ADF communication error

The ADF has been detected. A
communication error has occurred.
CSS communication error

The machine tries to communicate
with one of the terminals of a relevant
service center. An error signal
returns.
Loose connection
Defective ADF
Defective scanner I/O board
External noise
Communication error on the public

telephone network (logged only; the
machine can still operate)
MF accounting device error 1

The machine sends a data frame.
No normal end signal returns. This
symptom happens three times.
Defective or broken line between

machine and device

The machine is communicating with
the accounting device. The break
signal returns.
Defective or broken line between

machine and device

A backup RAM error is reported from
the accounting device.

A battery voltage error is reported
from the accounting device.
Defective accounting device controller

Defective battery in the accounting
device
Defective accounting device controller
Defective battery in the accounting
device
640
Engine-to-controller communication checksum error

While the BICU and controller are
Logged only; the machine can still
communicating, a checksum error
operate
has occurred.
641
Engine-to-controller response error

The controller has sent a frame with
the RAPI protocol, but the engine
does not respond.
670
B156/B220
Engine startup error

Just after the main power is turned on
or the machine is recovering from
auto off mode, the engine ready
signal assertion fails.
Just after the main power is turned
on, the engine does not respond.
Defective controller board

External noise
Defective BICU
4-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
685
687
720
722
724
725
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup

After powering on the machine,
Controller stalled
communication between the controller Controller board installed incorrectly
and operation panel does not begin,
or the communication is interrupted
Operation panel connector loose or
after a normal startup.
defective
Poor connection of DIMM and optional
boards on the controller board
SBU/IPU communication error
While data is sent between the
Defective scanner unit cable
scanner and BICU board, a
Defective SBU board
communication error has occurred.
PER command error
Poor connection between BICU and
Some image data is transferred.
controller
The controller does not report the
necessary memory address.
Defective BICU
Defective controller
Finisher jogger motor error (500-sheet finisher)
The finisher jogger H.P sensor
Jogger HP sensor defective
remains de-activated for a certain
Jogger motor defective
time when returning to home
Defective finisher control board
position.
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
remains activated for a certain time Incorrect installation
when moving away from home
position.
Finisher jogger motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
Jogger HP sensor defective
remains de-activated for a certain
Jogger motor defective
time when returning to home position. Defective finisher control board
Defective BICU
remains activated for a certain time
Defective IOB
when moving away from home
Incorrect installation
position.
Finisher staple hammer motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
Stapling hammer motor jam is
Staple jam
detected consecutively twice after the Stapler overload caused by trying to
staple hammer motor turned on.
staple too many sheets
Staple hammer motor defective
Stapler home position sensor defective
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
Finisher stack feed-out motor error (1000-sheet finisher)

The stack feed-out motor jam is
Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
detected consecutively twice after the Stack feed-out motor defective
stack feed-out motor turned on.
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
4-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
672
D
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
726
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
Finisher tray lift motor error (1000-sheet finisher)/

Finisher output tray motor error (500-sheet finisher)
The tray lift motor jam is detected
Tray lift motor or output tray motor
consecutively twice after the tray lift
defective
motor turned on (1000-sheet
Stack height sensor defective
finisher).
The output tray motor lock signal is Defective BICU
detected for 10 seconds after the
Defective IOB
output tray motor turned on (500 Incorrect installation
sheet finisher).
Finisher stapler motor error (500-sheet finisher)
Stapling does not finish within a
Staple jam
certain time after the stapler motor
Stapler overload caused by trying to
turned on.
staple too many sheets
Stapler motor defective
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
Finisher paper stack height error (500-sheet finisher)
The stack height detection lever does Stack height lever solenoid defective
not return to its home position before
Stack height sensor defective
going to detect the stack height.
Lever sensor defective
Main control board defective
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
727
728
730
Finisher stapler motor error (1000-sheet finisher)

The stapler motor jam is detected
Stapler motor defective
consecutively twice after the staple
Stapler HP sensor defective
motor turned on.
Poor stapler motor connection
Defective board
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
731
Output tray motor error (500-sheet finisher)

Exit guide plate motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
The tray upper limit sensor does
not activate within a certain time
Defective BICU
after the tray motor turned on (500- Defective IOB
sheet finisher).
The exit guide plate motor jam is
500-sheet finisher
detected consecutively twice after
the exit guide plate motor turned on Output tray motor defective
Tray upper limit sensor defective
(1000-sheet finisher).
1000-sheet finisher
Exit guide plate motor defective
Exit guide plate HP sensor defective
B156/B220
4-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
740
750
770
791
792
793
800
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Finisher shift motor error (1000-sheet finisher)

The shift motor jam is detected
Shift motor defective
consecutively twice after the shift
Shift HP sensor defective
motor turned on.
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
Finisher communication error
The UART reports a
Defective BICU
communication error.
Defective IOB
In cases other than paper transport, Incorrect installation
after an every-3-second command
is sent, the finisher does not
respond within 5 seconds.
1st paper tray unit communication error
The UART reports a
communication error.
In cases other than paper transport,
after an every-3-second command
is sent, the paper tray unit does not
respond within 5 seconds.
Shift tray unit motor error
The machine starts. The tray
motor operates for 2.2 seconds.
The sensor does not detect the
operation.
The machine is printing. The tray
motor operates for 2.2 seconds.
The sensor does not detect the
operation.
Bridge unit error
The machine recognizes the finisher,
but does not recognize the bridge
unit.
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the
finisher, but recognizes the relay unit.
Interchange unit error

The machine recognizes the duplex
unit/1-bin tray unit, but does not
recognize the interchange unit.
Defective paper tray unit control board

Defective BICU
Defective IOB
Defective connection (Paper tray - main
unit)
Defective tray motor

Defective sensor
Defective shift tray connector
Defective connector
Defective cable
Defective connector
Defective cable
Defective connector
Defective cable
Startup without video output end error (K)

Video transfer to the engine is
started, but a video transmission end
command is not issued by the engine
within the specified time.
4-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
732
D
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
801
B
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
818
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
Startup without video output end error (Y)


Startup without video output end error (M)

Startup without video output end error (C)

Startup without video input end error (K)

command is not issued by the
scanner within the specified time.
Startup without video input end error (Y)

Startup without video input end error (M)

Startup without video input end error (C)

Startup without video input end error (R)

Startup without video input end error (G)

Startup without video input end error (B)

Watchdog error
While the system program is running, Defective controller board
no other programs can run (due to a
bus hold or endless loop).
4-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
820
821
822
823
824
826
827
828
829
835
836
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Kernel abnormal end error

A HDD error or a software error has
occurred, terminating the SCS
process, gwinit process, and finally
the kernel program.
A system process has exhausted the
RAM.
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU
An unexpected exception or
interruption has occurred.
Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC
The ASIC returned an error during the
self-diagnostic test, because the
ASIC and CPU timer interrupts are
compared and determined to be out
of range.
Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD
The hard disk drive returned an error
during the self-diagnostic test.
Self-diagnostic Error: NIB
The network interface board returned
an error during the self-diagnostic
test.
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM
The resident non-volatile RAM
returned an error during the selfdiagnostic test.
HDD error
Software application error
RAM shortage

Software defective
HDD defective
HDD connector defective
Network interface board defective
NVRAM damaged or abnormal
Backup battery has discharged
NVRAM socket damaged
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM

The RTC (real time clock) or optional
RTC defective
NVRAM returned an error during the
NVRAM defective
self-diagnostic test.
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM
The resident RAM returned a verify
Memory malfunction
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Self-diagnostic Error: ROM
The resident read-only memory
returned an error during the selfdiagnostic test.
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM
The optional RAM returned an error
during the self-diagnostic test.

Firmware defective
RAM DIMM defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: Parallel Interface

A loopback test error occurred.
Self-diagnostic Error: Resident Font ROM

The resident font ROM returned an
Loopback connector not detected

IEEE1284 connector defective
Font ROM defective
4-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
819
B
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
837
B
838
850
851
853
854
855
856
860
861
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional Font ROM

The optional font ROM returned an
Font ROM defective
Verification error
The verification data of the clock
generator is read via the
communication bus. The data
contradicts the normal value.
Network I/F abnormal

The IP address is incorrect, or the
controller cannot accesses the
network due to a driver error.
IEEE1394 I/F abnormal
The IEEE1394 interface cannot be
used, due to a driver error.
Wireless card startup error
The machine starts up. The
IEEE802 11b card connection board
is recognized. The wireless LAN
card or bluetooth card is not
recognized.
Wireless card access error
The machine has been reading the
data from the card. The machine
loses access to the card; the wireless
LAN card or bluetooth card
connection board is still recognized.
Wireless card error
Some illegal data is found in the card.
Incorrect network setting

IEEE1394 interface board defective

Loose connection between the card and
the connection board
Loose connection between the card and

the connection board
Defective card
Wireless card connection board error

An error is detected in the wireless
Defective card connection board
LAN card or bluetooth card
connection board.
Startup without HD connection at main power on
The hard disk is not detected. (The
Cable between controller and HD loose
hard disk is not formatted.)
or defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
Controller defective
Startup without HD detection when the power key was pressed
The hard disk is not detected.
Cable between controller and HD loose
or defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
4-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
Rev. 04/2006
863
864
865
870
872
B
B
B
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
Bad sector count at the maximum

The hard disk has 100 bad sectors in
the image storage area. More data
is read from the hard disk. SC863
occurs. The number of bad sectors
exceeds the maximum value.
NOTE: To format the hard disk, use
SP5-832-1. Bad sectors may
affect quality or reduce
productivity. The hard disk
should be replaced when it
contains bad sectors.
Startup without HD data lead
Data stored on the hard disk is not
read correctly.
HD data CRC error
During operation of the HD, the HD
responded with a CRC error.
HD access error
The hard disk returned an error.
Address book data error
The address book in the hard disk is
accessed. An error is detected in
the address book data; address book
data is not read; or data is not written
into the address book.
NOTE: To recover from the error, do
any of the following
countermeasures:
Format the address book by using
SP5-846-050 (all data in the
address bookincluding the user
codes and countersis initialized).
Initialize the user data by using
SP5-832-006 (the user codes and
counters are recovered when the
main switch is turned on if those
data are stored in Smart Device
Monitor for Admin).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes
and counters are recovered when the
main switch is turned on if those data
are stored in Smart Device Monitor
for Admin).
Email Receiving Data Error
Machine detects an HDD error during
warm-up.
See NOTE 1:
SM
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Bad sector detected during operation of

the HD
Data transfer from the HD was
abnormal.
Error detected other than a bad sector
error (SC863) or a CRC error (SC864)
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
862
D
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Defective controller software
Email(s) previously received by the

machine and stored in the hard drive
may contain damaged data. This can
be deleted by executing SP5832-007,
however note that doing so will also
delete all other received emails.
Defective HDD
4-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
873
B
Rev. 05/2006
Symptom
Possible Cause
Email Sending Data Error

Machine detects an HDD error during
warm-up.
See NOTE 1:
874
875
880
900
901
902
B
B
B156/B220
Delete All Error 1: HDD

An HDD/NVRAM data error is
detected after the Delete All
Memory feature of the Data
Overwrite Security Unit is executed.
NOTE: The source of the error is a
Data Overwrite Security Unit that is
run from an SD card.
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurs while the Data
Overwrite Security Unit is deleting
data from the hard drive.
NOTE: The source of the error is a
Data Overwrite Security Unit that is
run from an SD card.
File Format Converter (MLB) error
A request to get access to the MLB
was not answered within the specified
time.
Electronic total counter error
The value of the total counter is out of
the normal range.
Mechanical total counter error 1
Mechanical counter 1 is not initialized,
or not detected.
Mechanical total counter error 2
Mechanical counter 2 is not initialized,
or not detected.
Email(s) previously sent by the

machine and stored in the hard drive
may contain damaged data. This can
be deleted by executing SP5832-008,
however note that doing so will also
delete all other sent emails and
initialize the senders user
name/password and administrator mail
address.
Defective HDD
Turn the main switch OFF/ON and try
the operation again.
Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
again.
Replace the HDD.
Turn the main switch OFF/ON and try

the operation again.
MLB defective
Defective NVRAM
Defective connection
Defective counter
Defective connection
Defective counter
4-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
Rev. 05/2006
No.
Definition
925
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
Net file error

The management file for net files is
corrupted; net files are not normally
read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Defective hard disk

Data corruption
Defective software
1. When SC860 to 865 occurs with this
SC at the same time:
The main cause is in SC860 to
865. Refer to those possible
causes.
2. When only SC925 occurs:
Turn the main power off and on.
Initialize the net file partition of the
HDD (with SP5-832-11) after you
ask the customer for permission.
This also erases the transmitted
and received fax documents.
If the above actions do not solve
the problem, try to initialize all
partitions of the HDD with SP5832-1 after you ask the customer
for permission.
Replace the HDD.
NOTE 1: The HDD can be damaged easily if the main switch is turned OFF during data
processing. Do not turn OFF the main power switch immediately after turning it ON.
Doing so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to malfunction.
Do not turn OFF the main power switch when the ON indicator is lit or blinking. Doing
so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
No.
Definition
990
B
991
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Software performance error

The software attempted to perform an
unexpected operation.
NOTE: When this error occurs, the
file name, address, and data
will be stored in NVRAM. This
information can be checked
by using SP7-403. See the
data and the situation in
which this SC occurs. Then
report the data and conditions
to your technical control
center.
Software continuity error
The software attempted to perform an
unexpected operation. However,
unlike SC990, the process can keep
on running.
Software defective
Internal parameter incorrect
Insufficient working memory
Turn the main power off and on.
Logged only; the machine can continue

to operate
4-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
995
D
997
998
999
B156/B220
Rev. 05/2006
Symptom
Possible Cause
Model matching error

The CPM registered in the controller
does not match the DIP switch
settings on the engine board.
Application function selection error
The application selected by a key
press on the operation panel does not
start or ends abnormally.
Application start error
After switching the machine on, the
application does not start within 60
s. (No applications start or end
normally.)
Program download error
The download (program, print data,
language data) from the SD card
does not execute normally.
Important Notes About SC999
This SC is not logged, because it
operates primarily in the download
mode.
If the machine loses power while
downloading, or if for some other
reason the download does not end
normally, this could damage the
controller board or the PCB
targeted for the download and
prevent subsequent downloading. If
this problem occurs, the damaged
PCB must be replaced.
The controller and the engine board are

not for the same model
Software for that application is defective
An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed.
Software for that application is defective
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed.
Software defective
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
Board installed incorrectly
BICU defective
SD card defective
NVRAM defective
Loss of power during downloading
4-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Rev. 05/2006
4.2
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4.2.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON
NG
Not initialized
CPU Check
NG
SC820
ASIC Check
NG
SC821
Standard RAM
Conection Check
NG
SC827
Optional RAM
Connection Check
NG
SC829
Clock Generator Check
Standard NVRAM
Check
SC838
NG
SC824
NG
Power-on or
Detailed
Detailed
ROM Sum Check
NG
SC828
Standard RAM Detailed

Check
NG
SC829
Optional RAM Detailed

Check
NG
Not use optional RAM
Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Power-on
Optional NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Optinoal HDD Check

Optional NVRAM Check
NG
Error Logged
NG
SC826
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Real Time Clock Check
NG
IEEE1284 Loop-back
Check
Error Logged
Font Header Check
Real Time Clock

Detailed Check
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Engine I/F Check
SC826
NG
Font ROM Sum Check

Network Check
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic RAM Check
END
NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check
NG
Error Logged
Memory Chip Check
NG
Error Logged
A
B156T501.WMF
SM
4-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE TEST MODE
4.2.2
Rev. 05/2006
DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).

1. Turn off the machine and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel
interface.
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine. You will see Now Loading on the
touch-panel, and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test.
Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
Refer to section 4.1 for details about the error codes.
4.3 IMAGE TEST MODE

4.3.1 OVERVIEW
The SBU, BICU, and LD board have the function that prints out their test pattern. It
is useful to find the defective board when the image data problem is occurred.
4.3.2 VPU TEST

The SBU has the VPU test pattern. To make sure the scanner VPU control is
functioning, output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907.
SP4-907-1: VPU Test Pattern: R

SP4-907-2: VPU Test Pattern: G
SP4-907-3: VPU Test Pattern: B
4.3.3 IPU TEST

The BICU board has the IPU test pattern. To make sure the image processing is
functioning, output the IPU test pattern with SP4-417.
4.3.4 GAVD TEST

The LD board has the GAVD test pattern. To make sure the printing control is
functioning, output any test pattern with SP5-955.
This test pattern includes the pattern for image adjustment such as registration,
blank margin, laser beam pitch, etc.
B156/B220
4-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.4.1 SENSORS
ID sensor
Image transfer
belt mark
sensor
O/B waste
toner bottle full
sensor
Oil end sensor
Oil overflow
sensor
Original length
sensor 1
Original length
sensor 2
Original width
sensor
Paper end
sensor 1
Paper end
sensor 2
Paper exit
sensor
Paper feed
sensor 1
CN
Condition
324
(I/O board)
Open
Shorted
Open
260
(BICU)
Shorted
Open
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
261
(BICU)
Shorted
261
(BICU)
Open
Shorted
Open
632
(SBU)
Shorted
Open
632
(SBU)
Shorted
Open
632
(SBU)
Shorted
Open
406 (High
voltage
supply)
Shorted
Open
308
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
Shorted
324
(I/O board)
Open
406
(High voltage
supply)
SM
Shorted
Symptom
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is cleared when the paper is
removed
A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
No immediate symptom is seen. ( NOTE)
The machine does not respond.
No immediate symptom is seen. ( NOTE)
SC481 is displayed.
SC481 is displayed.
Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full.
No symptom is seen.
No immediate symptom is seen.
The oil pump turns on to pump oil up when there
is enough oil.
SC571 is displayed.
SC571 is displayed.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
images are blurred.
images are blurred.
images are blurred.
images are blurred.
images are blurred.
Paper end is not detected when the tray is
empty.
Paper end is detected when the tray is not
empty.
Paper end is not detected when the tray is
empty.
empty.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed.
A paper jam is detected when no paper is fed.
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed.
removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before
paper is fed.
4-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Component
(Symbol)
Fusing exit
sensor
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Component
(Symbol)
Paper feed
sensor 2
CN
Condition
Open
340
(I/O board)
Shorted
Paper near-end
406
sensor 1
(High voltage
supply)
Paper near-end
sensor 2
308
(I/O board)
Paper overflow
sensor
Platen cover
sensor
T/B waste toner

bottle full
sensor
Temperature/hu
midity sensor
Fusing
entrance
sensor
Transfer belt
sensor
Open
Shorted
Shorted
219
(Scanner I/O
board)
Open
Shorted
Open
405
(High voltage
supply)
Synchronization
detector
Shorted
Open
324
(I/O board)
Registration
sensor
Scanner HP
sensor
Open
240
(SBU)
503
(LDB)
307
(I/O board)
259
(BICU)
307
(I/O board)
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Symptom
removed.
removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before
paper is fed.
Paper near end is detected when the tray is full.
Paper full is detected when the tray is almost
emptily.
empty.
Paper full is detected when the tray is almost
empty.
Paper near-end is detected when the tray is
full.
Paper overflow is not detected when the paper
exit tray is full.
Paper overflow is detected when the paper exit
tray is not full.
The original size is not correctly detected.
No symptom
removed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed;
and the paper jam is not cleared when the
paper is removed.
A paper jam is detected before paper is fed.
SC120 is displayed.
The scanner motor tries to operate for about 40
seconds before SC122 is displayed.
SC220 is displayed.
The machine does not respond.
SC220 is displayed.
Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full.
Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not full.
SC460 is displayed.
SC460 is displayed.
A paper jam is not detected when paper is fed.
A paper jam is not detected when paper is fed.
NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the
machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be
changed.
B156/B220
4-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.2 SWITCHES
O/B waste
toner bottle
switch
Tray set/paper
size switch (tray
1)
Tray set/paper
size switch (tray
2)
Right cover
switch
T/B waste toner
bottle switch
CN
Condition
324
(I/O board)
324
(I/O board)
312
(I/O board)
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
308
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
308
(I/O board)
324
(I/O board)
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Symptom
The user is prompted to close the exit cover.
No symptom is seen.
The user is prompted to close the front cover.
No symptom is seen.
The user is prompted to close the front cover.
No symptom is seen.
The bottle is not detected when it is installed.
The bottle is detected when it is not installed.
The tray is not detected when it is installed.
The paper tray is detected when it is not
installed.
The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur).
The tray is not detected when it is installed.
The paper tray is detected when it is not
installed.
The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur).
The user is prompted to close the right cover.
No symptom
The bottle is not detected when it is installed.
Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not
installed.
4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating
Symptom when turning on the main switch
115V
220 ~ 240V
Power Supply Board
FU1 (N.A.)
15A/125V
No response
FU2
10A/250V
5A/250V No response
The machine starts initialization (the sound is
FU8
5A/250V
5A/250V heard), but nothing appears on the operation
panel.
The machine starts program loading, and
optional units (PFU, LCT, Interchange, ByFU9
5A/250V
5A/250V
pass, Duplex, bridge, shift tray and key
counter) are disabled.
The machine starts program loading, and
FU12
5A/250V
5A/250V "Functional Problems" appears on the
operation panel with the "SC547".
Fuse
SM
4-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Component
(Symbol)
Exit cover
switch
Front cover
switch
Interlock switch
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS
4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT

REGULAR INTERVALS
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference
of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black
or white dots at regular intervals).
Paper feed
Problems at regular intervals
B156T502.WMF
Colored spots at 54-mm intervals: Development roller

Abnormal image at 68-mm intervals: Transfer roller
Abnormal image at 188-mm intervals: Fusing belt
Abnormal image at 125-mm intervals: Pressure roller in the fusing unit
B156/B220
4-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
4.6 SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM

IMAGES
4.6.1 SKEWED IMAGES
The images leading and trailing edges are parallel to one another.
The images left and right edges are also parallel.
However, all four sides are slanted with respect to the papers edge.
Feed direction
Parallel
Troubleshooting
Parallel
Skewed image may

also appear in the
opposite orientation.
Paper
Image Area
4.6.2 TRAPEZOID IMAGES

Only the images trailing edge is slanted with respect to the paper.
The remaining 3 sides are parallel to the papers edges.
Feed direction
Trapezoid image may

also appear in the
Parallel
Paper
SM
Image Area
4-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.3 PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES

Like skewed images, the leading/trailing edges and left/right edges are parallel to
each other, however here, the leading and trailing edges are both slanted with
respect to the papers edge.
Feed direction
Parallel
Parallel
Parallelogram may
also appear in the
Paper
B156/B220
Image Area
4-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.4 CHECKING THE IMAGE WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN

Print out 5, A3 Trimming Patterns from
SP5-955 (value: 11)
Skewed
See Action 1 (Skewed

Images)
SM
See Action 2
(Parallelogram Image
Adjustment)
4-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Parallelogram
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.5 CORRECTING THE IMAGES

Flow Chart
Please use the following flowchart to correct skewed, parallelogram, and trapezoid
images.
Image is skewed, trapezoid, parallelogram or

combination skewed/trapezoid.
Print out SP5-955-11 trimming pattern
Do the above occur?
No
Print out sample using

exposure glass.
Yes
Action 1
(Skewed)
Yes
Are the lines running along

the main-scan and sub-scan directions
at 90 degrees to one another?
Do the above
still occur?
No
No
OK
Action 2
(Parallelgram)
No
Print out sample

using ADF.
Do the above still

occur?
Yes
Yes
Action 3
(Parallelogram)
Action 4/5
(Original skew)
B156T505.WMF
B156/B220
4-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
Action 1 (skewed image of trimming pattern)
Image skew when feeding from mainframe Trays 1 and 2 because the operator
does not set the side fence flush against the paper stack.
Troubleshooting
1. Advise customers that the side fence should be set flush against the loaded
paper stack, or in cases where the customer gives approval, secure the side
fences in places [A] with two screws. Two screws [B] are located on the tray 1
and 2 as shown below.
[B]
[A]
B156T602.JPG
B156T601.JPG
NOTE: The level of skew will increase twofold if there is a 1mm gap between the
paper and side fence.
2. As a supplement, the level of skew can be further minimized by increasing the
paper buckle in SP1-003. Try adjusting this value several times while checking
the level of skew on the printouts, keeping in mind that a higher value tends to
cause Z-folds and a lower value tends to cause paper jams.
SM
4-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 2 (parallelogram image of trimming pattern)

Adjust the position of the laser unit as described in section 3.4.2 of the Service
Manual.
Adjusting for Image Skew
[A]
1. Positioning pin [A] ( x 1)

2. Loosen (x 4) [B].
3. Adjust the position of the laser optics
housing unit ( Adjustment).
4. Fasten (x 4) [B].
NOTE: After changing the position of
the laser optics housing unit, do
not reinstall the positioning pin.
Keep the pin in a safe place.
B156R221.WMF
[B]
0.6mm
NOTE: When the image skews as shown on the

right, move the unit 0.6 mm in the direction of
the black arrow as shown in the diagram
above and to the right.
Paper feed
(A3 SEF)
B156R239.WMF
B156/B220
4-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 3 (parallelogram image in platen mode)

Parallelogram slants to the right
Parallelogram slants to the left
Raise the left side of the scanner unit.

Lower the left side of the scanner unit.
1. Remove the rear cover, scanner left cover, and upper left cover.
2. Mark the position of the left scanner reinforcement plate by drawing a line
along the lower edge (see photograph below).
3. While holding the scanner unit in place, loosen the 6 screws of the left scanner
reinforcement plate.
Note: The scanner must be held in place, as it will tend to sink due to its own
weight.
4. Raise or lower the scanner with respect to the reference line, then tighten the
screws.
Troubleshooting
Left scanner reinforcement plate
Mark the
line
SM
4-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 4 (original skew)

Perform the following checks:
1. Make sure the ADF side fences are in the proper position for the size of the
original.
2. Check to see if the surfaces of the pick-up roller, separation roller, feed belt,
transport rollers and exit rollers are dirtied, and clean if necessary.
3. Check to see if the skewing still occurs, and if it does, continue onto the next
step.
4. Cut two sheets of paper to a size of A4 x 30mm (297mm x 30mm), then open
the ADF left cover [A] and insert the two sheets into the paper path as shown
(left and right sides).
5. Close the ADF unit (keeping the ADF left cover open).
6. Pull on both strips of paper at the same time (from the left side of the DF) and
check for a difference in resistance.
If there is no difference in resistance between the front and rear, adjust the
ADF skew as shown below in Action 5-1(see ARDF Skew Adjustment in the
Service Manual, 3.12.3).
If the resistance with the rear sheet is larger than the front, adjust the skew as
shown below in Action 5-2.
DF (top)
DF (bottom)
297x30mm
297x30mm
B156/B220
4-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 5-1 Adjusting the original skew with equal front/rear pulling loads
Troubleshooting
B156T011.WMF
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge.
3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment.
4. Adjust the right hinge position to correct the skewed image.
NOTE: Shifting the hinge to the rear will slant the image to the right (and viceversa).
5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image.
6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
SM
4-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 5-2 Adjusting the original skew when the rear pulling load is larger
Raise the left side of the ADF by adding washers as shown below.
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[B, C]
M03070202.WMF
M03070201.WMF
1. Remove the ADF unit from the copier.

2. Remove the shoulder screw [A].
3. Add one or two washers (P/N 07010050Z [B], t=0.7mm) between the hinge
bracket (mainframe) and ADF left hinge [E] to raise the height of the left side of
the ADF.
4. Add the same quantity of the washers [C] to the neighboring screw hole [D] on
the hinge bracket.
5. Reattach the ADF so that the ADF hinge [E] is positioned horizontal on top of
the washers added to the left hinge bracket.
B156/B220
4-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE TABLES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Do not turn off the main power switch while the power LED (
) lights or
flashes. Doing so may severely damage the hard disk or the memory of the
copier. Before turning off the main power switch, press the operation
power switch, and wait for the power LED to go out.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes when:
1) the platen cover or ARDF is open
2) the hard disk or memory is accessed
3) the copier is communicating with another device
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
1. Press the clear modes key.
2. Type 107 at the numeric keypad.
3. Press the clear/stop key and hold it down until the screen
4. Touch Copy Sp on the touch screen.
Copy SP
display changes (for about 3 seconds).
Service
Tables
Starting the SP mode
Quitting the SP mode
SM
1. Touch Exit on the touch screen until the screen

display changes.
Exit
2. Touch Exit on the touch screen until the screen

display changes.
Exit
5-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Touch Screen

For details on the SP modes, see section 5.1.2.
1
10
B156S001.WMF
Expands all SP mode menus.
Quits the SP mode.
Collapses all SP mode menus.

Opens the copy window ( Copy Window for Test Printing).
Enables numeric keypad inputs for specifying a SP mode menu.
(Type a menu number at the numeric keypad, and press the key.)
Expands or collapses the menu list of each group.
Scrolls up or down through the groups.
Scrolls up or down to the previous or next page.
Scrolls up or down to the previous or next line.
Selects the previous or next menu.
B156/B220
5-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Copy Window for Test Printing

1) Touch the Copy Window button ( SP Mode Touch Screen). The copy
window is displayed.
2) Adjust the settings if necessary, and press the (start) key to make the
test print.
3) Touch the SP Mode button (highlighted on the touch screen). The SP
mode screen is displayed.
Working on SP Mode Menus
The SP mode menus are classified in three levels.
1. Find the necessary SP mode menu from the SP Mode Table ( 5.1.2).
2. Select an SP using either of the following two operations:
1) Using the numeric key pad
a) Make sure the SP Direct button is highlighted. (If not, touch the button.)
b) Type the SP mode menu number at the numeric key pad.
3. Type the necessary values at the numeric key pad. The value in the input box
is overwritten.
Input box
B156S002.WMF
NOTE: 1) Initial indicates the default value.

2) To toggle plus/minus, press the (clear/stop) key.
4. Press the key. If an out-of-range value has been input in the box, the value
is ignored.
NOTE: If you are prompted to complete the setting, touch Yes.
5. Quit the SP mode ( Quitting the SP mode).
SM
5-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
2) Using the touch screen

c) Touch the Open All button or the Group # button (where the #
indicates the group number which the necessary menu belongs to).
d) Scroll the menu if necessary ( SP Mode Touch Screen).
e) Touch the necessary menu, or touch the Prev Page or Next Page
button to select the menu.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
NOTE: This function is not used on B051 series machines.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It
is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the
machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169
to 1.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.
B156/B220
5-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE

In the Function/[Setting] column:
The related pop-up screen name and function name (if any) appear in
parenthesis following the function description.
Comments are in italics.
The setting range is enclosed in brackets, with the default setting written in
bold.
An asterisk (*) after the mode number means that this modes value is
stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM reset, all these SP modes will be
returned to their factory settings.
DFU stands for Design/Factory Use only. Values marked DFU should not be
changed.
An SP number set in bold-italic (e.g. x-001-1) denotes a Special Service
Program mode setting.
NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so
that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot
be guaranteed any more.
SP1-XXX: (Feed)
001*
002*
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Lead Edge
1
Tray 1: Plain
2
Tray 1: Thick
3
Tray 1: OHP
4
Tray 2: Plain
5
Tray 2: Thick
6
Tray 2: OHP
7
Tray 3
8
Tray 4
9
By-pass: Plain
10 By-pass: Thick
11 By-pass: OHP
12 Duplex
Side-to-Side
1
By-pass
2
Tray 1
3
Tray 2
4
Tray 3
5
Tray 4
6
Duplex
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the
registration clutch operation timing for each mode.
[9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
The user mode cannot adjust the settings for thick paper
or OHP sheets.
NOTE: When adjusting SP1-001-2 or 3, check SP1-0011 first. SP1-001-2 and 3 adjust the differences
between the leading edge registration positions
for the following paper types:
1: Plain paper and thick paper
2: Plain paper and OHP
In the same manner, when adjusting SP1-001-5
or 6, check SP1-001-4 first; and when adjusting
SP1-001-10 or 11, check SP1-001-9 first.
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the

laser main scan start position for each mode.
[4.0 ~ 4.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
NOTE: When adjusting SP1-002-1, 3, 4, 5, or 6, check
SP1-002-2 first. SP1-002-1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 adjust
the differences in the side-to-side registrations
between each paper tray and tray 1.
5-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
003*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Paper Buckle
1
Tray: Plain
2
3
4
105*
Tray: Thick
Tray: OHP
Tray: Small Size
5
By-pass: Plain
6
By-pass: Thick
7
By-pass: OHP
8
Duplex
Fusing Temperature
1
Heating: Idling
Heating: Ready
Heating: Standby
Heating: Plain/1 Color
Heating: Plain/Full
Color
Heating: Middle
Thick/1 Color
Heating: Middle
Thick/Full Color
Heating: Thick/1 Color
Heating: Thick/Full
Color
10
Heating: OHP/1 Color
B156/B220
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration
roller by changing the paper feed timing.
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Small Size includes LT long edge feed and smaller.
[4 ~ 6 / 3 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Sets the temperature at which the heating roller starts
idling.
[100 ~ 180 / 145 / 1C/step]
Sets the temperature at which the heating roller enters
the print ready condition.
[100 ~ 180 / 155 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the ready
(standby) condition. After the main switch has been
turned on, the machine enters this condition when the
heating roller temperature reaches the temperature
specified in this SP mode. When the machine is
recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the
machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure
roller temperatures reach the specified temperature.
Pressure roller: SP1-105-16
[100 ~ 180 / 160 / 1C/step ]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in fullcolor mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 160 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain
paper in single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain
paper in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in fullcolor mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for OHP sheets in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
5-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
105*
106
109
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
11 Heating: OHP/Full
Color
12
Heating: Duplex/1
Color
13
Heating: Duplex/Full
Color
14
Pressure: Idling
15
Pressure: Ready
16
Pressure: Standby
27
Heating: OFFSET +
28
Pressure: OFFSET +
29
Heating: OFFSET
30
Pressure: OFFSET
Temperature Display
1
Heating Roller
2
Pressure Roller
Fusing Nip
1
Execute Mode
SM
Stop Duration
Sets the heating roller temperature for the OHP sheets
in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 175 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing
(both sides) in single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 150 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing
(both sides) in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1C/step]
Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller starts
idling.
[10 ~ 100 / 10 / 1C/step]
Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller
becomes ready for printing.
[60 ~ 150 / 65 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the ready
(standby) condition. After the main switch has been
turned on, the machine enters this condition when the
pressure roller temperature reaches the temperature
specified in this SP mode. When the machine is
recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the
machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure
roller temperatures reach the specified temperature.
Heating roller: SP1-105-3
[60 ~ 150 / 115 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 15C or lower.
[0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 15C or lower.
[0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 30C or higher.
[0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 30C or higher.
[0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1C/step]
Displays the current temperature of the heating and
pressure rollers.
Checks the fusing nip width using an OHP sheet.
The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for the
specified time ( SP1-109-2).
The nip width should be 9 0.5 mm at front and rear.
If this requirement is not met, change the fusing unit.
Adjusts the stoppage time for the OHP sheet in the
fusing unit ( SP1-109-1).
[0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 s/step]
5-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
905
920
930
940
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Fusing Roller
0: New 1: Old
Exit Full Timer

Exit Full Timer
Fusing Oil Add
Fusing oil add
Selects the pressure roller type.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New pressure roller
1: Old pressure roller
NOTE: If you change this SP, it changes the fusing
temperature values (SP1-105-2 to 13 and
SP1-105-15 to 16)
[10 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 s/step] DFU
Forces the oil pump to supply silicone oil up from the oil
tank to the tank in the oil supply unit. If the oil end
sensor detects oil in the oil supply unit, this SP will not
start the pump.
LEF PriorityBypass
LEF PriorityBypass
B156/B220
Selects the default paper feed direction of the by-pass

tray.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: SEF
1: LEF
The machine detects only the width, but detects the size
based on this information.
If the setting is 0 (SEF): When A4 LEF is placed in the
bypass tray, the machine detects this as A3. A4 SEF will
be detected as A4.
If the setting is 1 (LEF): The machine will detect A4LEF
as A4. However, if A4 SEF is placed in the bypass tray,
it will be detected as A5.
5-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP2-XXX: (Drum)
001*
100*
101*
201*
208
213
306
400*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Charge Bias
1
[M]
2
[C]
3
[Y]
4
[K]
5
No Image Area
6
Charger Current
Magnification Adjustment
1
Main Scan
2
Sub Scan
Trim Adjustment
1
front
2
back
3
lead
4
trail
Develop Bias Adjustment
1
[M]
2
[C]
3
[Y]
4
[K]
Forced Toner
1
[K]
2
[C]
3
[M]
4
[Y]
5
All Color
Toner End Set
Toner End Set
Trans Belt First

1
1 Color
5
6
SM
Adjusts the charge corona unit grid voltage.

[300 ~ 800 / 500 / 1 Volt/step]
Only effective if process control is disabled.
Adjusts the charge corona unit current.

[400 ~ 800 / 500 / 1 A/step]
Adjusts the magnification in each scan direction.
[12.8 ~ 12.7 / 0 / 0.1%/step]
Adjusts the width of the white margin.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the development bias.

[0 ~ 500 / 250 / 1 Volt/step]
Only effective if process control is disabled.
Forcefully supplies toner to the development unit.
Specifies how many sheets can be printed after the

toner near end message.
[0 255 / 50 / 1 /step]
Adds the transfer current to the first page to improve
insufficient transfer of the whole solid image.
[3.0 ~ 14.0 / 9.0 / 1 A /step]
[3.0 ~ 14.0 / 13.0 / 1 A /step]
2
2/3/4 Colors
Cleaning Bias LL1
1
1 Color
2
3
4
Service
Tables
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors
ID pattern
No Image Area
Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute

humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range:
0 < AH 3.5 (this is the LL1 humidity range)
[0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
5-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
400*
401*
Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias LL2
1
1 Color
2
3
4
402*
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Colors
5
ID pattern
6
No Image Area
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias NN1
1
1 Color
2
3
4
403*
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Colors
5
ID pattern
6
No Image Area
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias NN2
1
1 Color
2
3
4
404*
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Colors
5
ID pattern
6
No Image Area
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias HH
1
1 Color
2
3
4
5
B156/B220
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Colors
ID pattern
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
3.5 < AH 8.0 (this is the LL2 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
8.0 < AH 14 (this is the NN1 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
14 < AH 19 (this is the NN2 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
19 < AH (this is the HH humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
5-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2005
404*
501*
502
503
801*
6
7
8
Toner Revital
Fusing Bias Status
Fusing Bias Status
Discharge Bias
1
LL1: 1st
SM
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Displays the status of fusing and discharge pin bias
control (ON or OFF).
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Control OFF
1: Control ON
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage (paper separation

from transfer belt).
[2500 0 / 2000 / 100 Volt/step]
[2500 0 / 2000 / 100 Volt/step]
[2500 0 / 1500 / 100 Volt/step]
2
LL2: 1st
3
NN1: 1st
Fusing Bias SW
Fusing Bias SW
Controls the status of fusing bias control.

[0 ~ 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
If a current leak occurs because of a small hole in the
fusing belt surface, the machine automatically turns this
SP off. After this, the fusing bias is not applied until the
fusing counter is reset and the SP is set back to ON or
the PM counter is reset.
0: OFF fixed
The fusing and discharge pin bias are always off.
1: ON fixed
The fusing and discharge pin bias are always on. It
only turns off when SC 420 occurs.
2: Auto
The fusing and discharge pin bias turns off after 2K
prints.
It also turns off when SC 420 occurs, even if the
number of prints is less than 2K prints.
It turns on after you install a new fusing unit and
reset the PM counter with SP7-804-7.
Charge Cleaning Interval

1
Reference Value
802
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
No Image Area
Jam Recovery
Additional Value
Charger Cleaning
Charger Cleaning
Sets the charge corona unit cleaning interval.

[0 ~ 5000 / 600 / 100 counts/step]
See section 6 for details. SP7-925 displays the number
of counts since the last cleaning.
[100 ~ 5000 / 400 / 100 counts/step]
With this SP, you can adjust the interval for charge
corona cleaning in the middle of a job.
The charge corona cleaning is done after 600
development counts (SP2-801-1), at job end or after
1000 development counts (= the sum of the settings in
SP2-801-1 and -3) in the middle of the job.
Executes a forced charge corona unit cleaning.
Set to 1 to start cleaning.
5-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
803
904
905
912*
920
921
924
925
Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Charger Cleaning Off Time
1
Charger Cleaning Off
Time
1C Bias Adjustment
1
M
2
C
3
Y
4
K
Paper Transfer Roller Type
1
0:D type 1:S type
[10 ~ 200 / 10 / 10 sec /step]
Sets the time for charging the corona wire after charger
cleaning to prevent uneven image density.
Default 50V DFU
Default 0V DFU
Default 0V DFU
Default 0V DFU
Selects the paper transfer roller type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: Drum type
1: Straight type
Temperature Humidity Display

1
Temperature
Displays the temperature measured by the temperature
sensor inside the machine.
[127 ~ 127 / 0 / 1C/step]
2
Humidity 1
Displays the humidity measured by the humidity sensor
inside the machine.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
3
Humidity 2
Displays the absolute humidity calculated from the
temperature/humidity sensor readings.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
4
Environment Level
Displays the current humidity level calculated from the
absolute humidity.
LL1: 0 < AH 3.5
LL2: 3.5 < AH 8.0
NN1: 8.0 < AH 14
* AH = absolute
NN2: 14 < AH 19
humidity
HH: 19 < AH
ITB Cleaning Clutch OFF Time
[500 ~ 500 / 0 / 10 ms/step] DFU
ITB Cleaning Clutch OFF Mode
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New PCU with ITB cleaning blade (do not adjust
SP 2-920)
1: Old PCU without ITB cleaning blade
ITB Cleaning Clutch OFF/ON
1
Time
[100 ~ 500 / 300 / 10 /step]
Toner accumulates on the edge of the ITB cleaning
blade. Turning the ITB clutch OFF/ON forces
accumulated toner on the blade edge to drop on the ITB
while there is no image on the ITB, and then this toner
can be removed. If this is not done, toner may drop on
the image. These SPs adjust the time and number of
times for blade cleaning.
2
Number
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
3
Duplex
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step] (BICU v1.07 & Controller v1.07)
ITB Cleaning Exec Variable
[1 ~ 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step] DFU
B156/B220
5-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
926
927
938
940
944
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Coverage Ratio Reference DFU
1
MC
[0~ 100 / 1.7 / 0.1%/step]
2
FC
[0~ 100 / 1.7 / 0.1%/step]
Disable Time (ITB Cleaning) DFU
[0 ~ 14 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
OPC Reverse Interval
[0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 /step]
The main motor turns the OPC belt in reverse for 500ms
at the end of every job, to remove unwanted particles
between the OPC belt and OPC cleaning blade.
However, it is not necessary to do this often. In addition,
if the frequency of OPC belt reverse rotation is reduced,
the cleaning blade operates better.
This SP adjusts the counter for the OPC belt reverse
rotation, and is incremented as follows:
LT/A4 LEF or shorter: 1, Longer than LT/A4 LEF: 2.
When this SP reaches its set maximum, reverse rotation
is done for 500ms at job end.
OPC Lubricant Mode
OPC Lubricant Mode
Executes a forced OPC lubrication to reduce the friction
on the OPC belt. DFU
The OPC belt and the lubricant brush operate for 2
minutes.
OPC Lubrication: High Coverage
1
Setting
Enables/disables OPC lubrication after a certain amount
of images are printed. The lubrication timing depends on
SP2-944-2 to -5.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
When high coverage images are continuously printed,
cleaning of the OPC may not be enough. To correct this,
OPC lubrication is carried out during printing
2
Image Coverage1
Specifies standard average coverage condition 1.
[50 ~ 800 / 300 / 10 units/step]
OPC lubrication is executed under the following
conditions.
After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2944-4.
The average coverage of the outputs after the
previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average
coverage condition 1.
3
Image Coverage2
Specifies standard average coverage condition 2.
[50 ~ 800 / 200 / 10 units/step]
OPC lubrication is executed under the following
conditions.
After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2944-5.
The average coverage of the outputs after the
previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average
coverage condition 2.
5-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
944
950
951
4
5
6
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Sheets1
Sheets2
Time
[6 ~ 80 / 30 / 1 sheet/step]
[6 ~ 80 / 60 / 1 sheet/step]
Specifies the time for OPC lubrication.
[8 ~ 30 / 14 / 1 sec/step]
Start Registration Adjustment 1

1
K (32/24cpm)
Color registration adjustment: Adjusts the start timing of
imaging for each color.
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
The value indicates 2 lines.
2 lines = 0.047566 ms (about 85 m)
+: Delays the start timing.
: Advances the start timing.
The start timing is adjusted only in plain paper mode,
and when one of the following conditions is satisfied:
1) Between the two images on the transfer belt (when
two images are developed on the OPC at the
same time ( 6.3))
2) B4 SEF or larger (multi-print job)
2
3
4
5
M (32/24cpm)
C (32/24cpm)
Y (32/24cpm)
K (32/24cpm)
6
7
8
9
M (32/24cpm)
C (32/24cpm)
Y (32/24cpm)
K (20cpm)
10 M (20cpm)
11 C (20cpm)
12 Y (20cpm)
13 K (20cpm)
14 M (20cpm)
15 C (20cpm)
16 Y (20cpm)
Clock Phase Control
1
LD 1
2
LD 2
B156/B220
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the start timing of the second imaging for each
color.
[6 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the start timing of imaging for each color.
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the clock phase of the LD to reduce the density
difference between the left and right sides of the printout
when the color misalignment correction (SP29521) is
enabled.
[0 ~ 8 / 0 / 1 /step]
Do this after installing a new laser unit; see
Replacement and Adjustment for details.
5-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
952
953
954
970
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Color Misalignment Correction
Color Misalignment
Selects either color misalignment correction or reduction
Correction
in density difference between the left and right sides of
pages.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1: ON
The data for LD1 and LD2 are switched between the
left and right sides of each page. This is done
because of the difference in the output of each LD.
However, in some cases this correction may cause
density differences between sides.
0: OFF
Use this setting if there are density differences
between sides.
S Reg. Adjustment
0:New 1:Old
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
New PCU Settings
0:New 1:Old
Selects the PCU type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New PCU
1: Old PCU
Oil Removal Mode
1
Oil Removal 1
Enables/disables the oil removal process for a multipage job.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Oil on duplex copies gets on the transfer belt, and this
can cause uneven image density. To remove this oil,
printing stops, the PCU turns, and the cleaning unit
removes the oil.
2
Oil Removal 2
Enables/disables the oil removal process after job end.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
3
Number of Continue
Specifies how many times the oil removal process is
repeated.
[1 ~ 20 / 5 / 1 /step]
The more times the oil removal is repeated, the better
the output images are; but the longer it takes.
4
Number of Duplex
Specifies how often the oil removal process is done. The
unit is the number of duplex prints. The counter counts
down once every narrow (A4 SEF or less) duplex sheet,
and counts back up 1 for every other type of sheet.
[1 ~ 50 / 10 / 1 /step]
5
ITB Cleaning Clutch
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
Off/On Number
This SP sets the number of times the ITB clutch is
turned on/off at the end of oil removal mode (SP2-97001 - this removes oil from the ITB to ensure uniform
image density). Turning the ITB clutch on/off helps to
remove excess toner that can cling to and then drop
from the edge of the newly added ITB cleaning blade
during oil removal.
5-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
980
981
982
983
984
Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Dctr Roller Interval
1
Job_Interruption: K
2
Job_Interruption: M
3
Job_Interruption: C
4
Job_Interruption: Y
Specifies the timing for reversing the doctor roller during

the multiple printing with single color. When this counter
reaches the prescribed value, reversing the doctor roller
is done during the print job.
In addition, reversing the doctor roller is done when the
counter reaches the 1/2 prescribed value in these SPs
after the toner near end has been detected.
[0 ~ 200 / 100 / 10 /step] 0: Disables job interruption.
Specifies the timing for reversing the doctor roller after
5
Job_end: K
job end with single color. When this counter reaches the
6
Job_end: M
prescribed value and next job is not commanded,
7
Job_end: C
reversing the doctor roller is done after the job end.
8
Job_end: Y
[1 ~ 100 / 20 / 1 /step]
Toner Revitalization (3 and 4 requires BICU v1.04 and Main Unit Controller v1.05)
1
Job_Interruption
Specifies the number of prints for executing toner
revitalization in the middle of a job.
For A4 SEF, the
[0 ~ 200 / 100 / 10 /step]
counter counts twice.
0: Disables job interruption.
2
Job_ End
Specifies the number of prints for executing toner
revitalization at the end of a job.
For A4 SEF, the
[0 ~ 100 / 20 / 1 /step]
counter counts twice.
0: Disables toner refresh at end of a job.
3
Toner Revitalization
The oil removal mode (PCU idling and toner refresh) is
Duplex Job
carried out when the duplex printing accumulated
Interruption
number. [0 ~ 200 / 30 / 1 sheet/step]
4
The duplex printing accumulated number is 6 (default) to
Duplex PCU Idling
29 at the toner refresh mode timing after job end, the oil
removal mode is carried out. [0 ~ 200 / 6 / 1 sheet/step]
5
When the single printing is made, the number of the
Page Count Up
single printing {absolute value of (default) times single
printing number} reduces the duplex printing
accumulated number. After oil removal mode the duplex
printing accumulated number is cleared to 0.
[0.0 ~ -1.0 / -0.1 / 0.1/step]
Dev. Motor Control
1
Speed Shift Time
Specifies the interval for changing the development
motor speed from half speed to normal speed.
[0 ~ 500 / 100 / 10 ms/step] DFU
2
Dev.CL_Off Time
Specifies the interval until turning off the development
clutch after turning off the development motor.
[150 ~ 0 / 60 / 10 ms/step] DFU
Control Development Fan At Job End
1
Development Unit Fan To prevent dirty background, which can occur in hightemperature/high-humidity conditions turn ON the
development fan at job end. [0 ~ 900 / 0 / 10 s/step]
Duplex PCU Idling Setting (Requires BICU v1.04 and Main Unit Controller v1.05)
1
Total Period: T1
The total period of the PCU idling in duplex mode.
[6 ~ 200 / 60 / 1 s/step]
2
Printing Prohibited
The machine can print 6 seconds (default) after PCU
Period: T2
idling starts.
[6 ~ 60 / 6 / 1 s/step]
B156/B220
5-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP3-XXX: (Process)
001
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Forced Process Control
1
Execute
2
003*
Lubricant Interval
1
Interval
SM
Display
Forced Interval
Does a forced process control, and displays the result as
one of the following codes.
Displays the completion code.
1: Normal termination
99: Stop (Interruption due to SC or door open)
103: Error (ID sensor inactive Defective ID sensor,
Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
104: Error (ID sensor unable to receive light
Defective OPC belt, Dirty OPC belt, Defective ID
sensor, Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
105: Error (ID sensor unable to receive reflection from
OPC Same as 104)
110: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
111: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect
correct image)
112: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
113: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
114: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect
correct image)
115: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
116: Error (Black: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
118: Error (Black image not detected)
123: Error (Development bias error; Black ID sensor
unable to detect correct image)
Solutions for codes 110 to 123:
Poor connection to the development unit
Dirty development bias terminal
Abnormal development bias
PCU not installed correctly
LD unit defective
Abnormal charge corona voltage
Defective BICU
Sets the process control interval. Process control for this
SP is done only after job end.
[0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 10 sheets/step]
0: Disables automatic process control
Sets the process control interval. Process control for this
SP is done during a job if the counter reaches the value
(N1 + N2).
If the counter is between N1 and N2, process control is
done after job end.
N1: the value specified with SP3-003-1.
N2: the value specified with this SP.
[0 ~ 5000 / 500 / 10 sheets/step]
5-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3
004*
006*
125
911
922*
929
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Environment Change
1
Temperature
2
Humidity
Density Adjustment
1
M/A Correction
2
Highlight Correction
ACC Self Check Set

0: No 1: Yes
Sets the temperature/humidity change that triggers
process control (process control is done if temperature
or humidity has changed by this amount since the
previous process control).
[0 ~ 100 / 15 / 1C/step]
[0 ~ 200 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]
Select the toner density compensation level for process
control. If prints are not dark enough when making multiprint jobs, increasing this value ensures that prints will
be darker after the next process control. The default (0)
is for no correction.
SP3-006-1: Use this one if the density of solid areas is
not satisfactory.
SP3-006-2: Use this one if the density of highlight areas
is not satisfactory.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1/step]
0: None
1: Weak
2: Medium
3: Strong
The higher the value, the darker the prints will be.
Enables process control execution before ACC.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
Doctor Roller Rotation Interval

1
M Development
The doctor rollers for M and K are rotated backwards to
prevent toner clumping. It is not necessary to do this for
2
K Development
every M & K job, because this may cause doctor roller
filming and dirty background images. To prevent this, the
reverse rotation is done after 20 development jobs.
These SP modes can adjust the reverse rotation interval.
The doctor roller reverse rotation for SP3-911 is
performed at job end.
[1 ~ 50 / 20 / 1 /step] DFU
Lubricant Clutch Off
1
1C
The setting determines the number of seconds after
image transfer belt cleaning roller charging that the
clutch is turned off.
[0 ~ 11 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
2
2C/3C/4C
[0 ~ 11 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
Development Unit Replace
1
M
Initializes the development unit for each color.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / -]
2
C
0: No action
3
Y
1: Initialize the development unit
4
Bk
When you initialize the development unit, refer to 3.5
development unit in the Replacement and Adjustments.
B156/B220
5-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2005
970
2
3
4
5
971
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Image Area Rate
1
M
972
980
990
SM
C
Y
Bk
Oil End
Specifies the minimum image area (expressed as a
percentage of an A4 page) required to maintain optimum
development unit condition ( Toner Revitalization:
SP3971).
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
After 20 sheets over a number of small jobs (or after 50
sheets in one job), if the developed area is less than the
value of this SP mode, toner is transferred to the image
transfer belt and cleaned off. This is performed during
the doctor roller reverse rotation.
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
[0 ~ 10.0 / 4.7 / 0.1 %/step]
When the average BK Image pixel is larger than 4.2%,
0.5% toner refresh (default) is carried out in duplex
mode. When the average BK Image pixel is 4.2% or
less, current toner refresh is carried out.
[0 ~ 10.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 %/step] (BICU v1.04, Main v1.05)
1
Enables/disables the toner revitalization.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Continuous printing with a relatively low coverage ratio
(CMYK less than 5% each) tends to reduce the charge
potential of the toner, because the toner remains in the
hopper for a long time. This can lead to spots on the
copy. Toner revitalization removes this defective toner
periodically.
Counting The Number Of A4/Lt SEF Developments For Toner Refresh Mode
1
Development counter
Usually, 1 A4/LT SEF sheet is counted as 1, but for
for A4/LT SEF
machines which use this paper as their main size, a
setting of 1.2. [1 or 1.2 count/ 1 / ]
1C Idling
1
1C Idling
Enables/disables 1-color idling after paper transfer.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Set to 1 if the user complains about diagonal lines in
solid areas that only use one toner color (M, C, or Y).
Process Control Off
1
All ON/OFF Selection
Turns on/off process control for all process control
(0: OFF/ 1: ON)
execution timings.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: OFF (Process control enabled)
1: ON (Process control disabled)
2
After CH Cleaning
Turns on/off process control for the process control that
ON/OFF Selection
is done after charge corona wire cleaning.
(0: OFF/ 1: ON)
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF (Process control enabled)
1: ON (Process control disabled)
5-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP4-XXX: (Scanner)
4
008*
010
011*
012*
013
017
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Scanner Sub Scan
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for
Magnification
scanning.
[1.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
Use the key to toggle between + and before entering
the value. The specification is 1%. See Replacement
and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for details.
Scanner Leading Edge Registration
Scanner Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen
Registration
mode.
[3.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
(): The image moves in the direction of the leading edge.
the value. The specification is 2 1.5 mm. See
Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for
details.
Scanner Side-to-side Registration
Scanner Side-to-side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen
Registration
mode.
[6.0 ~ 6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm /step]
(): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears.
the value. The specification is 2 1.5 mm. See
Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for
details.
Scale Shadow Erase
1
Book: Lead Edge L
2
Book: Trail Edge R
3
Book: Left
4
Book: Right
5
ADF: Lead Edge
7
ADF: Left
8
ADF: Right
Scanner Free Run
1
Lamp: OFF
2
Lamp: ON
Scan
1
Shading ON
2
Shading OFF
B156/B220
Adjusts the erase margin at each side for scanning.

[0.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to have a
scanner margin that is greater than the printer margin.
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or

off.
Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press
OFF on the touch panel to stop.
Performs a scanner free run with shading on or off. Only

one scan is made.
Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press
OFF on the touch panel to stop.
5-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
020
301
303
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
DF Glass Dust Check
1
Dust Check
Detect Level
Image Correct Level
APS Data Confirmation

APS Data
Confirmation
Turns DF glass dust detection on/off.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects the detection level.
[0 ~ 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least detailed detection, 8: Most detailed detection
Selects the vertical line correction when using the DF.
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables image correction level
4: Most effective correction
Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF

cover sensor.
APS Minimum Size Setting

Selects whether the copier determines that the original is
A5 sideways or lengthwise size when the APS sensor
cannot detect the size.
[0 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
If 2: A5 lengthwise is selected, paper sizes that cannot
be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5
lengthwise.
If 1: A5 sideways is selected, paper sizes that cannot be
detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5
sideways.
If 0: Not detected is selected, Cannot detect original
size will be displayed.
305
ADF Size Change

Selects the original size type for the default original size
detection.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Standard
1: A4/LT
2: 8K/16K
400
Scanning Blank Margin

1
Book: Lead Edge L
2
Book: Trail Edge R
3
Book: Left
4
Book: Right
5
7
8
SM
ADF: Lead Edge

ADF: Left
ADF: Right
Specifies the scanning blank margin for each edge in

platen mode.
[ 0 ~ 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Specifies the scanning blank margin for each edge in ADF

mode.
[ 0 ~ 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
5-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4
417
440
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
IPU Test Pattern Select
select any test pattern
Prints test patterns from the IPU video data outputs.

0: Scanning Image
1: Checker
2: Oblique Checker
3: Horizontal Gray Scale
4: Vertical Gray Scale
5: RGB YMCK Scale
6: UCR Gray Scale
7: Color Patch 16 Steps 1
8: Color Patch 16 Steps 2
9: Color Patch 64 Steps
10: Checker (YMCK)
11: Patch (YMCK)
12: Banding 1 (Gray)
13: Banding 2 (Gray)
14: Horizontal Gray Scale 2
15: Scanning Image + Checker
16: Scanning Image + Gray Scale
Change to the copy mode display by pressing the Interrupt
key, then print the test pattern.
Chroma Adjustment
Adjusts the color chroma for the scanner.
[0 ~ 5 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
460
ADS (Digital) Level

Selects the auto erase background level. All background
below this level is automatically erased.
[0~ 128 / 10 / 1 /step]
540
Printer Vector
1
R: Option
2
R: R
3
R: G
4
R: B
5
Y: Option
6
Y: R
7
Y: G
8
Y: B
9
G: Option
10 G: R
11 G: G
12 G: B
13 C: Option
14 C: R
15 C: G
16 C: B
17 B: Option
18 B: R
B156/B220
Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the

SBU unit.
[0 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data
sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
5-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
540
550
551
552
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
19 B: G
20 B: B
21 M: Option
22 M: R
23 M: G
24 M: B
Scanner Application
5
Text (Print) MTF
Text (Print) Smoothing
Text (Print) Brightness
Text (Print) Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Text (OCR) MTF
Text (OCR) Smoothing
Text (OCR) Brightness
Text (OCR) Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Text (OCR) D.O.C
MTF
6
Text (OCR) D.O.C

Smoothing
Text (OCR) D.O.C

Brightness
Text (OCR) D.O.C

Contrast
Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the
SBU unit.
[0 255/ 0 / 1 /step]
When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data
sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
Adjusts the MTF level.

[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast

[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4
553
554
555
558
558
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Scanner Application
5
Text /Photo MTF
Text /Photo Smoothing
Text /Photo Brightness
Text /Photo Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Photo MTF
Photo Smoothing
Photo Brightness
Photo Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Grayscale MTF
Grayscale Smoothing
Grayscale Brightness
Grayscale Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Color (T/P) MTF
Color (T/P) Smoothing
Color (T/P) Brightness
Color (T/P) Contrast
B156/B220
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step] 1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
559
560
561
562
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Scanner Application
5
Color (GlossyPhoto)
MTF
6
Color (GlossyPhoto)
Smoothing
Color (GlossyPhoto)
Brightness
Color (GlossyPhoto)
Contrast
Scanner Application
5
sRGB (T/P) MTF
sRGB (T/P) Smoothing
sRGB (T/P) Brightness
sRGB (T/P)Contrast
Scanner Application
5
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
MTF
6
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
Smoothing
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
Brightness
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
Contrast
Scanner Application
5
ACS MTF
ACS Smoothing
ACS Brightness
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4
8
628
629
630
661
Gain Adjustment: R
1
R EVEN
2
R ODD
Gain Adjustment: G
1
G EVEN
2
G ODD
Gain Adjustment: B
1
B EVEN
2
B ODD
Last Gain Data: R
1
R EVEN
2
662
688
800
800
885
Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
Displays the last gain value for the even red signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
Displays the last gain value for the odd red signal in the
R ODD
Displays the last gain value for the even green signal in
the CCD image processing circuit.
Displays the last gain value for the odd green signal in the
G ODD
Displays the last gain value for the even blue signal in the
Displays the last gain value for the odd blue signal in the
B ODD
DF: Density Adjustment

DF: Density
Adjustment
DF: Density Correction

1
R
2

[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Last Gain Data: B

1
B EVEN
2
Last Gain Data: G

1
G EVEN
2
663
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ACS Contrast
Adjusts the brightness for scanning using the ARDF.

[83 100 / 100 / 1 %/step]
The density when scanning from the DF exposure glass
tends to be higher than the density from the main
exposure glass. SP4-688 adjusts the density on the DF
exposure glass.
Adjusts the red density when scanning with the ARDF
[20 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
Adjusts the green density when scanning with the ARDF
[20 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
Adjusts the blue density when scanning with the ARDF
[20 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
Level Adjustment: R
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage. Details are in
Replacement and Adjustment.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 49 / 1 /step]
886
Level Adjustment: G
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 17 / 1 /step]
887
Level Adjustment: B
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 29 / 1 /step]
B156/B220
5-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
902
903
905*
906*
907
918
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ACC Data Display
1
R DATA 1
2
G DATA 1
3
B DATA 1
4
R DATA 2
5
G DATA 2
6
B DATA 2
Displays ACC data.
[0 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Vertical Line Correct

Dither selection
Dither selection
Binary Threshold
Binary Threshold
DFU
[0 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
VPU Test Pattern Selection

1
select any test pattern:
R
2
G
3
B
Manual Gamma Adjustment
[0 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: CCD
1: Black
2: White
3: 15-grade gray scale
4: Vertical line
Specifies the black/white threshold for binary image

processing.
[0 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Lower values increase the proportion of black in the
image.
Please refer to section 3.13.2

932*
SM
Picture Element Correction

1
R: Left
2
R: Right
3
B: Left
4
B: Right
Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue

filter on the CCD.
[0 9 / 5 / 1 /step]
5-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2005
SP5-XXX: (Mode)
5
024*
045*
051
055
112
113
118
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
mm/inch Display Selection
mm/inch Display
Selection
Accounting Counter
Counter Method
Selects a unit system.
North America: [0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: [0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: mm
1: inch
Changes the counter method.
The setting can only be changed once.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Developments
1: Prints
Toner Refill Detection Display

Toner Refill Detection
Display
Display IP Address
1
Display IP Address
Activates/inactivates the toner refill detection display.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: ON
1: OFF
Display the IP Address on the LCD.
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step] (0: No, 1:Yes)
Non-Standard Paper Selection

0: OFF 1: ON
Turns the custom paper size selection on/ off.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Optional Counter Type
1
Default Optional
Determines the type of accounting device.
Counter Type
[0 ~ 9 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4)
2: Key Card (count down)
3: Prepaid Card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF Key Card
6: (not used)
7: (not used)
8: Key Counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
2
External Optional
For use with the SDK package.
Counter Type
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
Disable copying
Disable copying
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Copying enabled
1: Copying disabled
B156/B220
5-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
120
121
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Mode Clear Opt.
Selects the mode clear for all accounting devices when
Counter Removal
canceling the accounting devices counter.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes (always cleared)
1: Standby (cleared before and after a job, not
cleared during an interrupt)
2: No (never cleared)
Counter Up Timing
Counter Up Timing
Selects the accounting timing.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Feed (counted up when the feed sensor detects the
paper)
1: Exit (counted up when the exit sensor detects the
paper)
126
127
128
SM
F Size Setting
F Size Setting
APS Mode
APS Mode
Selects the size when the original size sensors of the

ADF or platen detect that the original size is F size.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: 8 x 13
1: 8 x 13
2: 8 x 13
Enables or disables the APS (Auto Paper Selection)

mode.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Enables
1: Disables
Code Mode With Key/Card Option

Code Mode With
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Key/Card Option
0: No combination (user codes cannot be used with
key/card options)
1: Combination (user codes can be used with

key/card options)
Also see SP 5-113.
5-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5-121 affects only the timing for sending signals to

the accounting device. The counters for other units or
devices are not affected.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
131
150
162
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Paper Size Type
Paper Size Type
Bypass Length Setting

Bypass Length Setting
Application Switch Method

App. Switch Method
Selects the original size type.
[0 ~ 2 / Depending on DIP switch setting / 1 /step]
0: Japan
1: N. America
2: Europe
DIP switch setting ( 5.8)
Use or do not use long paper in the bypass tray.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON (jams are not detected in the paper path)
The standard length (sub scan) is limited to 600mm
even if "1" is selected in this SP.
Selects the switching method of the application display.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
167
Fax Printing Mode at Optional

Fax Printing Mode at
Selects the fax printing mode without the optional
Optional Counter Off
accounting device when the fax printing is set for
accounting.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
169
CE Login
CE Login
212
If you change the printer bit switches, you must log in to

service mode with this SP before you go into the printer
SP mode.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
Page Numbering
3
Duplex Printout
Right/Left Position
4
Duplex Printout
High/Low Position
B156/B220
Adjusts the positions of the 2nd page's numbers.

[10 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
302
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Setting Time
Time Difference
Sets the time difference.
North America: [1440 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
Europe: [1440 1440 / 60 / 1 minute/step]
Values indicate the time difference from the Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). 300 indicates the eastern
standard time of Canada and the United States of
America. 60 indicates the standard time of the French
Republic.
Summer Time
1
Setting
Rule Set (Start)
Enables or disables the summer time mode.

[0 ~ 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
NOTE: Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are
correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated
even if this SP is set to "1".
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0"
cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting
for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th
Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
SM
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
5-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
307
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
401*
404
501
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Access Control
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
200 SDK1 Unique ID
This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you install or
uninstall the SDK application.
201 SDK1 Certification
[ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID
[ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
220 SDK3 Unique ID
[ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
User Code Count Clear
User Code Count
Clears the user code counter.
Clear
PM Alarm
1
PM Alarm Level
Specifies the PM alarm level.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables the PM alarm
1 ~ 9999: Specifies the PM alarm level.
The PM alarm occurs when L x 1000 >= C, where L is
the specified level and C is the current PM counter
value.
2
504
505
Original Count Alarm
Jam Alarm Used with RSS.

Jam Alarm
Error Alarm Used with RSS.

Error Alarm
B156/B220
Turns the original count alarm on or off.

[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] Used for RSS.
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects the jam alarm level.
[0 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Z (none)
1: L (6K x 1/4)
2: M (6K x 1/2)
3: H (6K)
When you select "1, 2 or 3", the machine does these
steps:
1) The jam alarm counter increases by "1" when a
paper jam is detected (except for jams in the ADF).
2) The jam alarm counter decreases by "1" when the set
number of sheets was copied or printed after the
machine detected the previous paper jam.
3) A jam alarm occurs when the jam alarm counter gets
to "10".
Specifies the error alarm level.

[0 255 / 40 / 1 /step]
The unit is a hundred sheets. The default "40" means
4,000 sheets.
5-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
507
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Supply Alarm Used with RSS.
1
Paper Supply Alarm
Turns the supply alarm on or off.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when one of the limits in SPs 5507128 to 172 is reached.
2
Staple Supply Alarm
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when every 1000 staples are used.
3
508
SM
Toner Supply Alarm
128 Interval: Others

132 Interval: A3
133 Interval: A4
134 Interval: A5
141 Interval: B4
142 Interval: B5
160 Interval: DLT
164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
CC Call Used with RSS.
1
Jam Remains
Continuous Jams
Continuous Door Open

[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when toner near end occurs.
The machine issues the control call when the number of
paper sheets reaches the specified value.
[ 250 10000 / 1000 / 1 sheet/step]
Enables/disables alarms for unremoved jams.

[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables/disables alarms for consecutive jams.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables/disables alarms when a cover remains open
continuously.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
508
11
12
610
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Low Call Mode
Jam Detection: Time

Length
Jam Detection:
Continuous Count
13
Door Open: Time

Length
21
Jam Operation: Time

Length
22
Jam Operation:
Continuous Count
23
Door Operation: Time

Length
ACC Factory Setting

4
Recall
5
Overwrite
6
B156/B220
Previous Setting
Selects the alarm mode.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Mode (CC Auto Call)
1: Reduce Mode (CC Manual Call)
When selecting 1 (reduce mode), SP5-508-011 through
-023 specify parameters (referred to as P in the
following descriptions). Alarms occur under the following
conditions:
Continuous jam:
When paper jams occur P times consecutively, where
P can be between 2 and 10. The default for P is 5 (
SP5-508-012).
Continuous door open:
When a door is left open for P minutes, where P can
be between 3 and 30. The default for P is 10 ( SP5508-013).
Unremoved jam:
When a paper jam is left unremoved for P minutes,
where P can be between 3 and 30. The default for P
is 10 ( SP5-508-011).
Specifies the unremoved jam timer ( SP5-508-004).
[3 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Specifies the number of consecutive jams ( SP5-508004).
[2 10 / 5 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the continuous door open timer ( SP5-508004).
[3 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Selects how the machine handles the unremoved jam
alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Beeper
If an unremoved jam occurs, a phone call is
automatically made when 0 (auto call) is selected. To
enable SP5-508-21 through -23, SP5-508-4 must be set
to 1.
Selects how the machine handles the consecutive jam
alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Manual Call
Selects how the machine handles the continuous door
open alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Manual Call
Recalls the ACC factory settings.
Overwrites the ACC factory settings with the current
settings.
Recalls the previous ACC settings.
5-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
611
801
802
803
804
810
811
812*
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
2nd. Single Color Adj.
1
BC
[0 100 / 90 / 1 %/step]
2
BM
[0 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]
3
GC
[0 100 / 85 / 1 %/step]
4
GY
[0 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
5
RM
[0 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
6
RY
[0 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
Memory Clear Refer to section 5.1.9 for how to use this SP
1
All Clear
Clears the settings from the NVRAM and initializes the
settings.
2
Engine Clear
Clears the engine settings.
3
SCS
Clears the system settings.
4
IMH Memory Clr
Clears IMH data. DFU
5
MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
6
Copier application
Clears the copy settings.
7
Fax Application
Clears the fax settings.
8
Printer Application
Clears the user tool settings.
9
Scanner Application
Clears the scanner settings.
This SP must be performed after updating the scanner
software.
10 Web Service/Network
Clears the net file settings.
Application
11 NCS
Clears the network settings.
12 R-FAX
Clears the R-FAX settings.
14 Clear DCS Setting
Clears the DCS settings.
15 Clear UCS Setting
Clears the UCS settings.
16 MIRS Setting
Clears the MIRS settings.
17 CCS
Clears the CCS settings.
Free Run
Makes a free run test.
1
A4: BANK 2: Bk
All mode: Goes through tests 1 to 4.
2
A4: TRAY 1: Bk
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
A4: By-pass: Bk
0: OFF
4
A4: BANK 2: FC
1: ON
5
All Mode
Input Check (See section 5.1.4, Input Check)
Output Check (See section 5.1.5, Output Check.)
SC Reset
SC Reset
Resets a fusing-related SC.
Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after using this
SP.
Serial Number Display
SN Display
Displays the machine serial number.
Service Telephone No. Setting
1
Service
5-812-1: Service representative telephone number
5-812-2: Service representative fax number
2
Facsimile
5-812-3: Number for ordering consumables
3
Supply
5-812-4: Telephone number of the sales representative
4
Operation
Both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input.
5-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
816
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Remote Service
1
I/F Setting
CE Call
Function Flag
Communicate Test
Call
Device Information
Call
Device Information
Call Display Setting
5
6
821
SSL Disable
RCG Connect Timeout
RCG Write Timeout
10
RCG Read Timeout
11
Port 80 Enable
Remote Service Address

1
CSS-PI device code
B156/B220
RCG IP Address
Selects the remote service setting.
[0 ~ 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to
2.
Enables/disables the remote service function.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Communication Test Call
Device Information Call
Displays/does not display the device information call
content.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Uses/does not use the RCG certification by SSL when
calling the RCG.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 ~ 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Enables/disables the access via port 80 to the SOAP
(Simple Object Access Protocol) method.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Selects the PI device code.
[0 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
To validate the setting, turn off and on the main power
switch.
Sets the RCG IP address for calling the center.
5-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
824
825
828
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
NV-RAM Data Upload
NV-RAM Data Upload
NV-RAM Data Download
NV-RAM Data
Download
Network Setting
50 1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
52
ECP (Centro)
65
Job Spooling
66
Job Spooling Clear:

Start Time
69
Job Spooling
(Protocol)
84
90
Printing Settings List

TELNET
(0: OFF 1:ON)
Use this to copy NVRAM data from the machine to an
SD card.
Imports data from an SD card to the NVRAM.
When data has been normally imported into the
NVRAM, a message appears on the operation panel.
After reading the message, turn the main power switch
off and on.
Validates/invalidates IEEE1284 compatibility.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
Validates/invalidates ECP.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
This SP is activated only when SP5828-050 is set to 1.
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
Enables/disables Job Spooling.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables/disables Job Spooling Clear when the main
power turns on.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: ON (Erases the spooled job in the HDD before the
main power is turned off.)
1: OFF (Prints the spooled job in the HDD before the
main power is turned off.)
Enables/disables Job Spooling for each protocol.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Enables Job Spooling
1: Disables Job Spooling
Bit switch
Bit 0: LPR
Bit 1: FTP
Bit 2: IPP
Bit 3: SMB
Bit 4: BMLinks
Bit 5: DIPRINT
Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 7: Reserved
Prints the settings list related to NCS parameters.
Turns on/ off TELNET.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
828
832
833
836
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
91 Web
(0: OFF 1: ON)
Turns on/ off the web.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
HDD
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialise, then press . When the execution
ends, cycle down and on.
NOTE: Use this SP mode only for hard disk error recovery.
1
HDD Formatting (ALL) Initializes the hard disk.
2
HDD Formatting (IMH) Initializes followings:
Documents stored on the document server
Stamp print data
Scanner delivery images
Fax delivery images
3
HDD Formatting
Initializes MCS thumbnail images.
(Thumbnail)
4
HDD Formatting
Initializes lob data used by the Poplar server.
(Job Log)
5
HDD Formatting
Initializes printer fonts, overlay forms.
(Printer Fonts)
6
HDD Formatting
Initializes user information (UCS).
(User Info)
7
Mail RX Data
Initializes mail receive data (DCS)
8
Mail TX Data
Initializes mail send data (DCS)
9
HDD Formatting
Designer use only.
(Data for a Design)
10 HDD Formatting (Log) Initializes the logs (fax history and debug log).
11 HDD Formatting
Initializes the Net File management area.
(Ridoc interface)
e-Cabinet enable
e-Cabinet enable
Enables/disables the e-Cabinet.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
The e-Cabinet supplies the interface for registration,
editing, deleting and obtaining the users code name.
NOTE: Turn the main switch on and off after using this
SP.
NOTE:
Capture Setting
1
Capture Function
Turn the capture function on/off.
0: Off 1: On
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
2
Panel Setting
Displays or does not display the capture function
buttons.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
B156/B220
5-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
71 Reduction for Copy
Color
72
Reduction for Copy

B&W Text
73
Reduction for Copy

B&W Other
74
Reduction for Printer

Color
75

B&W
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy color mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
copy B&W text mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
copy B&W other mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
print color mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
print B&W mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
5-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
836
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
76 Reduction for Printer
B&W HQ
77

Color 1200dpi
78

B&W 1200dpi
81
Format for Copy Color
82
Format for Copy B&W

Text
83
Format for Copy B&W

Other
B156/B220
print B&W HQ mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
print color 1200dpi mode to the document management
server.
[1, 3 ~ 5 / 4 / 1 /step]
1: 1/2
2: Skipped
3: 1/4:
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
print B&W 1200dpi mode to the document management
server.
[1, 3 ~ 5 / 1 / 1 /step]
1: 1/2
2: Skipped
3: 1/4:
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
This SP shows the format when capturing the image
with copy color mode. This SP cannot be adjusted.
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
This SP is activated only when the File Format
Converter has been installed.
Selects the format when capturing the image with copy
B&W text mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
Selects the format when capturing an image with copy
B&W modes other than text.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
5-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
836
839
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
84 Format for Printer
Color
85
Format for Printer

B&W
86
Format for Printer

B&W HQ
91
Default for JPEG
IEEE1394
4
Host Name
7
Cycle Master
BCR mode
IRM 1394a Check
10
Unique ID
11
Logout
12
Login
This SP shows the format when capturing the image
with print color mode. This SP cannot be adjusted.
0: JFIF/JPEG
Selects the format when capturing the image with print
B&W mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
Selects the format when capturing the image with print
B&W HQ mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
Selects the default quality for JPEG
[5 ~ 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Displays the 1394 host name.
[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / /step]
Turns the cycle master function on/off.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects either Standard, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always
Effective'.
Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is
used as IRM.
[0 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators log
off.
[0 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to
log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off
if they try to log on.)
Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.
[0 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows)
1: ON (Allows)
5-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
839
840
841
842
844
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
13 Login MAX
IEEE 802.11b
6
Channel MAX
Specifies the maximum initiators able to log on.

[0 63 / 8 / 1 /step]
Specifies the maximum number of IEEE 802.11b
channels.
North America/ Asia: [1 11 / 11 / 1 /step]
Europe: [1 14 / 14 / 1 /step]
Specifies the minimum number of IEEE 802.11b
channels.
North America/ Asia: [1 11 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: [1 14 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN
11
WEP Key Select
Supply Name Setting

1
Toner Name Setting:
Black
2
Toner Name Setting:
Cyan
3
Toner Name Setting:
Yellow
4
Toner Name Setting:
Magenta
7
Org Stamp
11 Staple Std1
12 Staple Std2
13 Staple Std3
14 Staple Std4
Net File Analysis Mode Setting
Net File Analysis Mode
Setting
USB
1
Transfer Rate
Selects the WEP key.

[00, 01, 10, 11 / 00 / /step]
00: 1st key
01: 2nd key
10: 3rd key
11: 4th key
Specifies supply names with the soft keys on the LCD.
These appear on the screen when the user presses the
Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
DFU
Default: 00000000 do not change
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Selects the Full Speed or Auto Change for the

transfer rate.
Default: Auto Change
Vendor ID
Specifies the vendor ID.

[0 ~ FFFF / 5CA / -/step]
Product ID
Specifies the product ID.

[0 ~ FFFF / 403 / -/step]
B156/B220
5-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
844
845
846
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Device Release
Number
Delivery Server Setting

1
FTP Port No.
2
IP Address (Primary)
Delivery Error Display

Time
IP Address
(Secondary)
Delivery Server Model
10
Delivery Srv.
Capability
11
Delivery Srv.
Capability (Ext)
UCS Setting
1
Machine ID (for
Delivery Server)
2
Machine ID Clear (for
Delivery Server)
Specifies the device release number with BCD (Binary
Coded Decimal).
[0 ~ 9999 / 100 / 1 /step]
Specifies the FTP port number.

[0 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
Specifies the primary distribution server IP address.
[000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 / 000.000.000.000
/ 1/step]
Specifies the display time of the distribution delivery
error.
[0 ~ 999 / 300 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the secondary distribution server IP address.
[000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 / 000.000.000.000
/ 1/step]
Changes the delivery server model.
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Selects the capability of the server registered as the I/O
device for each function.
[0 to 255 / 00000000 / 1/step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit switch:
Bit 0: Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is
set to 0)
Bit 1: Function to link MK-1 user and sender
Bit 2: Sender password function
Bit 3: Fax RX delivery function
Bit 4: Address book automatic update function
Bit 5: Mail RX confirmation setting
Bit 6: Direct specification of mail address
Bit 7: Comments information
Selects the capability of the server registered as the I/O
device for each function.
[0 to 255 / 00000000 / 1/step]
Bit switch:
Bit 0 ~ 5: Not used
Bit 6: RDH authorization link
Bit 7: Address book usage limitation (Limitation for
each authorized user)
Displays the machine ID of the distribution server.
Clears the machine ID of the distribution server.
5-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
846
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Maximum Entries
Delivery Server Retry

Timer
Delivery Server Retry

Times
Delivery Server
Maximum Entries
10
LDAP Search Timeout
47
50
Initialize Local Addr

Book
Initialize Delivery Addr
Book
Initialize LDAP Addr
Book
Initialize All Addr Book
51
52
53
Backup All Addr Book

Restore All Addr Book
Clear Backup Info
90
Plain Data Forbidden
91
FTP Auth Port Setting
94
Encryption Stat
48
49
B156/B220
Specifies the maximum entry counts.
[2000 ~ 20000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
Specifies the retry interval. The retry is executed when
the machine fails to get an address book from the
distribution server.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 second/step]
NOTE: When this SP is set to 0, the retry is not
executed.
Specifies the retry times. The retry is executed when the
machine fails to get an address book from the
distribution server.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: When this SP is set to 0, the retry is not
executed.
Specifies the maximum account entries in the
distribution server user information that UCS controls.
[2000 ~ 20000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
Specifies the timeout for searching the LDAP server.
[1 ~ 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Clears the local address book information, including the
user code.
Clears the distribution address book information, except
the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the
user code.
Clears all the address book information, including the
user code.
NOTE: The administrators account information cannot
be cleared with this SP.
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the
service slot.
Deletes only the files that meet same machine category.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
NOTE: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode,
and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the Power
LED stops flashing.
Enables or disables the address book data writing to the
HDD or SD card in plane data.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server
address.
[0 ~ 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for the
address book data.
5-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
847
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Net File Resolution Reduction
1
Rate for Copy Color
Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, color)
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
This resolution reduction is for jobs displayed on a PC
screen with the DeskTopBinder software.
SP 5847 adjustments are only available when the File
Format Converter is installed.
2
Rate for Copy B&W
Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, black &
Text
white, text)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
3
Rate for Copy B&W
Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, black &
Other
white, others)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
4
Rate for Printer Color
Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, color)
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
5-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
847
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Rate for Printer B&W
Rate for Printer B&W

HQ
21
848
Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, black &
white
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, black &
white)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
Selects the net file default quality level (network, JPEG)
[5 ~ 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Network Quality
Default for JPEG
Web Service
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
1
Access Ctrl: Net File
Bit switch settings.
Protocol (Lower 4bits
0000: No access control
only)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and
deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture.
2
Access Ctrl:
Repository (only Lower 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
4bits)
0010: No writing control
3
Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr.
Switches access control on and off.
Print (Lower 4bits)
4
Access Ctrl: uDirectory 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
(Lower 4bits)
5
Access Ctrl: Delivery
Input (Lower 4bits)
7
Access Ctrl: Comm.
Log Fax (Lower 4bits)
9
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl
(Lower 4bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
11
13
B156/B220
Access Ctrl:
Devicemanagement
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl: Device
Ctrl Fax (Lower 4bits)

5-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
848
21
22
41
100
849
Installation Date
1
Display
850
853
856
857
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Access Ctrl: Delivery
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl:
uAdministration (Lower
4bits)
Security Setting
(Lower 4bits only)
Repository: Download
Image Max Size
Specifies the max size of the downloaded image data

when downloading an image data.
[1 ~ 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
Displays the date when the electrical counter was reset

to zero.
Switch to Print
Allows /disallows printing the installation day on the user

counter list.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF (Not printed)
1: ON (Printed)
Address Book Function

Replacement of Circuit
Classifications
Stamp Data Download
Stamp Data Download
Remote ROM Update

Local Port
Replaces all the line type settings in the address book

for fax at the same time. Japan only
Copies the stamp data stored in the ROM to the HDD.

Do this SP to download the fixed stamp data from the
machine ROM onto the hard disk. Then these stamps
can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user
will not have access to the fixed stamps (Confidential,
Urgent, etc.). You must always do this SP after you
replace or format the HDD. Always switch the machine
off and on after you do this SP.
Validates/invalidates the firmware download from the

local port (IEEE 1284) when updating the remote ROM.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
NOTE: This setting is automatically reset to 0 after
rebooting.
NOTE:
Save Debug Log

1
On/Off (1: ON 0: OFF)
Turns the save debug log function on/off.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
857
5
6
9
10
11#
12#
13
14
858
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Save to HDD
Save to SD Card
Copy HDD to SD Card
(Latest 4MB)
Copy HDD to SD Card
(Latest 4MB Any Key)
Erase HDD Debug

Data
Erase SD Card Debug
Data
Free Space on SD
Card
Copy SD to SD (Latest
4MB)
15
Copy SD to SD (Latest
4MB Any Key)
16
17
Make HDD Debug

Make SD Debug
Debug Save When

1
Engine SC Error
(0: OFF 1:ON)
B156/B220
Selects the storage device when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[2 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
Saves the selected key number log to the HDD.
Saves the selected key number log to the SD Card.
Copies the latest 4MB log file on the HDD to the SD
Card. Each file is automatically given a unique name.
Copies the latest 4MB log file of the selected key
number on the HDD to the SD Card. Each file is
automatically given a unique name.
NOTE: If the selected number is not on the HDD, this
SP has no effect.
Deletes the debug log file on the HDD.
Deletes the debug log file on the SD Card (this file is
copied when the conditions set with SP5-858 are
satisfied).
NOTE: The debug log files, which are copied with
SP5-857-10, cannot be deleted with this SP.
NOTE:
Displays the free space on the SD Card.
Copies the latest 4MB log file on the SD Card to another
SD Card. Each file is automatically given a unique
name.
Copies the latest 4MB log file of the selected key
number on the SD Card to another SD Card. Each file is
automatically given a unique name.
NOTE: If the selected number is not on the HDD, this
SP has no effect.
NOTE:
Makes a debug log file.
This function is automatically executed without this SP
when saving a debug log file to the HDD or SD Card at
the very first time. However, it takes a long time to save
it. In that case, the user may turn off the main power
before completing the saving. To prevent failing to save
it, this SP is useful.
Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
SP5-857-2 when an engine SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
858
859
860
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Controller SC Error
(0: OFF 1:ON)
Any SC Error
Jam (0: OFF 1: ON)
Debug Save Key No.

1
Key 1
2
Key 2
3
Key 3
4
Key 4
5
Key 5
6
Key 6
7
Key 7
8
Key 8
9
Key 9
10 Key 10
SMTP/ POP3/ IMAP4
20 Partial Mail Receive
Timeout
21
MDN Response
RFC2298 Compliance
22
SMTP Auth. From

Field Replacement
25
SMTP Auth. Direct

Setting
SP5857-2 when a controller SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Saves the debug log to the device set with SP5-857-2
when the SC that you have set occurs.
SP5857-2 when a paper jam occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Sets the key number of a specific event ( NOTE)

whose logs are saved in the specified storage location
( NOTE). When multiple key numbers are assigned,
the logs are collected in this order: Key 1, Key 2, ..., Key
9, Key 10.
[0000000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
NOTE: The event is set with SP5-858. The storage
location is set with SP5-857-2.
Specifies the amount of the time to keep a received mail

that is divided into more than one mail.
[1 ~ 168 / 72 / 1 hour /step]
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of
the mail is not received during this prescribed time.
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched
on for MDN reply mail.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: No
1: Yes
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header
is switched to the validated account after the SMTP
server is validated.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No. FROM item not switched.
1: Yes. FROM item switched.
Selects the authentication method for SMTP.
Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 ~ 7: Not used
NOTE: This SP is activated only when the SMTP
Authentication (UP) is set to "on".
5-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
866
870
871
873
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
E-mail Alert
Not Used
1
Notice function of EMail
5
Add Date Field
Common Key Info Writing
1
Writing
3
Initialize
HDD function disable
1
HDD function disable
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SD Card Appli Move

1
Move Exec
2
875
876
886
Rev. 10/2005
Undo Exec
SC Auto Reboot
SC Auto Reboot
Turn the E-mail notice function on/off.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Writes the common key information of the device
authentication for NRS specifications to the flash ROM
etc.
Initialize the common key information. DFU
Turns the HDD disable function on/off.
This function must be activated when the data overwrite
security unit is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON (HDD function limited)
Copies the application programs from the original SD
card in the SD card slot 3 to an SD card in the SD card
slot 1.
Copies back the application programs from an SD card
in SD Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in the SD card
slot 3. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
Determines whether the machine reboots automatically
when an SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step]]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A, B, or C SC codes.
Security Clear
1
All Clear.
11 Clear NCS Security Setting
15 Clear UCS Security Setting
ROM Update
1
Allows access to the ROM by the Remote Firmware Update function
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step] (0: Yes, 1: No)
B156/B220
5-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
907
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Plug & Play Maker/ Model Name
Plug & Play Maker/
[0 ~ 11 / 0 / - ]
Model Name
Select the required setting from the menu.
MF
Model Name
0
RICOH
Aficio 3224C
1
RICOH
Aficio 3232C
2
SAVIN
C2410
3
SAVIN
C3210e
4
Gestetner DSc424
5
GestetnerDSc432
6
NRG
DSc424
7
NRG
DSc432
8
infotec
ISC1024c
9
infotecISC1032c
10 LANIER
LD124c
11LANIERLD132c
913
Unit PM Alert
Unit PM Alert
Switchover Permission Time

2
Print Application Timer
102
955
SM
Print Application Set
Test Pattern
1
Pattern
2
967
Display or does not display the unit PM alert for PCU

and development units when the PM counters for the
PCU and development units reach the PM cycle.
[0 ~ 1 / 0/ 1 /step]
0: Does not display the alert banner
1: Display the alert banner
Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is

in standby mode (and the operation panel keys have not
been used) before another application can gain control
of the display.
[3 ~ 30 / 3 / 1 minute/step]
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] DFU
Selects the test pattern. See section 5-1-3.
Density
Selects the image density for a test pattern.

[0 ~ 255 / 255 / 1 /step]
Copy Server: Set Function

(0: ON 1: OFF)
Enables and disables the document server. This is a

security measure that prevents image data from being
left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing
this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on
to enable the new setting.
5-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
912
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
974
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Cherry Server
Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application
program, Light or Full (Professional), is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
985
Device Setting
1
On Board NIC
990*
996
Enables/disables the On-Board Ethernet NIB.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: disable
1: enable
On Board USB
Enables/disables the On Board USB.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: disable
1: enable
SP Print Mode
1
All (Data List)
2
SP (Mode Data List)
3
User Program
4
Logging Data
5
Diagnostic Report
6
Non-Default
7
NIB Summary
(Configuration page,
system log page
NVRAM log page)
8
Capture Log
21 Copier User Program
(Copy Management
Report)
22 Scanner SP
23 Scanner User Program
(Scanner Management
Report)
Density Adjustment
1
Bk
2
Y
3
M
4
C
B156/B220
[0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step]

Prints SP setting data.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step]
SP all print: All items printed out with SP5-990-2, 3, 4,
6, and 7.
All: All SP mode settings
Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
from the defaults
[0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step]

Prints SP setting data.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step]
SP all print: All items printed out with SP5-990-2, 3, 4,
6, and 7.
All: All SP mode settings
Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
from the defaults
Adjusts the density.
[3 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
3: Image becomes lighter
3: Image becomes darker
This setting changes the development bias and charge
corona voltage to adjust the image density.
5-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals)
006*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ADF Adjustment
1
S-to-S Registration
2
3
007
008
SM
Leading Edge
Registration
Trailing Edge Erase
S-to-S Registration
(Rear)
Sub-san Magnification
Orig. Buckling
Buckle Adjustment
DF Input Check
1
Original Set
2
Original Width 1
3
Original Width 2
4
Original Length 1
5
Original Length 2
6
Orig. Trailing Edge
7
Cover Open
8
DF Position
9
Registration
10 Original Exit
11 Original Reverse
DF Output Check
1
Feed Motor (Forward)
2
Feed Motor (Reverse)
3
Trans. Motor
(Forward)
4
Feed Clutch
5
Pick-up Solenoid
6
Junction Gate
Solenoid
7
Stamp Solenoid
Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
First adjust the copier registration. Then if ADF
registration is incorrect, adjust this SP.
Adjusts the sub-scan registration of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the trail edge erase of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the rear-side side-to-side registration of the
optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
First adjust the copier registration. Then if ADF
registration is incorrect, adjust this SP.
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
Enables/disables original buckling during rear side
scanning. Disable if the customer is scanning fragile
originals.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Adjusts original buckling for rear side scanning.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches
of the ARDF.
See section 5.1.4
Do not check another item before the result is returned.
Switches on each electrical component of the ARDF for

testing.
See section 5.1.5
Do not start to check another item before ending the test
that is in progress.
5-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6
009
010
050
117
118
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ADF Free Run
ADF Free Run
ADF Stamp Position

ADF Stamp Position
Staple Position
Staple Position
Executes an ADF free run.

[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: End
1: Start
Adjusts the stamp position of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the staple position of the optional finisher.
[3.5 3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm/step]
Finisher Input Check

1
Entrance
2
Tray Exit
4
Staple Entrance
5
Stapler Home Position
6
Jogger Fence Home
Position
8
Feed-out Belt Home
Position
9
Stapler Tray Paper
10 Stapler Rotation Home
Position
11 Staple
14 Staple Sheet
17 Exit Plate Home
Position
18 Tray Shift Home
Position
21 Stack Height
23 Tray Lower Limit
35 Paper Limit
101 500 Fin Entrance
102 500 Fin Exit
103 500 Fin Jogger Home
Position
104 500 Fin Top Cover
105 500 Fin Height
106 500 Fin Lever
107 500 Fin Upper Limit
108 500 Fin Near Limit
109 500 Fin Staple Cover
110 500 Fin Stapler Home
Position
111 500 Fin Staple End
112 500 Fin Staple
113 500 Fin Stapler Lock
Output Check
1
Fin All Off
2
Upper Transfer Motor
B156/B220

in the finisher.
See section 5.1.4

in the finisher.
See section 5.1.4
Switches on each electrical component of the finisher.

See section 5.1.5
5-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
15
16
18
19
22
23
24
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Switches on each electrical component of the finisher.
See section 5.1.5
Service
Tables
118
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Lower Transfer Motor
Exit Motor
Tray Gate Sol
Tray Lift Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
Staple Hummer
Stapler Gate Sol
Pos. Roller Sol
Feed-out Motor
Shift Motor
Guide Plate Motor
Fin Free Run 1
Fin Free Run 2
500 Fin All Off
500 Fin Main Motor
500 Fin Jogger Motor
500 Fin Paddle Sol
500 Fin Gear Sol
500 Fin Lever Sol
500 Fin Tray Motor
500 Fin Stapler Motor
500 Fin Free Run 1
500 Fin Free Run 2
SM
5-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP7-XXX: (Data Log)
7
001*
106*
401*
403
502*
503
504*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Operation Time
Operation Time
Displays the main motor operation time.

[0000000 9999999 / 0 / 1 minute/step]
Logging this operation time helps identify the cause of a
difficulty by analyzing the correlation between the
printing count and the OPC-belt operation time.
Waste Tnr Cnter (Waste Toner Counter)
1
OPC
Displays the waste toner bottle counters.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
2
Belt
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Total SC Counter
SC Counter
Displays how many times SC codes have been output.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 time/step]
SC History
Displays the latest ten SC codes.
1
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
4
Latest 3
5
Latest 4
6
Latest 5
7
Latest 6
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10 Latest 9
Total Paper Jam Counter
Total Paper Jam
Displays the total number of jams detected.
Counter
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Total Original Jam Counter
Total Original Jam
Displays the total original jam count.
Counter
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Paper Jam Location
1
Initial jam
Displays the number of jams according to the location
where they were detected.
3
main003 (Tray 1: ON)
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
4
main004
(Tray 2: Non Feed)
5
main005
(Tray 3: Non Feed)
6
main006
(Tray 4: Non Feed)
7
main007
(Bypass: Non Feed)
8
main008
(1st Relay ON)
9
main009
(2nd Relay: ON)
10 main010
(3rd Relay: ON)
12 main012 (Registration
from Tray)
B156/B220
5-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
504*
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
23
40
41
58
59
60
61
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
73
80
100
101
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
main013 (Registration
from Duplex)
main014 (Duplex Exit)
main015
(Interchange Exit: ON)
main016
(Paper Exit: On)
main017
(Bridge Exit: On)
main018
(Bridge Relay: On)
main019 (Duplex
Entrance 1: On)
main020 (Duplex
Entrance 2: On)
main023
(Duplex Exit: On)
Finisher040 (Finisher
Entrance: On)
Finisher041
(Finisher Exit: On)
main058
(1st Relay: Off)
main059
(2nd Relay: Off)
main060
(3rd Relay: Off)
main061
(4th Relay: Off)
main063
(Registration: Off)
main064 (Fusing Exit)
main065
(Interchange Exit: Off)
main066
(Paper Exit: Off)
main067
(Bridge Exit: Off)
main068
(Bridge Relay: Off)
main069 (Duplex
Entrance 1: Off)
main070 (Duplex
Entrance 2: Off)
main073
(Duplex Exit: Off)
Wrap around ITB
Finisher100 (Finisher
Entrance: Off)
Finisher 101
(Finisher Exit: Off)
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Service
Tables
5-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
504*
505
506*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
103 main103 (Finisher
Staple)
Stack Feed-out)
Paper Taking out)
Drive Error)
Tray Lift Error)
Jogger Error)
Tray Shift Error)
Stapler Error)
Stack Feed-out)
Feed out Error)
115 main115 (Finisher No
Response)
Original Jam Detection
1
Initial jam
5
Regist Sensor005
6
Exit 006
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Exit = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9)
Inverter Sensor 007
Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10)
55
56
Regist Sensor 055

Exit 056
Exit = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9)
57
Inverter Sensor 057
Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10)
Jam Count by Paper Size

5
A4 LEF
6
A5 LEF
14 B5 LEF
38 LT LEF
44 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
B156/B220
Displays the number of jams according to paper size.

[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the number of jams according to paper size.

[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
5-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
507*
508
801
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Plotter Jam History
1
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
4
Latest 3
5
Latest 4
6
Latest 5
7
Latest 6
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10 Latest 9
Original Jam History
1
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
4
Latest 3
5
Latest 4
6
Latest 5
7
Latest 6
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10 Latest 9
ROM No./ Firmware Version
Displays the latest 10 paper jams.
The information contains the following four lines:
Location code ( SP7-504)
Paper size
Total counter (as of the jam)
Date
Displays the logs of the latest 10 original jams.

The logs are composed of the following four lines:
Location code ( SP7-505)
Paper size
Total counter (as of the jam)
Date
803*
PM Counter Display
1
Paper
2
PCU
3
Development: M
4
Development: C
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
SM
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current

unit.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
For clearing the counters, see SP7-804.
Development: Y
Development: Bk
Fusing Unit
Charger
Waste Tnr: OPC
Waste Tnr: Belt
Oil
Filter 1
Filter 2
Bank 1 Feed
Bank 2 Feed
Bank 3 Feed
Bank 4 Feed
Manual Feed
Paper Transfer unit
ADF
PCU: Rotation Time
(9045 mm = 120kD)
5-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
Displays the firmware versions and part numbers if

available.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
804
807
826
827
832*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
PM Counter Reset
1
Paper
2
PCU
3
Development: M
4
Development: C
5
Development: Y
6
Development: Bk
7
Fusing Unit
8
Charger
9
Waste Tnr: OPC
10 Waste Tnr: Belt
11 Oil
12 Filter 1
13 Filter 2
14 Tray 1 Roller
15 Tray 2 Roller
16 Tray 3 Roller
17 Tray 4 Roller
18 By-pass Feed
19 Paper Transfer Unit
20 ADF
100 All
SC Jam Counter Reset
SC Jam Counter
Reset
Clears the PM counters.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
For displaying the counter, see SP7-803.
7-804-2 resets 7-803-2 and 7-803-21.
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper

jams.
MF Error Counter
1
Error Total
2
Error Staple
Displays the MF error counters.
MF Error Counter Clear

MF Error Counter
Clear
Clears the MF error counter.
Self-Diagnose Result Display

Self-Diagnose Result
Display
B156/B220
Displays the result of the diagnostics. Refer to section

4.2 for the error codes.
5-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
833
834
835
836
850
852
901
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Coverage
1
Last: M
2
Last: C
3
Last: Y
4
Last: Bk
5
Average: M
6
Average: C
7
Average: Y
8
Average: Bk
Displays coverage ratios.

[0.00 ~ 100.0 / 0.00 / 0.01 %step]
This SP mode displays the coverage ratio of the
output, i.e. the ratio of the total pixel area of the
image data to the total printable area on the paper.
Do not use this counter for billing purposes. This is
because this value is not directly proportional to the
amount of toner consumed, although of course
it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major
factors involved include: the type, total image
area and image density of the original, toner
concentration and developer potential.
Last: This is the coverage for the previous sheet.
Average: This is the average coverage for each sheet.
Tnr Consume (Toner Consume)

5
M
Displays the coverage ratios, including toner
revitalization mode.
6
C
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
7
Y
This displays the average coverage ratio, including toner
8
Bk
consumed during printing and toner consumed during
toner revitalization mode (SP3-971).
Do not use this counter for billing purposes.
ACC Counter
1
Copy ACC
Displays the number of times ACC has been done for
each mode.
2
Printer ACC
[0 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Total Memory Size
Total Memory Size
Displays the memory capacity.
High Duty Cnt (High Duty Counter)

1
M
Used for the toner revitalization process (SP3-971).
Counts the number of developments made during the
2
C
past 12 hours.
3
Y
4
Bk
DF Glass Dust Chk Cnt (DF Glass Dust Check Counter)
DF Glass Dust Chk
Displays the number of times that dust was detected on
Cnt
the DF glass.
Assert Info. (Assert Information)

1
File Name
Records the location where the last problem (SC990)
was detected in the program. The data stored in this SP
2
Number of Lines
is used for problem analysis.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
3
SM
Location
5-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
904
906*
907
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Waste Tnr Full Cln (Waste Toner Full Clear)
Clears the waste toner bottle full counters.
1
OPC
2
Belt
100 All
PM Counter-PREV
Displays the previous PM counters.
1
PCU
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 /step]
2
Development: M
3
Development: C
4
Development: Y
5
Development: Bk
6
Fusing Unit
7
Charger
8
Waste Tnr: OPC
9
Waste Tnr: Belt
10 Oil
11 Filter 1
12 Filter 2
13 Tray 1 Roller
14 Tray 2 Roller
15 Tray 3 Roller
16 Tray 4 Roller
17 By-pass Feed
19 ADF
20 PCU: Turn Time
Replace Cnter (Replace Counter)
Displays the number of times the unit was replaced.
1
PCU
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
2
Development: M
3
Development: C
4
Development: Y
5
Development: Bk
6
Fusing Unit
7
Charger
8
Waste Tnr: OPC
9
Waste Tnr: Belt
10 Oil
11 Filter 1
12 Filter 2
13 Tray 1 Roller
14 Tray 2 Roller
15 Tray 3 Roller
16 Tray 4 Roller
17 By-pass Feed
19 Toner: M
20 Toner: C
21 Toner: Y
22 Toner: Bk
23 ADF
B156/B220
5-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
908
909
913
914
915
920
921
922
923
924
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Proc Cont Cnter (Process Control Counter)
Proc Cont Cnter
Displays the process control counter.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Proc Cont Reset (Process Control Reset)
Proc Cont Reset
Resets the process control counter.
Oil Cnter (Oil Counter)
Oil Cnter
Displays the oil supply unit counter.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Oil Cln Cnt Rst (Oil Clean Counter Reset)
Oil Cln Cnt Rst
Resets the oil cleaner counter.
Proc Error Log (Process Error Log)
Displays the latest three process control error logs.
1
Log 1
The following are the error codes:
2
Log 2
Development unit initial settings errors:
3
Log 3
110: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor
116: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor
118: No black image
Development bias settings errors:
113: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor
114: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor
115: Incorrect image detected by yellow ID sensor
123: Incorrect image detected by black ID sensor
ID sensor errors:
103: ID sensor error
104: ID sensor unable to detect image
105: OPC belt not detected
Machine Counter
Machine Counter
[0 ~ 0xFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 /step]
Machine Cnt Clr (Machine Counter Clear)
Machine Cnt Clr
Clears the machine counter.
Toner End Cnter (Toner End Counter)
1
K Toner
Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the
possible print count after a toner near end.
2
C Toner
3
M Toner
4
Y Toner
Toner End Cnt Clr (Toner End Counter Clear)
Clears the toner end counter (SP7-922).
1
K Toner
2
C Toner
The machine goes back to the normal operation mode if
3
M Toner
the toner end counter is cleared.
4
Y Toner
100 All
Charger Cln Cntr (Charger Clean Counter)
Charger Cln Cntr
Displays how many times the charge corona wire has
been cleaned.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
SP7-926 resets the counter.
5-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
925
926
927
928
929
931
934
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Time Cnter Disp (Time Counter Display)
Time Cnter Disp
Displays the current counter of the charge corona unit
cleaning interval. (Number of counts since the last
cleaning)
SP2-801 specifies the charge corona unit cleaning
interval.
Chgr Cln Cnt Rst (Charger Cleaner Counter Reset)
Chgr Cln Cnt Rst
Resets the charge wire cleaner counter (SP7-924).
Time Cnter Clr (Timer Counter Clear)
Time Cnter Clr
Clears the counter of the charge corona unit cleaning
interval.
SP7-927 clears the counter displayed by SP7-925, but
does not clear the value specified with SP2-801.
PREV PM Cnt Clr (Previous PM Counter Clear)
PREV PM Cnt Clr
Clears the previous PM counter (SP7-906).
Replace Cnter Clr (Replace Counter Clear)
Replace Cnter Clr
Clears the replace counter.
Engine Status Display DFU
1
Status 1
These SPs are used for previous models.
2
Status 2
3
Status 3
4
Status 4
5
Status 5
6
Status 6
7
Status 7
8
Status 8
9
Status 9
10 Status 10
11 Status 11
12 Status 12
13 Status 13
14 Status 14
15 Status 15
16 Status 16
17 Status 17
Coverage Cler (Coverage Clear)
1
Average
Clears the average coverage.
This SP clears the following SPs:
SP8-831-1 to 4
SP8-841-1 to 4
2
Toner
Clears the consumed toner bottle number.
This SP clears the following SP:
SP8-781-1 to 4
3
S: PREV Toner
Clears the number of prints copied or printed with last
toner bottle.
SP8-891-1 to4
SP8-901-1 to 4
SP8-911-1 to 4
B156/B220
5-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
934
ALL
Clears the number of scanned sheets for each coverage
range.
SP8-851-001004 (0 ~ 10%)
SP8-861-001004 (11 ~ 20%)
SP8-871-001004 (21 ~ 30%)
SP8-881-001004 (31% ~ )
Clears the all coverage related data.
This SP clears SPs that can be cleared in the SP7-9341 to 4.
Service
Tables
255
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
S: Coverage 0-100
SM
5-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers
SP8 211~SP8 216
SP8 401~SP8 406
SP8 691~SP8 696
What They Do
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
The number of pages printed from the document server
The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
Prefixes
T:
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
F:
P:
S:
L:
Copy application.
Fax application.
Print application.
Scan application.
Local storage
(document server)
O:
Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)
B156/B220
What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.).
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
(Software Development Kit) will also be counted
with this group in the future.
5-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of

displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Abbreviation
/
>
AddBook
Apl
B/W
Bk
C
ColCr
ColMode
Comb
Comp
Deliv
DesApl
Dev Counter
Dup, Duplex
Emul
FC
FIN
Full Bleed
GenCopy
GPC
IFax
ImgEdt
K
LS
LSize
Mag
MC
NRS
Org
OrgJam
Palm 2
PC
SM
What it means
By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
Address Book
Application
Black & White
Black
Cyan
Color Create
Color Mode
Combine
Compression
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emulation
Full Color
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
No Margins
Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
Large (paper) Size
Magnification
One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Original for scanning
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
Personal Computer
5-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
Key for Abbreviations
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Abbreviation
PGS
PJob
Ppr
PrtJam
PrtPGS
R
Rez
SC
Scn
Sim, Simplex
S-to-Email
SMC
Svr
TonEnd
TonSave
TXJob
YMC
YMCK
What it means
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
Print Jobs
Paper
Printer (plotter) Jam
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Resolution
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scan
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Server
Toner End
Toner Save
Send, Transmission
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5-801-1 Memory All Clear.
B156/B220
5-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mode No.(Class 1, 2, and 3)
T:Total Jobs
C:Total Jobs
F:Total Jobs
P:Total Jobs
S:Total Jobs
L:Total Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of times each

application is used to do a job.
[0 ~ 9999999/ 0 / 1]
NOTE: The L: counter is the total number of
times the other applications are used to
send a job to the document server, plus
the number of times a file already on
the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
SM
5-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
T:Jobs/LS
C:Jobs/LS
F:Jobs/LS
P:Jobs/LS
S:Jobs/LS
L:Jobs/LS
O:Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to

the document server by each application, to
reveal how local storage is being used for input.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
T:Pjob/LS
C:Pjob/LS
F:Pjob/LS
P:Pjob/LS
S:Pjob/LS
L:Pjob/LS
O:Pjob/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal how files printed from the

document server were stored on the document
server originally.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B156/B220
5-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 031
8 032
8 033
8 034
8 035
8 036
8 037
T:Pjob/DesApl
C:Pjob/DesApl
F:Pjob/DesApl
P:Pjob/DesApl
S:Pjob/DesApl
L:Pjob/DesApl
O:Pjob/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal what applications were used

to output documents from the document server.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printed from within the document server mode
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
T:TX Jobs/LS
C:TX Jobs/LS
F:TX Jobs/LS
P:TX Jobs/LS
S:TX Jobs/LS
L:TX Jobs/LS
O:TX Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the applications that stored

files on the document server that were later
accessed for transmission over the telephone
line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
NOTE: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
scanned from within the document server mode
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051
8 052
8 053
8 054
8 055
8 056
8 057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
F:TX Jobs/DesApl
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the applications used to send

files from the document server over the
telephone line or over a network (attached to an
e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
SM
5-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 041
8 042
8 043
8 044
8 045
8 046
8 047
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 061
T:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8 062
C:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8 063
F:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8 064
8 065
8 066
8 067
S:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8 06x 1
Sort
8 06x 2
8 06x 3
8 06x 4
Stack
Staple
Booklet
8 06x 5
Z-Fold
8 06x 6
Punch
8 06x 7
Other
B156/B220
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is

set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
Reserved. Not used.
5-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 071
8 072
8 073
8 074
8 075
8 076
8 077
8 07x 1
8 07x 2
8 07x 3
8 07x 4
8 07x 5
8 07x 6
8 07x 7
T:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
S:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
1 Page
8 07x 8
21~50 Pages
2 Pages
8 07x 9
51~100 Pages
3 Pages
8 07x 10
101~300 Pages
4 Pages
8 07x 11
301~500 Pages
5 Pages
8 07x 12
501~700 Pages
6~10 Pages
8 07x 13
701~1000 Pages
11~20 Pages
8 07x 14
1001~ Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8-076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP8-073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP8-072) and scan jobs (SP8-075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP8-072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
SM
5-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 111
8 113
8 11x 1
8 11x 2
T:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax directly on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
B/W
Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.

This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when
the job started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a
destination where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax
counter (8 12x) also increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
8 121
T:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
NOTE: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 123
F:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
NOTE: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
B156/B220
5-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 131
T:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8 135
S:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
8 141
8 145
8 14x 1
8 14x 2
8 13x 3
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
and sent to a Scan Router server.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
B/W
Color
ACS

The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a Color job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
SM
5-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables

If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 151
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
NOTE: At the present time, SP8 -151 and 8-155 perform identical counts.
8 155
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8 161
8 163
T:PCFAX TX Jobs
F:PCFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of PC Fax

transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
NOTE: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 191
8 192
8 193
8 195
8 196
T:Total Scan PGS

C:Total Scan PGS
F:Total Scan PGS
S:Total Scan PGS
L:Total Scan PGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan
images.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SP8-191 to 8-196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
B156/B220
5-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8 205
8 211
8 212
8 213
8 215
8 216
T:LSize Scan PGS

*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
NOTE: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
NOTE: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
T:Scan PGS/LS
C:Scan PGS/LS
F:Scan PGS/LS
S:Scan PGS/LS
L:Scan PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

into the document server.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SM
5-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 201
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 221
8 221 1
8 221 2
ADF Org Feeds

*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
8 231
8 231 1
8 231 2
8 231 3
8 231 4
8 231 5
Scan PGS/Mode
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Mixed Size
Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation
panel.
Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
B156/B220
5-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
T:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8 242
C:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8 243
F:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8 245
S:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8 246
L:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241
8 242
8 243
8 245
8 246
8 24x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8 24x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 8: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8 24x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8 24x 10: Color
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8 24x 11: Other
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
SM
5-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 241
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 251
8 252
8 254
8 256
8 257
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times Image Edit

features have been selected at the operation
panel for each application. Some examples of
these editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261
T:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 262
C:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 266
L:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase
8 26x 3 Background
8 26x 4 Other
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times color creation
features have been selected at the operation
panel.
8 281
8 285
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
NOTE: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291
8 293
8 295
8 296
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
S:Scan PGS/Stamp
L:Scan PGS/Stamp
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages stamped

with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
B156/B220
5-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 301
8 302
8 303
8 305
8 306
8 30x 1
8 30x 2
8 30x 3
8 30x 4
8 30x 5
8 30x 6
8 30x 7
8 30x 8
8 30x 9
8 30x 10
8 30x 254
8 30x 255
SM
T:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP8-446].
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
5-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 311
8 315
8 31x 1
8 31x 2
8 31x 3
8 31x 4
8 31x 5
T:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
NOTE: At the present time, SP8-311 and 8-315 perform identical counts.
1200dpi ~
600dpi~1199dpi
400dpi~599dpi
200dpi~399dpi
~199dpi
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
B156/B220
5-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
T:Total PrtPGS
C:Total PrtPGS
F:Total PrtPGS
P:Total PrtPGS
S:Total PrtPGS
L:Total PrtPGS
O:Total PrtPGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed

by the customer. The counter for the application
used for storing the pages increments.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5-104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
8 391
8 401
8 402
8 403
8 404
8 405
8 406
LSize PrtPGS
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
NOTE: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
T:PrtPGS/LS
C:PrtPGS/LS
F:PrtPGS/LS
P:PrtPGS/LS
S:PrtPGS/LS
L:PrtPGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL

from the document server. The counter for the
application used to print the pages is
incremented.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
SM
5-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 381
8 382
8 383
8 384
8 385
8 386
8 387
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 411
Prints/Duplex
8 421
8 422
8 423
8 424
8 425
8 426
8 427
8 42x 1
8 42x 2
8 42x 3
8 42x 4
8 42x 5
8 42x 6
8 42x 7
8 42x 8
8 42x 9
8 42x 10
8 42x 11
8 42x 12
8 42x 13
*CTL
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
Simplex> Duplex
Duplex> Duplex
Book> Duplex
Simplex Combine
Duplex Combine
2>
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
4>
6>
8>
9>
16>
Booklet
Magazine
These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
B156/B220
5-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 431
8 432
8 434
8 436
8 437
8 43x 1
8 43x 2
8 43x 3
SM
Magazine
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
5-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
Booklet
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
4
8
4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 441
8 442
8 443
8 444
8 445
8 446
8 447
8 44x 1
8 44x 2
8 44x 3
8 44x 4
8 44x 5
8 44x 6
8 44x 7
8 44x 8
8 44x 9
8 44x 10
8 44x
254
8 44x
255
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
B156/B220
5-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 451 1
8 451 2
8 451 3
8 451 4
8 451 5
8 451 6
8 451 7
8 451 8
8 451 9
8 451 10
8 461
8 462
8 463
8 464
8 466
8 46x 1
8 46x 2
8 46x 3
8 46x 4
8 46x 5
8 46x 6
8 46x 7
8 46x 8
SM
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Copier
Tray 2
Copier
Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 4
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 5
LCT (Option)
Tray 6
Currently not used.
Tray 7
Currently not used.
Tray 8
Currently not used.
Tray 9
Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
Normal
Recycled
Special
Thick
Normal (Back)
Thick (Back)
OHP
Other
5-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 451
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 471
8 471 1
8 471 2
8 471 3
8 471 4
8 471 5
PrtPGS/Mag
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
~49%
50%~99%
100%
101%~200%
201% ~
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8 481
8 484
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
NOTE: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491
8 492
8 493
8 496
8 49x 1
8 49x 2
8 49x 3
8 49x 4
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
C:PrtPGS/Col Mode
F:PrtPGS/Col Mode
L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL

in the Color Mode by each application.
8 501
8 504
8 50x 1
8 50x 2
8 50x 3
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
P:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL

in the Color Mode by the print application.
B156/B220
5-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 511
8 514
8 514 1
8 514 2
8 514 3
8 514 4
8 514 5
8 514 6
8 514 7
8 514 8
8 514 9
8 514 10
8 514 11
8 514 12
8 514 13
8 514 14
T:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
RPCS
RPDL
PS3
R98
R16
GL/GL2
R55
RTIFF
PDF
PCL5e/5c
PCL XL
IPDL-C
BM-Links
Japan Only
Other
Service
Tables
SP8-511 and SP8-514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM
5-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 521
8 522
8 523
8 524
8 525
8 526
8 52x 1
8 52x 2
8 52x 3
8 52x 4
8 52x 5
8 52x 6
8 52x 7
T:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
Sort
Stack
Staple
Booklet
Z-Fold
Punch
Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8 531
B156/B220
Staples
*CTL
This SP counts the amount of staples used

by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 581 1
8 581 2
8 581 3
8 581 4
8 581 5
8 581 6
8 581 7
8 581 8
8 581 9
8 581 10
8 581 11
8 581 12
8 581 13
8 581 14
8 581 15
8 581 16
8 582
8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 3
8 582 4
T:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Total
Total: Full Color
B&W/Single Color
Development: CMY
Development: K
Copy: Color
Copy: B/W
Print: Color
Print: B/W
Total: Color
Total: B/W
Full Colour: A3
Full Colour: B4 JIS or Smaller
Full Colour Print
Mono Colour Print
Full Colour GPC
C:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
8 583
F:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color
8 584
P:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Single Color
8 584 3 Full Color
SM
5-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 581
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 586
8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 3
8 582 4
8 591
8 591 1
8 591 2
8 591 3
8 631
8 633
8 63x 1
8 63x 2
L:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
O:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
A3/DLT
Duplex
Staple
T:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
B/W
Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8-631 and SP8-633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B156/B220
5-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 641
T:IFAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 643
F:IFAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
8 651
8 655
8 65x 1
8 65x 2
T:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for the Scan application only.
B/W
Color
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
SM
5-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8-641 and SP8-643 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 661
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8 665
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
8 671
T:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8 675
S:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scanto-PC with the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
B156/B220
5-94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 681
8 683
T:PCFAX TXPGS
F:PCFAX TXPGS
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC

Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
T:TX PGS/LS
C:TX PGS/LS
F:TX PGS/LS
P:TX PGS/LS
S:TX PGS/LS
L:TX PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent from

the document server. The counter for the
application that was used to store the pages is
incremented.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8 701
8 701 1
8 701 2
8 701 3
8 701 4
8 701 5
8 711
8 711 1
8 711 2
8 711 3
8 711 4
SM
TX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3, G4)
Network
T: Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of total pages compressed by each
compression method.
JPEG/ JPEG2000
TIFF (Multi/ Single)
PDF
Other
5-95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 691
8 692
8 693
8 694
8 695
8 696
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 715
8 715 1
8 715 2
8 715 3
8 715 4
8 741
8 741 1
8 741 2
8 741 3
8 741 4
8 741 5
8 771
8 771 1
8 771 2
8 771 3
8 771 4
8 771 5
8 781
8 781 1
8 781 2
8 781 3
8 781 4
8 791
B156/B220
S: Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages for the scanner compressed by each
compression method.
JPEG/ JPEG2000
TIFF (Multi/ Single)
PDF
Other
RX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
Dev Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Total
K
Y
M
C
No. of Toner
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8781-001 through -004 are the same.
K
The number of black-toner bottle
Y
The number of yellow-toner bottle
M
The number of magenta-toner bottle
C
The number of cyan-toner bottle
LS Memory Remain
*CTL
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
5-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 801 1
8 801 2
8 801 3
8 801 4
8 831
8 831 1
8 831 2
8 831 3
8 831 4
8 841
8 841 1
8 841 2
8 841 3
8 841 4
8 851
8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4
8 861
8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4
8 871
8 871 1
8 871 2
8 871 3
SM
Toner Remain
*CTL
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
NOTE: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)
is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
K
Y
M
C
Coverage Average
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the average coverage by color. ( SP7-833)
K
Y
M
C
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
Coverage Newest
Page
These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP7-833)
K
Y
M
C
Coverage: 0-10%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 11-20%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 21-30%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
5-97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 801
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 871 4
8 881
8 881 1
8 881 2
8 881 3
8 881 4
8 891
8 891 1
8 891 2
8 891 3
8 891 4
8 901
8 901 1
8 901 2
8 901 3
8 901 4
8 911
8 911 1
8 911 2
8 911 3
8 911 4
B156/B220
S: C
Coverage: 31%*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
each color is 31% or higher.
K
Y
M
C
Page/Toner Bottle
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
K
Y
M
C
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
Prev 1
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
K
Y
M
C
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
Prev 2
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
K
Y
M
C
5-98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 941 1
8 941 2
8 941 3
8 941 4
8 941 5
8 941 6
8 941 7
8 941 8
8 941 9
8 951
8 951 1
8 951 2
8 951 3
8 951 4
8 951 5
8 951 6
8 951 7
8 951 8
8 951 9
8 951 10
SM
Machine Status
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
Down Time/SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
Down Time/PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
AddBook Register
*CTL
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code
User code registrations.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
Group
Group destination registrations.
Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
F-Code
F-Code box registrations.
Copy Program
[0~255 / 0 / 255]
Copy application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Fax Program
Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Printer Program
Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner
Scanner application registrations
Program
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
5-99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 941
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1)

1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-955-1.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See
the tables below.)
3. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.)
4. Press Start to start the test print.
5. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
Test Pattern
None
No.
23
Vertical Line (1-dot)

Horizontal Line (1-dot)
Vertical Line (2-dot)
Horizontal Line (2 dot)
1 dot Grid Pattern0 1
1 dot pair Grid Pattern 1
Alternating Dot Pattern (1 dot)
Full Dot Pattern
Black band
Trimming Area (1 dot)
Trimming Area (2 dot)
Argyle Pattern (1 dot)
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
35
36
38
39
40
41
Argyle Pattern (2 dot)

Horizontal Cross Stitch
Checker Flag
1 dot Horizontal Line
(Reverse order of LD1/2 on)
1 dot Grid Pattern
1 dot pair Grid Pattern
43
50
51
52
53
54
Test Pattern
1 dot Grid Pattern
3 lines Grayscale
Horizontal Grayscale 1
Vertical Grayscale 1
Horizontal Grayscale 2
Vertical Grayscale 2
Horizontal Grayscale (600 dpi)
Vertical Grayscale (600 dpi)
Horizontal Grayscale with White Line 1
Vertical Grayscale with White Line 1
Horizontal Grayscale with White Line 2
Vertical Grayscale with White Line 2
Horizontal Grayscale with White Line
(600 dpi)
Vertical Grayscale with White Line
(600 dpi)
Blank image
Vertical Cross Stitch
2 beam
Trimming Area with Crossed Lines
1 dot Grid Pattern 2
1 dot pair Grid Pattern 2
After finishing your tests, reset SP 5-955-1 to 0.
B156/B220
5-100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-803.
2. Select an item that you want to check. A small box will be displayed on the SP
mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit
76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
SM
Reading
Description
Tray 1 Set
Tray 1 Paper End
Tray 1 set (standard tray)

Tray 1 paper end sensor
(standard tray)
Tray 1 paper near-end
sensor (standard tray)
Tray 1 paper size switch
(standard tray)
Tray 2 set (standard tray)
Tray 2 paper end sensor
(standard tray)
Tray 2 paper near-end
sensor (standard tray)
Tray 2 paper size switch
(standard tray)
Tray 1 Paper
Near End
Tray 1 Paper Size
Tray 2 Set
Tray 2 Paper End
Tray 2 Paper
Near End
Tray 2 Paper Size
Registration Sensor
Paper feed sensor 1
Paper feed sensor 2
Right Cover SW
Exit Sensor
Paper Overflow
Exit Cover Switch
Interchange Unit Set
Interchange Exit
By-pass Tray Set
By-pass Paper End
0
Set
Paper End
Not near end
Near end
(See table 1.)

Set
Paper End
Not near end
(Upper relay)
(Lower relay)
By-pass Paper Size

Fusing Unit Set
Fusing Exit
Fusing Oil End
Fusing High
Temperature
Fuser Entrance
Sensor
1
Not set
Paper is
present
Fusing entrance sensor
5-101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Not set
Paper is
present
Near end
(See table 1.)

Detected
Detected
Detected
Closed
Detected
Full
Closed
Set
Detected
Not set
Not detected
Not detected
Not detected
Open
Not detected
Not full
Open
Not set
Not detected
Set
Paper is
Paper End
present
(See table 2.)
Set
Not set
Paper is
Paper End
present
Not End
End
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5-803
-XXX
1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-803
-XXX
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
B156/B220
Reading
Description
PCU-Coil Paper
Check
PPI-Level: Bit 0
Toner End: M
Toner End: C
Toner End: Y
Toner End: K
O/B Waste Toner
Sensor
O/B Waste Toner
Switch
Belt Mark
T/B Waste Toner
Sensor
T/B Waste Toner
Switch
LD 5V Cover
Left Cover
Right Upper Cover
Front Cover
Main Motor Lock
Paper Feed Motor
Lock
Polygon Motor Lock
1 Bin Set
1 Bin Paper Sensor
Dev. Motor 1: Lock
Dev. Motor 2: Lock
PSU-Fan Lock
Fuser-Fan lock
Duplex Connection
Bank 1 Connection
Bank 2 Connection
Finisher Connection
Bridge Exit Sensor
Bridge Relay Sensor
Bridge Set Sensor
Bridge Right Cover
Bridge Left Cover
Bank Upper Relay
Bank Cover 1
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Not end
Not end
Not end
Not end
End
End
End
End
Full
Not full
Set
Not set
Not detected
Detected
Full
Not full
Set
Not set
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Locked
Open
Open
Open
Open
Not locked
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Set
Detected
Not locked
Not set
Not detected
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Locked
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Detected
Detected
Set
Closed
Closed
Not locked
Not locked
Connected
Connected
Connected
Connected
Not detected
Not detected
Not set
Open
Open
No paper
Paper present
No paper
Paper present
Closed
Open
Transfer belt sensor
PPI-Level: Bit 1
Bank Lower Relay
High voltage power

supply unit
High voltage power
supply unit
Toner end sensor: M
Toner end sensor: C
Toner end sensor: Y
Toner end sensor: K
OPC belt waste toner
sensor
OPC belt waste toner
bottle switch
Belt mark sensor
Transfer belt waste toner
sensor
Transfer belt waste toner
bottle switch
Interlock switch
Main motor lock

Paper feed motor lock
Polygon motor lock
Development motor for

black and cyan
Development motor for
yellow and magenta
PSU fan motor lock
Fusing fan motor lock
Duplex unit
1st optional paper tray
2nd optional paper tray
Finisher Connection
Relay Sensor 3 (optional

paper tray unit)
Relay Sensor 4 (optional
paper tray unit)
Right cover (vertical guide
switch)
5-102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Bank Cover 2
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
86
87
88
89
90
91
SM
Reading
Description
Bank Tray 1 Set

Bank Tray 2 Set
Bank Tray 1 Paper
End
Bank Tray 2 Paper
End
Bank Tray 1 Paper
Size
Bank Tray 2 Paper
Size
Bank Tray 1 Paper
Height
Bank Tray 2 Paper
Height
Duplex Entrance
Duplex Exit
Duplex Open
Duplex Cover
Scanner Home
Position
Recycle Counter
Counter Set
Key Counter Set
Shift Tray Home
Position Sensor
Platen Cover Sensor
2nd optional tray: Right

cover (vertical guide
switch)
1st optional tray: Set
2nd optional tray: Set
1st optional tray: Paper
end
2nd optional tray: Paper
end
size
size
height
height
Duplex: Entrance sensor
Duplex: Exit sensor
Duplex unit open switch
Duplex cover sensor
Scanner HP sensor
Closed
Open
Not set
Not set
Set
Set
Not end
End
Not end
End
(See table 3.)
(See table 4.)

Not detected
Detected
Closed
Open
Detected
Not detected
Open
Closed
Detected
Not detected
Set
Set
Set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Mechanical Counter Set
5-103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5-803
-XXX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size

Switch
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
North America
81/2" x 11" SEF
B5 SEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
11" x 17" SEF
A4 SEF
B5 LEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
81/2" x 14" SEF
Europe/Asia
81/2" x 11" SEF
B5 SEF
A5 LEF
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
B5 LEF
A4 LEF
B4 SEF
Value
00001110
00000110
00001010
00000010
00001100
00000100
00001000
00000000
Value
01110000
Paper Width
B5/8"
Value
10010000
00110000
10110000
A5/5.5"
B6
11010000
11000000
Europe/Asia
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
None
None
Detected
None
Code
10000100
10001101
10000101
00000101
00001110
00000110
10100000
10001101
10000101
00100110
00000110
0: pushed
1: not pushed
Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size

Paper Width
A3/11"/12"
B4
A4/8.5"
Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size

Size
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
North America
Detected
None
None
Detected
Detected
None
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End

Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
B156/B220
Paper height sensor 2

ON
OFF
On
OFF
Paper height sensor 1

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
5-104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
11111111
11111110
11111101
11111100
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)

2. Enter the number (1 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s, as shown
below. However, only bit 0 at the right side of the screen is valid.
00000000
Bit
76543210
3. Check the status of bit 0 for the required item listed in the table below.
No.
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Original set sensor

Original width sensor 1 (W1)
Original width sensor 2 (W2)
Original length sensor 1 (L1)
Original length sensor 2 (L2)
Original trailing edge sensor
ADF cover sensor
DF position sensor
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Inverter sensor (Original reverse)
SM
Reading
0
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Cover closed
ADF closed
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
5-105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Cover opened
ADF opened
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
B156/B220
Service
Tables
B156S505.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)

2. Enter the number (1 113) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s, as shown
below. However, only bit ) at the right side of the screen is valid.
00000000
Bit
76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
No.
Description
1
2
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
14
17
18
21
23
35
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
Entrance Sensor
Tray Exit Sensor
Staple Entrance Sensor
Stapler Home Position Sensor
Jogger Fence Home Position Sensor
Feed-out Belt Home Position Sensor
Stapler Tray Paper
Stapler Rotation Home Position
Staple Sensor
Staple Sheet Sensor
Exit Plate Home Position Sensor
Tray Shift Home Position Sensor
Stack Height Sensor
Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Paper Limit
500 Fin Entrance Sensor
500 Fin Exit Sensor
500 Fin Jogger Home Position Sensor
500 Fin Top Cover Sensor
500 Fin Height Sensor
500 Fin Lever Sensor
500 Fin Upper Limit Sensor
500 Fin Near Limit Sensor
500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor
500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor
500 Fin Staple End Sensor
500 Fin Staple Sensor
500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor
B156/B220
Reading
0
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Closed
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Closed
Activated
Activated
Activated
Locked
5-106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Opened
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Opened
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Not Locked
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)

1. Open SP5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Touch ON to test the selected item. Press OFF to end the test.
Service
Tables
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched ON for a long time.
B156S505.WMF
Output Check Table

SP5-804
-XXX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SM
Description
Feed Mot: 89 mm/s
Feed Mot: 120 mm/s
Feed Mot: 178 mm/s
Feed Mot: 240 mm/s
Upper Paper Feed
Clutch
Lower Paper Feed
Clutch
Upper Relay Roller
Clutch
Lower Relay Roller
Clutch
Transfer Motor: Half
Speed
Paper feed motor: 89 mm/s

Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Tray 2 paper feed clutch
Tray 1 vertical transport clutch
Tray 2 vertical transport clutch
Main motor: 178 mm/s
5-107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-804
-XXX
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
B156/B220
Description
Transfer Motor: Low
Speed
Regist Clutch
Interchange Upper
Gate
Interchange Lower
Gate
By-pass Feed Clutch
By-pass Pick-Up
Solenoid
Development Clutch: M
Development Clutch: C
Development Clutch: Y
Development Clutch: K
Lubricant Clutch
Main Motor (Forward)
Main Motor Half Speed
(Forward)
Main Motor (Reverse)
Main Motor Half Speed
(Reverse)
Polygon Motor
LD On
Polygon Motor + LD
Transfer 2nd Solenoid
T/B Cleaning Clutch
T/B Cleaning Solenoid
Engine Ready Signal
ID sensor LED
QL
Toner End Led
Charger Bias
Development Bias 1
Development Bias 2
Belt Transfer
Paper Transfer: +
Paper Transfer:
T/B Cleaning: +
Discharge
Fuser Main Relay
Fusing Bias
Scanner Lamp
Development Motor 1
(Fwd)
Development Motor 1
High Sped (Fwd)
Development Motor 1
(Rev)
Main motor: 89 mm/s

Registration clutch
Interchange Junction Gate Solenoid 1
Interchange Junction Gate Solenoid 2
By-pass paper feed clutch
By-pass pick-up solenoid
Development clutch: M
Development clutch: C
Development clutch: Y
Development clutch: K
OPC belt cleaning clutch
Main motor: Regular Speed
Main motor: Half Speed
Main motor: Reverse
Main motor: Reverse Half Speed
Polygon motor
LD
Polygon Motor + LD
Paper Transfer Solenoid
Image transfer belt cleaning clutch
Image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid
Engine Ready Signal
Quenching Lamp
Toner End LED
Charge corona unit output
Development Bias: 1
Development Bias: 2
Image transfer power supply
Paper transfer bias: +
Paper transfer bias:
Image transfer belt cleaning bias: +
Discharge plate power supply
Fusing Main Relay
Fusing Bias
Development motor for black and cyan (Forward)
Development motor for black and cyan: High Speed
(Forward)
Development motor for black and cyan (Reverse)
5-108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
60
61
62
63
100
101
102
103
110
111
112
120
121
122
123
124
125
130
131
132
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
160
161
162
SM
Description
Development Motor 1
High Speed (Rev)
Development Motor 2
(Fwd)
Development Motor 2
High Sped (Fwd)
Development Motor 2
(Rev)
Development Motor 2
High Speed (Rev)
Bank Upper Feed Cl
Bank Lower Feed Cl
Bank Feed Motor: L
Bank Feed Motor: H
Shift Tray Motor: CW
Shift Tray Motor: CCW
Shift Tray Motor: Run
Duplex Reverse Motor
(Forward)
Duplex Reverse Motor
(Reverse)
Duplex Feed Motor
(Forward)
Duplex Feed Motor
(Reverse)
Duplex Solenoid
Duplex Free Run
Bridge Motor: H
Bridge Motor: L
Bridge Gate Sol
Fusing Fan: H
Fusing Fan: L
Dev Fan: H
Dev. Fan: L
Cooling Fan: H
Cooling Fan: L
Ozone Fan: Hi
Ozone Fan: Low
Scanner Fan: Hi
Scanner Fan: Low
Bridge Cooling Fan: H
Bridge Cooling Fan: L
PSU Fan
Development motor for black and cyan: High Speed

(Reverse)
Development motor for yellow and magenta:
(Forward)
High Speed (Forward)
Development motor for yellow and magenta
(Reverse)
High Speed (Reverse)
1st paper feed clutch (optional paper tray unit)
2nd paper feed clutch (optional paper tray unit)
1st paper feed motor (optional paper tray unit)
1st Paper feed motor half speed (optional paper tray
unit)
Shift Tray Motor continuous clockwise
Shift Tray Motor continuous counter-clockwise
Shift Tray Motor shifts once
Duplex: Inverter motor
Duplex: Inverter motor reverse
Duplex: Transport motor
Duplex: Transport motor reverse
Duplex: Inverter gate solenoid
Duplex: Free run
Service
Tables
SP5-804
-XXX
59
Development Fan Motor: H

Development Fan Motor: L
Controller Fan Motor: H
Controller Fan Motor: L
5-109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008)

1. Open SP6-008.
3. Touch ON to test the selected item. To end the test, touch OFF. You cannot
exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check
currently executing.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Feed Motor (Forward)
Feed Motor (Reverse)
Transport Motor (Forward)
Feed Clutch
Pick-up Solenoid
Junction Gate Solenoid
Stamp Solenoid
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118)

1. Open SP6-118.
3. Touch ON to test the selected item. To end the test, touch OFF. You cannot
exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check
currently executing.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
15
16
18
19
22
23
24
B156/B220
Description
1000-sheet finisher
Fin All Off
Upper Transfer Motor
Lower Transfer Motor
Exit Motor
Tray Gate Sol
Tray Lift Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
Staple Hummer
Stapler Gate Sol
Pos. Roller Sol
Feed-out Motor
Shift Motor
Guide Plate Motor
Fin Free Run 1
Fin Free Run 2
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Description
500-sheet finisher
500 Fin All Off
500 Fin Main Motor
500 Fin Jogger Motor
500 Fin Paddle Sol
500 Fin Gear Sol
500 Fin Lever Sol
500 Fin Tray Motor
500 Fin Stapler Motor
500 Fin Free Run 1
500 Fin Free Run 2
5-110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990)

1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you
wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1
All Data List
2
SP Mode Data List
3
User Program
4
Logging Data
5
Self-Diagnostic Report
6
Non-Default
7
NIB summary
8
Capture Log (Jobs to be printed from the document server using
a PC and the Desk Top Binder software)
21
Copier User Program
22
Scanner SP
23
Scanner User Program
2. Touch EXECUTE on the touch panel

3. Operate according to the instructions on the display.
4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit.
Service
Tables
5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY

Total Count
SP7-503 displays the number of original jams having occurred in the optional
ARDF.
Details on the Most Recent Jams

SP7-508 displays the detailed information on the latest 10 original jams having
occurred in the optional ARDF.
SP7-5081
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
:
:
:
:
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10
Latest 9
SM
Information on the latest original jam

Information on the 2nd latest original jam
Information on the 3rd latest original jam
:
:
Information on the 8th latest original jam
5-111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY

Total Count
SP7-502 displays the number of copy paper jams having occurred in all paper
paths.
Details on the Most Recent Jams

SP7-507 displays the detailed information on the latest 10 copy paper jams having
occurred in all paper paths.
SP7-5071
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
:
:
:
:
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10
Latest 9
B156/B220
Information on the latest paper jam

Information on the 2nd latest paper jam
Information on the 3rd latest paper jam
:
:
Information on the 8th latest paper jam
5-112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801)

Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP8-381 to -387
SP8-391 and -411
SP8-491 to -493 and -496
SP8-581 to -584 and -586
SP5-811
SP5-907
Counter values
Machine serial number
Plug & play brand name and
production name setting
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is necessary only after
replacing the NVRAM, or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is
damaged.
Using an SD card
1. Upload the NVRAM data to an SD card ( 5.4.2 NVRAM Data Upload).
2. Print out all SMC data lists (SP5-990).
NOTE: Be sure to print out all the lists. If the NVRAM data upload is not
completed, it is necessary to manually change the SP mode settings.
4. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application software is initialized. Touch 1, for example, if you
want to initialize all modules; or select the appropriate number from the table
below.
SM
No.
1
2
What It Initializes
All Clear
Engine Clear
SCS (System Control

Service)
IMH (Image Memory

handler) Memory Clear
5
6
7
MCS (Memory Control

Service)
Copier Application
Fax Application
Printer Application
Scanner Application
Comments
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
Initializes the registration setting for the image
memory handler. (Deletes all image files in the
HDD).
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the scanner SP modes.
5-113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
3. Open SP5-801.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No.
10
11
What It Initializes
Web Service/Network
Application
NCS
(Network Control Service)
12
R-FAX
14
Clear DCS Setting
15
Clear UCS Setting
16
MIRS Setting
17
CCS
Comments
Deletes the network file application management
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Server)
settings
Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Server)
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
5. Touch EXECUTE, and turn the main switch off and on.
6. Download the NVRAM data from an SD card ( 5.4.2).
Without Using a Flash Memory Card

If there is no SD card, follow the steps below.
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC data lists.
2. Open SP5-801.
3. Select the number for the item that you want to initialize.
4. Press EXECUTE and turn the main switch off and on.
5. Make sure that you do the following:
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.12 Copy Adjustments).
Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.15 Touch Screen Calibration").
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter all values that have been changed
from their factory settings.
Do the white level adjustment ( Section 3.14 "Scanner White Level
Adjustment")
6. Check the copy quality and the paper paths, and do any necessary
adjustments.
B156/B220
5-114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
5.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
Service Table Key
italics
*
DFU
SP1
001
003
004
005
What it means
Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each
key press.
Comments added for your reference.
This value is stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, the default
value (factory setting) is restored.
Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value
Mode Number
Bit Switch
1
Bit Switch 1 Settings
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Clear Setting
1
Initialize Printer System
3
Delete Program
Print Summary
Print Printer Summary
Function / [Setting]
Adjusts bit switch settings.
Note: Currently the bit switches are not being used.
Service
Tables
Notation
[range / default / step]
Initializes settings in the System menu of the user

mode.
DFU
Prints the printer summary sheet
(An error log is printed in addition to the
configuration page).
Display Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.

006
101
SM
Sample/ Locked Print

0:Link with Doc. Srv
1:Enable
Data Recall
1
Factory
2
Previous
3
Current
4
ACC
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Recalls a set of gamma settings.
5-115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1
102
Mode Number
Resolution Settings
Toner Control Mode
Selection
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer
gamma adjustment.
1800x600 Photo
1800x600 Text
1800x600 Graph
600x600 Photo
600x600 Text
103
Test Page
1
Color Gray Scale
2
Color Pattern
Prints the Color Calibration Test Sheet or Color Test

Pattern to check the color balance before and after
toner control adjustment (gamma adjustment).
For toner control adjustment, see SP1-104 and
SP1-105.
104
105
106
Gamma Adjustment
1
Black: Highlight
2
Black: Shadow
3
Black: Middle
4
Black: IDmax
21 Cyan: Highlight
22 Cyan: Shadow
23 Cyan: Middle
24 Cyan: IDmax
41 Magenta: Highlight
42 Magenta: Shadow
43 Magenta: Middle
44 Magenta: IDmax
61 Yellow: Highlight
62 Yellow: Shadow
63 Yellow: Middle
64 Yellow: IDmax
Save Tone Control Value
Save Tone Control
Value
Toner Limit
1
Toner Limit Photo
B156/B220
Toner Limit Text
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in

the Mode Selection menu.
[0 ~ 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
For the Color Calibration Test Sheet and Color Test
Pattern, see SP1-103. For saving adjusted values,
see SP1-105.
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma

Adj. menu item as the current setting. Before the
machine stores the new current setting, it moves
the data currently stored as the current setting to
the previous setting memory storage location.
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image
development.
[100 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
[100 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
5-116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO THE PRINTER CONTROLLER

The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode.
Section 5.1.
SP No.
5104
Description
A3/DLT Double
Count
Memory All Clear
5907
Plug & Play
7832
Self-Diagnose
Result Display
Service
Tables
5801
Function and Setting

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT.
0: No, 1: Yes, 2: Yes except By-pass
If Yes is selected, the total counter and the current user
code counter count up twice when A3 or DLT paper is
used.
NOTE: Contact your supervisor if you wish to change this
SP.
Resets data for process control and all software counters,
and returns all modes and adjustments to their defaults
values.
Selects the brand name and the production name for
Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in
NVRAM.
Displays the controller self-diagnostic result.
SM
5-117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
5.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE

5.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE
SP1-XXX (System and Others)
1
004
005
009
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Compression Type]
Compression Type
Selects the compression type for binary picture
processing.
[ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin (Remote scan)]

Erase Margin
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned
image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original,
create a margin.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Remote scan disable
0: enable 1: disable
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Remote scan: Network TWAIN scanner
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
2
021
Mode Number
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Compression ratio of gray-scale]
1
Compression ratio
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing
(Normal image)
mode (JPEG) for the three settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
[ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
5: lowest compression ratio,
95: highest compression ratio
2
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]
(High-comp image)
3
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step ]
(Low-comp image)
4
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]
(High Lv2-comp image)
5
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
(Low Lv2-comp image)
B156/B220
5-118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
5.3.2 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301)

SP4-301 displays a code that indicates the current status of the APS sensors. The
table lists the codes and the activated sensors.
L1
L2
L3
W1
W2
Code
5
132
165
133
128
W1
P
P
W2
P
P
Sensors
L1
P
P
P
Other combinations
L2
P
P
P
L3
P
P
P: Activated
: Deactivated
SM
5-119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
B156S540.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5.4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

5.4.1 FIRMWARE
The procedure is the same for all firmware modules.
NOTE: If you will change scanner firmware, print 5-990-22 and -23 (SMC reports
for scanner settings) before you start this procedure.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card [B] containing
the software you wish to
download into SD card slot 3.
4. Open the front cover.
5. Turn on the main power.
[B]
6. Follow the instructions displayed

on the operation panel
[A]
7. Monitor the downloading status
on the operation panel.
While downloading is in
B156I451.WMF
progress, the panel displays
Writing. When downloading has been completed, the panel displays
Completed.
The Start key lights red while downloading is in progress, and then lights
green again after downloading is completed. (only for "Operation Panel"
downloading)
CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
8. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the SD card.
9. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
10. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
11. After installing new scanner firmware, perform copier SP5-801-9 (Memory All
Clear Scanner Application). Then input scanner settings that are different
from the defaults (see the SMC prints of 5-990-22 and -23 that you made
earlier).
NOTE: If the download failed, an error message appears on the panel. In this case,
download the firmware again using the SD card.
In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the
following:
B156/B220
5-120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Service
Tables
Controller firmware: Turn on dip switch 1 on the controller board, and

switch on. The machine boots from the SD card. Download the new
firmware.
Others: Replace the appropriate PCB.
SM
5-121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5.4.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
The following data (related to the accounting counter) are not uploaded from
NVRAM to the SD card:
SP8-381 to -387
SP8-391 and -411
SP8-491 to -493 and -496
SP8-581 to -584 and -586
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)

The data in the NVRAM in the machine can be uploaded to an SD memory card.
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the cover [A].
3. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card
slot 3 (lower slot).
[Slot 2]
[Slot 3]
5. Open SP5-824.
6. Touch EXECUTE to start
uploading the NVRAM data.
[B]
7. Turn off the main switch, and then

remove the SD card.
[A]
B156I451.WMF
B156/B220
5-122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)

SP5-825 downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM inside the machine.
[Slot 1]
1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1).
[Slot 2]
3. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card

slot 3 (lower slot).
[Slot 3]

8. Open SP5-825.
5. Touch EXECUTE to start
download the NVRAM data.
[B]
6. Turn off the main switch, and then

remove the SD card.
[A]
Note that the following errors may occur during downloading:

If an SD card is not installed in the SD card slot and a message tells you that
downloading cannot proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by
pressing EXECUTE.
If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you
press EXECUTE a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed
because the card is abnormal and the execution halts.
SM
5-123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
B156I451.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE RESET
5.5 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use either of the
following procedures.
Procedure 1
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Check that Now loading. Please wait is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
Procedure 2
1. Press and hold down the and keys together until the machine beeps (for
about 10 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
3. Check that Now loading. Please wait is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
5.6 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

5.6.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET
To reset the system settings in the UP mode to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key ().
2. Hold down the key and touch System Settings.
NOTE: Hold down the key before touching System Settings.
B156S503.WMF
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes.
B156/B220
5-124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
5.6.2 COPIER SETTING RESET

To reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults, use the following
procedure.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key ().
2. Hold down the key and then touch Copier/Document Server Features.
NOTE: Hold down the key before touching Copier/Document Server
Features.
B156S504.WMF
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server
settings, touch Yes.
Service
Tables
SM
5-125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER TOOLS
5.7 USER TOOLS

The user program (UP) mode can be accessed by users and operators, and by
sales and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copiers default settings. The
user can reset the default settings at any time.
5.7.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS

UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press the User Tools/Counter key ().
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, touch System Settings.
Touch a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
touch it to display more options. Specify the settings, touch Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window.
Copier/Document Server Features

In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Copy/Document Server Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings

In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner
Settings to open the appropriate screen and then touch the tab to display more
settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
Inquiry
In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry.
The following SP mode settings will be displayed.
Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1)
Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2)
Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3)
Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4)
Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4)
B156/B220
5-126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Rev. 11/2005
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Counter.
The total counters will be displayed.
View the settings, touch Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window.
5.8 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board: SW2
DIP SW No.
1
2 to 7
8
OFF
Boot-up from SD card
Default: OFF DFU
Default: ON DFU
ON
Default: Boot-up from Machine
If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from
the SD card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to OFF.
BICU Board: SW2
Function
Not used
Destination
Not used
Debug
Mode
Settings
Default: ON DFU
Off:
Off:
Off: JAN
On: NA
Off:
Off:
Default: OFF DFU
Default: OFF DFU
Off:
Off: EU
On:
On:
On: AA
Off:
On:
Off: TWN
Off:
Off:
On: CHN
On:
JAN: Japan, NA: North America, EU: Europe, AA: Asia, TWN: Taiwan, CHN: China
SM
5-127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
DIP
SW
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
5.9 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE

Overview
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5873) copies application programs
from one SD card to a different card.
The machine has three SD card slots. Slots 1 and 2 are used for application
programs, and Slot 3 is used for servicing only.
Three SD cards cannot be used at the same time for applications. If the customer
must use more than two SD cards, more than one application can be stored on the
same SD card.
Important
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
Always use a new SD card. Do not use the SD card if it was previously used with
a computer. Correct operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from the
card to another card. The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is
licensed to use the application program, and the CE may need to check the SD
card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Licensing does not let you copy PostScript data or DOSS data to a different SD
card. But, you can copy an application from an SD card to an SD card that holds
PostScript data.
If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
B156/B220
5-128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
Move Exec
Do this procedure to move an application from one SD card to another.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Put the destination SD card in SD Card Slot 1 (upper slot).
3. Put the source SD card into SD Card Slot 3 (lower slot). This SD card holds the
application program that you want to copy to the destination SD card in Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Go into the SP mode.
6. Do SP5873-001 Move Exec.
7. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
11. Check that the application programs combined on the SD card in Slot 1 operate
correctly.
Undo Exec

2. Put the original source SD card in SD Card Slot 3 (lower slot). The application
program is copied back into this card.
3. Put the original destination SD card (with the stored application program that
you want to return to the original source SD card in Slot 3) in SD card Slot 1
(upper slot).
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec)
6. Obey the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
8. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 3.
10. Check that the application programs run correctly.
SM
5-129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
Do this procedure to repair the original source SD card if you accidentally move the
application to a different SD card.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has
been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Press then use the 10-key pad to enter .
Press and hold down for more than 3 seconds.
Touch Copy SP.
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 1 On/Off.
COPY : SP-5-857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1 then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
B156/B220
5-130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD)
_2_
Initial 2
NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1
Engine SC Error
Controller SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
Saves data when an engine-related

SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controllerrelated SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
you specify by entering code number.
Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example
shows Engine SC Error selected.
__
OFF
__
Service
Tables
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__
ON
__
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-003
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.
SM
5-131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
KEY NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
COPY
4848 (COPY)
2224 (BCU)
PRINTER
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
4400 (GPS)
4500 (PDL)
4600 (GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
2224 (BCU)
SCANNER
WEB
5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
3000 (NCS)
2000 (NCS)
5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3300 (PTS)
6666 (WebSys)
2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym
ECS
GPS
GSP-PM
IMH
MCS
Meaning
Engine Control Service
GW Print Service
GW Print Service Print Module
Image Memory Handler
Memory Control Service
Acronym
NFA
PDL
PTS
SCS
SRM
NCS
Network Control Service
WebDB
Meaning
Net File Application
Printer Design Language
Print Server
System Control Service
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.
B156/B220
5-132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot (slot 3 - lower slot) of the copier.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
SM
5-133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press
(Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter 01 then hold down for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.
B156/B220
5-134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015
Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017
Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a

completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857017).
SM
5-135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5857-016
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
2
22
10
21
11
20
12
19
13
14
18
17
16
B156D001.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor
2. ADF exposure glass
3. Exposure glass
4. 2nd carriage
5. Scanner lamp
6. 1st carriage
7. Original width sensor
8. Scanner motor
9. Sensor board unit
10. Original length sensors
11. Fusing unit
SM
12. Paper transfer roller unit

13. Image transfer belt (T/B)waste toner
bottle
14. Image transfer belt unit
15. OPC belt (O/B) cleaning unit
16. OPC belt waste toner bottle
17. Paper tray 2
18. Paper tray 1
19. Laser unit
20. Development unit
21. OPC belt unit
22. Image transfer belt cleaning unit
6-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

3
8
9
10
11
29
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
28
27
20
26
21
22
23
25
24
B156V101.WMF
1. Registration sensor (ARDF)

2. Original exit sensor (ARDF)
3. Original set sensor (ARDF)
4. Original trailing edge sensor (ARDF)
5. Original width sensor board (ARDF)
6. Original length sensor 1 (ARDF)
7. Original length sensor 2 (ARDF)
8. Relay sensor (Bridge unit)
9. Tray exit sensor (Bridge unit)
10. Paper sensor (1-bin tray)
11. Paper overflow sensor
12. Exit sensor (Interchange unit)
13. Entrance sensor (Duplex unit)
14. Paper exit sensor
15. Fusing exit sensor
16. Fusing entrance sensor
B156/B220
17. Transfer belt sensor

18. Registration sensor
19. Exit sensor (Duplex unit)
20. Paper feed sensor
21. Paper end sensor (By-pass tray)
22. Paper feed sensor
23. Relay sensor (Paper tray 3)
24. Relay sensor (Paper tray 4)
25. Stapler tray entrance sensor
(Finisher)
26. Stack feed-out belt HP sensor
(Finisher)
27. Lower tray exit sensor (Finisher)
28. Paper limit sensor (Finisher)
29. Entrance sensor (Finisher)
6-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS

Layout
2
4
5
8
9
21
10
20
11
19
18
12
13
16
15
1. Fusing unit motor

2. Image transfer belt cleaning clutch
3. Image transfer belt cleaning contact
solenoid
4. Scanner motor
5. Main motor
6. Development clutch - K
7. Development clutch - C
8. Development motor 2 - K and C
9. Development motor 1 - Y and N
10. Development clutch - Y
SM
14
B156D002.WMF
11. Paper size switch 1

13. Development clutch - M
14. OPC belt cleaning clutch
15. Paper feed motor
16. Paper feed clutch 2
17. Vertical transport clutch 2
18. Paper feed clutch 1
19. Vertical transport clutch 1
20. Registration clutch
21. Paper transfer solenoid
6-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Drive Power Path

[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[HK]
[HC]
[IK, C]
[S]
[R]
[IY, M]
[Q]
2
[HY]
[HM]
[P ]
[O ]
[J]
[P2]
[O2]
Motor (Type)
Scanner [B]
(Stepper)
Development [IK&C]
(DC brushless)
Development [IY&M]
(DC brushless)
Main [G]
(DC brushless)
Fusing Unit [D]

(DC brushless)
B156/B220
[L]
[K]
B156V108.WMF
Drives ...
Scanner motor gear [C]
Development clutches [HK, C] Development unit for K and C
Paper Feed [N]

(Stepper)
[N] [M]
Development clutches [HY, M] Development unit for Y and M

OPC belt cleaning clutch [L] OPC belt cleaning unit
OPC belt [K] with the flywheel [J]
Image transfer belt [M]
Fusing unit [S]
Paper exit unit [A]
Image transfer belt cleaning clutch [E] Image transfer belt
cleaning unit
Registration clutch [Q] Registration roller
Paper transfer roller
Belt cleaning contact solenoid [F] Image transfer belt cleaning
unit contact mechanism
Paper transfer solenoid [R] Paper transfer roller contact
mechanism
Interchange unit and one-bin tray
Paper feed clutch [O1,2] Paper pick-up roller
Vertical transport clutch [P1,2]
6-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Scanner Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
7
8
SM
1. Anti-condensation heater
6. Original length sensor 2
7. SBU (sensor board unit)
3. Platen cover sensor
4. Lamp stabilizer
9. Operation panel
5. Original length sensor 1
10. Exposure lamp
6-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
B156D003.WMF
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Image Transfer
3
2
5
6
7
8
18
17
16
15
10
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11
13
12
Charge corona wire cleaner motor

Quenching lamp
ID sensor
Belt mark sensor
T/B waste toner bottle switch
T/B waste toner sensor
O/B waste toner sensor
O/B waste toner bottle switch
B156D004.WMF
10. Transfer belt sensor

11. Pressure roller thermofuse
12. Pressure roller thermistor
13. Heating roller thermistor
14. Pressure roller fusing lamp
15. Heating roller fusing lamp
16. Oil overflow sensor
17. Heating roller thermostat
18. Oil end sensor
T/B: Image transfer belt

O/B: OPC belt
B156/B220
6-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Paper Path
2
3
4
5
19
6
18
7
17
8
16
15
14
9
13
12
11
10
B156D005.WMF
SM
6-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
11. Paper end sensor 2

13. Tray heater (optional)
14. Mechanical counter 2
15. Mechanical counter 1
16. Exit cover switch
17. Paper exit sensor
18. Main power switch
19. Front cover switch
1. Right cover switch

2. Interlock switch
3. Paper overflow sensor
4. Fusing exit sensor
5. Registration sensor
6. Paper feed sensor 1
7. Paper near-end sensor 1
8. Right lower cover switch
9. Paper near-end sensor 2
10. Paper feed sensor 2
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Development Units
1
2
10
9
8
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B156D006.WMF
6. Memory chip I/F Board

7. Memory chip M
8. Memory chip Y
9. Memory chip C
10. Memory chip K
Rear development board

Laser synch. detection board
Front development board
Polygonal mirror motor
LD unit
B156/B220
6-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Boards
1
2
17
4
16
15
14
6
13
7
12
11
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SM
9. PSU fan 1
10. Breaker
11. Controller fan
12. Temperature/humidity sensor
13. Controller board
14. High voltage supply board
15. Oil pump
16. Fusing unit fan
17. Paper exit fan
Scanner I/O board

CSS board
Development fan
I/O board
BICU board
Power supply unit
PSU fan 2
Ozone fan
6-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
B156D007.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Printer
Options
Memory
: Standard
: Option
NIB
Fax Options
Controller
Fax Unit
Xenon Lamp
HDD
Lamp
Stabilizer
Operation
Panel
Scanner
Motor
Polygon
Motor
Scanner IOB
ARDF
Printer/
Scanner
BICU
APS
Thermistors
SBU
LD Units
PSU
Fusing Lamps
Paper
Tray Unit/
LCT
1-Bin Tray
Interchange
LSD
IOB
By-pass
Duplex
Bridge
Unit
High
Voltage
P.P
Sensors
Clutches/
Solenoids
Motors
Finisher
B156D511.WMF
B156/B220
6-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
1. Controller (Main Board)

Controls the memory and the fax/scanner/printer options.
2. BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit)
This is the scanner and engine control board. It controls the following functions:
Engine sequence
Timing control for peripherals
Image processing control and video control
Operation control
Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the printer and
scanner
High voltage supply board control
Fusing control
3. IOB (Input/Output Board)
Controls the sensors, motors, clutches, and solenoids of the main unit.
4. Scanner IOB (Scanner Input/Output Board)
Handles the following functions.
Serial interfaces with ARDF and operation panel
Scanner motor control
Detailed
Descriptions
5. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

The SBU converts the analog signals from the CCD into digital signals.
SM
6-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
OPTION
USB
2.5" HDD
(40 GB)
IDE
PS3/
Printer/
Scanner
DATA
Overwite
Security Unit
SD Card
RAM
(256 MB)
SD Slot 1
SD Slot 2
SD Slot 3
SDRAM
DIMM
NIB
Local BUS
System
Flash ROM
(16 MB)
On-board
SDRAM
(512 MB)
ASIC
CPU
NVRAM
(128 kB)
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
BICU
IEEE1394/
Wireless LAN/
Bluetooth/
IEEE1284
File Format
Converter
FCU
G3
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
B156D510.WMF
The controller uses RC2K architecture, which allows the board to control all
applications (copier, printer, scanner, and fax).
The fax option requires FCU installation also.
Systems and application software can be downloaded from the controllers SD
Card slot. For details about how to download software from an SD card ( 5.4).
1. CPU:
PMC RM7035C-466MHz
2. ASIC:
This is a dedicated chip developed for use with RC2K architecture. It controls
the following functions: memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data,
HDD, network, operation panel, and image processing.
3. Flash ROM:
16MB Flash ROM for the system program
B156/B220
6-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
4. SDRAM (on-board):
768 MB SDRAM (512MB + 256MB)
5. SD Card Slots:
Three slots are provided for three SD cards. Slot 1 is for the printer and
scanner applications (standard). Slot 2 is for the PostScript 3 or the Data
Overwrite Security applications (optional). Slot 3 is for service purposes, such
as firmware updates.
6. NVRAM:
Stores the engine and controller settings
7. PCI Interface:
For installing the FCU board, File Format Converter, IEEE1394, Bluetooth,
IEEE1284 and wireless LAN. The IEEE1394, wireless LAN, Bluetooth and
IEEE1284 cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.
8. HDD:
Used for the document server. Also used for collation, locked print, sample
print, form overlay, and font storage. The hard disk is partitioned as shown
below.
40GB HDD
Function
15,000 MB
Document server
File System 1
500 MB
File System 2
1,000 MB
Downloaded fonts,
forms.
Job spooling area
File System 3
2,400 MB
Work data area
File System 4
500 MB
Image TMP
16,800 MB
Temporary print image

file
Commonly used area for
applications
Copier application
Printer application
Scanner application
Job Log
10 MB
Job log
Swap
406 MB
Debug, Swap
SDK
1,200 MB
Address book/
Mil data
2,000 MB
Others
1,276 MB
Total
41,092 MB
SM
SDK application
Address book/ Mail box/
Net files
Stamps/ SAF thumbnail
etc.
Comment
Remains stored even after cycling
power off/on.
power off/on.
Erased after power off.
power off/on.
Erase after power off.
power off/on.
Remains stored even after power
is turned off/on.
is turned off/on.
is turned off/on.
is turned off/on.
6-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Partition
Image Local
Storage
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY PROCESS
6.3 COPY PROCESS

1
3
4
6
B156D008.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Development unit
OPC belt
Image transfer belt cleaning unit
Image transfer belt
Paper transfer roller unit
B156/B220
Quenching lamp
OPC belt cleaning unit
Charge corona unit
Polygonal mirror
6-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY PROCESS
1. Drum Charge
The corona wire gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Black (K) Image Creation
a) Laser Exposure
The laser diode (LD) emits two laser beams. The laser beams create a latent
image on the OPC surface.
b) Development
The development roller transfers negatively charged toner to the latent
image. The OPC belt surface holds only one toner color at one time.
c) Image Transfer
The OPC belt transfers the single-color toner image to the image transfer
belt.
d) Cleaning
The OPC belt cleaning unit cleans the image transfer belt.
3. Magenta (M) Image Creation
Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
4. Cyan (C) Image Creation
6. Paper Transfer
The paper transfer roller transfers the combined CMYK toner image to the
paper.
The OPC belt and the image transfer belt can hold two A4-size LEF images on
their surfaces. When printing on A4 LEF or smaller paper, the OPC and image
transfer belts process two images in one cycle. At this time, two sheets of
paper are consecutively output with little interval between them. This speeds up
color print output.
7. Separation
The paper is separated from the image transfer belt when the belt curves away
from it. A discharge plate assists this process.
8. Fusing
The fusing unit fuses the image to the paper.
9. Cleaning
The image transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the belt.
10. Quenching
The quenching lamp erases any remaining charge on the OPC belt.
SM
6-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
5. Yellow (Y) Image Creation

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.4 PROCESS CONTROL

6.4.1 OVERVIEW
The copier adjusts the following process control parameters:
Development bias (VB)
Charge corona grid voltage (VG)
These 2 parameters maintain a consistent gamma for the engine.
NOTE: This copier uses only the ID sensor. (There is no TD or potential sensor.)
6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS

Six Steps
Depending on the machines condition, some or all of the following steps may
occur:
: ID sensor calibration
: Color development bias initialization (M, then C, then Y)
: K development bias initialization
: M, C, Y, and K bias fine adjustment
: Charge grid bias voltage adjustment
: Process control interval counter reset
If the main power is turned off (or the cover opened) during a process control
session, the session is aborted. Turning the power on (or closing the cover)
restarts the process control session.
When is Process Control Done?

When an event arises, the specified steps are performed.
Event
Forced process
control
Process control
regular interval
Power on
Environmental
change
B156/B220
Condition
When forced process control is done (engine SP mode
3-001-1)
End of job: When more than 200 sheets have been
printed upon completion of a job. (The interval can be
changed with engine SP3-003-1.) Black-and-white
outputs are not included in this count.
During a job: If the number of prints since process
control gets to 700, printing stops and process control is
done. The interval can be changed with engine SP 3003-1 [default: 200] and engine SP 3-003-2 [default:
500]. Change only SP 3-003-2 if you do not wish to
change the end-of-job interval.
When the fusing pressure roller temperature is 60C or
lower immediately after the power is turned on.
When the change in the temperature/humidity sensor
output since the previous process control exceeds a
certain value. SP3-004 can be used to change the
threshold temperature and humidity values.
6-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Steps
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Event
Condition
K toner cartridge This is done after clearing the K toner near-end state
or K development (i.e., when a new K development unit is added). The
unit replacement machine idles and when the development roller stops for
10 seconds, indicating that idling is over, process control
occurs.
Color
After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the
development unit machine idles to transfer color toner to the development
replacement
unit. After idling, process control occurs.
Color toner
After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the
cartridge
machine idles to transfer color toner to the development
replacement
unit. After idling, process control occurs.
Same as power on process control
24 hours after
previous process
control
PCU replacement After the PCU counter is reset, it is lubricated (new OPC
belt lubricant application mode). Then process control
occurs.
After charge
The wire is cleaned at these times, if a set number of
developments were done since the last cleaning:
corona wire
cleaning
In the middle of a job
At the end of a job
Immediately before the machine goes to low power
mode
For more information: 6.7.2
ACC
Process control is done just before ACC is done (this
process control can be enabled/disabled with SP 3-125).
Steps
, , , g
, , ,
, , ,
Supplementary Information on Process Control
Step 1. ID Sensor Calibration

This calibration compensates for changes in the condition of the OPC belt or the ID
sensor. The ID sensor detects the light reflected from the bare OPC belt. The LED
current is adjusted until the sensor output is correct. The LED current for the color
toner detection circuit is adjusted based on the adjustment made for the black toner
detection circuit.
Step 2. Initializing Color Development Bias
For each color, the machine makes a solid patch (20x25) of toner on the OPC belt.
The ID sensor detects the density of the patch. The laser power for the patch of
toner is constant at about 210/255. Each color is calibrated separately (this step
has three stages - one for each color). M/A must be the following for areas of
maximum image density: 0.65 mg/cm2, Range:0.40 to 0.90 mg/cm2. If the detected
M/A is different from the target M/A, the development bias is adjusted.
Colour development bias initialisation is not always done. This is to reduce the
amount of time taken for process control. Also, in step 4, the current colour
SM
6-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The following is a brief explanation of process control. This is for your reference. If
the information is helpful for understanding the machine in the field, read the
following explanation.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
development bias values are fine-tuned to correct for any changes in the machine
or temperature/humidity since the last full process control.
This step always has to be done when installing a new development unit. The toner
amount carried by a development roller varies with each unit. (The toner amount
used for a certain development bias is not the same.) Black development bias
initialization (step 3) has to be done more often, because tests have shown that
process control errors occur more often if this is not done.
Step 3. Initializing K Development Bias

Similar to the process for color development bias. M/A must be 0.65 mg/cm2 for
areas of maximum image density. Range: 0.40 to 2.0 mg/cm2
Step 4. Fine-tuning the YMCK Development Biases
The machine makes another solid pattern
Steps 2 and 3 for determining VB (development bias) are not done every process
control (see the table: When is the process control done?). Because of this, the
solid area density, based on the VB obtained during initialization, may change as a
result of changes inside the machine after a period of use, or because of
environmental changes. To suppress these fluctuations, this step fine-tunes VB at
regular intervals, or if the environmental conditions change.
The machine adjusts the development bias based on these results.
Step 5. Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment

The machine makes a very low image density pattern (20x25 mm), which consists
of a replacing 3 x 3 matrix of pixels on the OPC belt. Two of these pixels are of
high intensity (dark), and the others are at zero intensity (LD off, white). The two
high intensity pixels are close together.
0
240
0
0
240
0
0
0
0
This is only to give you a rough idea - the exact pixel densities used by this
machine are not shown here.
The net effect is to have two dark pixels surrounded by white pixels on all sides,
repeated all over the paper.
If there is a difference between the target M/A and the detected M/A, the grid
voltage is adjusted.
Step 6. Resetting the Process Control Interval Counter

The counter is in the NVRAM on the controller board, and is reset after process
control. The counter is not reset after black development unit or black toner
cartridge replacement. This is because only a few of the process control steps are
done after replacing these components.
B156/B220
6-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5 SCANNING
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
1
B156D009.WMF
10
6. 1st scanner (1st carriage)
2. ADF exposure glass
7. Scanner motor
3. Exposure glass
8. Sensor board unit (SBU)
4. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)
9. Original length sensors
5. Scanner lamp
( Digital Processes Digital scanning Basic concepts)
ADF mode: The ADF feeds the original past the ADF exposure glass. The 1st
scanner moves under the ADF exposure glass. The original does not stay on the
glass, but keeps going to the ADF exit.
SM
6-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Book mode: The scanner motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners. The original is
scanned from left to right.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE

[H]
[G]
[C]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B156D010.WMF
Scanner drive: Scanner motor [A] Scanner drive pulley [B and C], and scanner
drive shaft [D] Scanner wires [E and F] 1st [G] and 2nd [H] scanners
Book Mode
The scanner I/O board controls the scanner motor.
The 1st scanner moves twice as fast as the 2nd scanner.
For reduction/enlargement, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio.
The returning speed is always the same, regardless of magnification ratio.
Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the scanner motor speed. Main-scan
magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the scannermotor speed ( SP4-008).
ARDF Mode
The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home positions; the scanner HP sensor
detects the 1st scanner position, and the 2nd scanner position is linked with that of
the 1st scanner.
Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the ADF feed speed. Main-scan
magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the ADF feedspeed ( SP6-006-5).
B156/B220
6-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B156D011.WMF
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
The on/off signals received from the sensors are used to detect the original size.
When the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the paper is set
lengthwise. So, if A4 paper is set sideways on the by-pass tray, the machine
assumes it is A3 paper (set lengthwise) and scans the whole A3 area, disregarding
the original size sensors. However, when the registration sensor detects that the
paper is not A3 but only A4 sideways, paper feed stops and a jam occurs. This is to
prevent large amounts of toner transferring from the transfer belt to the transfer
roller. (Also see SP 1-940.)
NOTE: Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the
ARDF.
The table (next page) shows the sizes that are detected for various sensor outputs.
SM
6-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The SBU board checks each sensor signal at the following times:
As the platen cover is closed
When the start key is pushed, if the platen cover stays open.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
L1
L2
L3
W1
W2
B156D012.WMF
Original Size
Metric
A3
B4
F4
A4-L
B5-L
A4-S
B5-S
A5-L, A5-S
Length Sensor
Inch
11" x 17"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (8" x 13")
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5"
L3
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
L2
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
L1
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
Width
Sensor
W2
W1
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
SP4-301
display
132
141
165
133
142
5
14
128
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, Cannot detect original size. is displayed on the operation
panel.
B156/B220
6-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING
CCD
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
SBU
BICU
LD Board
Fax
(Option)
HDD
Controller
Memory
Printer
B156D512.WMF
The CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. The
SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital signals.
It sends these signals to the BICU board. The BICU board processes the image,
then the image data is sent to the LD unit.
SM
6-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Scanner
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM
O R(B)
E
CCD
O
E
O B(R)
E
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
SBU
Controller
R 10 bit
Field
Memory
G 10 bit
Field
Memory
B 10 bit
SBU
8 bit
ASIC
8 bit
8 bit
BICU
B156D013.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified.
2. Signal Composition
The amplified signals are combined after A/D conversion.
A/D Conversion
The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1,024 gradations)
digital signals.
White Level Correction
A white reference plate is scanned before the original is scanned.
Data is updated before the original is scanned.
The differences in the white level across the page, including irregularities in the
CCD and the optical parts across the main scan, are corrected.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if originals are scanned through
the ARDF.
B156/B220
6-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Black Level Correction

Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.
Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal.
This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.
Calculated for each scan line.
Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page.
VPU Test Mode
Detailed
Descriptions
To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907 (for more details, see chapter 4, Troubleshooting).
SM
6-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING
SBU
Shading correction
Picture element correction
Scanner line correction
Scanner gamma correction
Filters
ASIC 1
ADS
Color conversion
Main scan magnification
Printer gamma correction
Error diffusion
Image Separation
ACS
Gradation processing
Image rotation
Image sort
HDD
ASIC 2
ASIC 3
ASIC 4
Controller
LD Unit
BICU
B156D014.WMF
Shading Correction
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the light emission level at
the edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or the
differences among the CCD pixels.
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction includes
1) the completion of the scan line correction process
2) the correction of the time when the CCD is not perpendicular to the light
The green CCD line is taken as the standard.
Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match the standard.
NOTE: To adjust the vertical line correction level, use SP4-932.
Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 scan lines apart (8 lines total) when 100%
magnification is used.
Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.
The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio.
If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer, but further correction is needed ( Picture Element
Correction).
B156/B220
6-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)

The RGB video signals from the CCD are sent
to the ASIC1 chip on the BICU board. This
signal is proportional to the intensity of light
reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video
signals. The shading circuit converts the signal
from 10-bit to 8-bit.
The ASIC1 chip converts the signal levels as
shown in Fig. 2.
This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY
color conversion (conversion is done later in
the image process).
The same table is used for R, G, and B
signals.
255
1023
Light
Dark
Fig. 1
B156D015.WMF
255
Filtering
255
Light
Dark
Fig. 2
B156D016.WMF
Background Density Control

Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold.
The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Users can select a different threshold for each mode.
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.
2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
Black and white mode
1) Determines the peak white level.
2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.
3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background.
4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion.
5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.
SM
6-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Appropriate software filters are applied to the

RGB video signals.
Varies depending on the results of auto
text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode).
RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas
Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Separation
The original image is classified into the text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
Used to locate text and line diagrams
Locates areas of strong contrast.
Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation
If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation
Identifies whether the text areas pixels are black or color.
Based on:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
ACS (Auto Color Selection)
Black and white first
Signal Level
255
204 (50% UCR rate)
153 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
RGB signal after scanner correction
102 128
(40% UCR rate)
255
RGB common data
(50% UCR rate)
B156D017.WMF
B156D018.WMF
The auto color selection function determines if an original is black/white or color.

Black copy mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels.
RGB video signals are compared.
If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the
original is considered black and white.
B156/B220
6-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
Simple color copying.
No special modes applied.
To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table
Original Color
Toner
Y
M
C
K
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in
the sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the BICU board handles reduction and
enlargement in the main scan direction.
Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a
service manual and will not be covered here.
SM
6-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Main Scan Magnification
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Printer Gamma Correction

K
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
B156D020.WMF
B156D019.WMF
Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should be
identical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical
components can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gamma
needs re-calibration and adjustment from time to time.
The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service
programs (SP4-918).
4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled.
Factory settings can be loaded using SP5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5610-5.
B156/B220
6-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3.
Fig. 3
B156D021.WMF
Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 4).
Fig. 4
B156D022.WMF
Fig. 5
Detailed
Descriptions
Middle (Middle ID)

The Middle ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 5).
B156D023.WMF
Highlight (Low ID)

The Low ID mode adjusts the image density
between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color
gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure
6).
Fig. 6
SM
6-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156D024.WMF
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight 17-step
gradation scales for each color (CMYK),
including background white, for Text and
Photo modes.
ACC automatically calibrates the printer
gamma curve. The user starts the ACC
process.
Dark
Light
K
C
1. The user prints an ACC Test

Pattern.
2. The user places the test pattern on

the exposure glass.
Y
K
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read

each color scale.
C
M
4. The copier corrects the printer

gamma by comparing the ideal
settings with the current image
density.
5. The copier combines the corrected

gamma curve with the Shadow,
Middle, and Highlight values
currently in memory.
B156D025.WMF
6. The copier then calculates the ID max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based
on data from the ACC scan.
7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes
(SP4-918).
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
B156/B220
6-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1
31
7
8
10
30
29
11
28
12
27
13
26
14
15
16
17
24
23
22
20
21
1. Ground brush
2. ID sensor
3. OPC belt
4. Bias brush
5. Image transfer belt cleaning blade
7. T/B toner collection auger 1
8. T/B toner collection auger 2
9. T/B waste toner sensor feeler
10. Waste toner bottle switch
11. Paper transfer roller
12. Paper transfer roller unit
13. T/B waste toner bottle full sensor
14. Registration roller
15. Image transfer belt
SM
19
18
B156D352.WMF

17. Image transfer belt mark sensor
18. OPC belt cleaning brush
19. O/B waste toner sensor feeler
20. O/B waste toner bottle full sensor
21. O/B waste toner bottle switch
22. O/B toner collection auger 1
23. OPC belt cleaning unit
24. Charge corona unit
25. Laser unit
26. M development unit
27. Y development unit
28. OPC belt support
29. C development unit
30. K development unit
31. T/B cleaning blade (additional)
6-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT

Power Supply
[C]
[A]
[A]: High voltage supply

[B]: Charge corona unit
[C]: Harness
[B]
B156D026.WMF
High voltage supply [A] Harness [C] Charge corona unit [B] (negative charge)
( Photocopying Processes Charge Corona Charge Scorotron Method)
Grid and Wire Cleaning

[E]
[D]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Motor
Screw
Wire cleaner
Corona wire
Grid
[C]
[A]
[B]
B156D027.WMF
The motor [A] drives the bottom screw [B], which moves the wire cleaner [C]
forward or backward. The cleaner cleans the grid [E] and corona wire [D].
The wire is cleaned at these times:
Immediately before the machine goes to low power mode, if there was between
200 and 600 development counts since the last cleaning.
Between 600 (SP2-801-1) and 1200 (= the sum of the settings in SP2-801-1 and
3 plus 200) development counts at job end.
If the count gets to 1200 in the middle of a job (= the sum of the settings in SP2801-1 and -3 plus 200) development counts (stops in the middle of the job).
B156/B220
6-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The counter for development counts counts up as shown in the table.

A4 (LT) LEF (or smaller)
Others
Black & White

1 count
2 counts
Color
4 counts
8 counts
NOTE: 1) The counter always increases as shown in the table. These values are
not adjustable.
2) To change the cleaning interval, use SP2-801 ( 5.1.2).
Quenching
[C]
[A]: Quenching lamp

[B]: Charge corona unit
[C]: OPC belt
[A]
[B]
B156D028.WMF
Detailed
Descriptions
( Photocopying Processes Quenching)
SM
6-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE

[B]
[A]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
OPC belt
Main motor
Fly wheels
Bottom shaft
[C]
[D]
B156D309.WMF
Main motor [B] Gear Bottom shaft [D] OPC belt [A]
The flywheels [C] ensure that the OPC belt moves smoothly.
NOTE: The OPC belt and transfer belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the OPC belt by turning it, you must also turn the transfer belt at the same
time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
Lubricant bar
Cleaning brush
Feeler link (on the frame)
Waste toner bottle full sensor
(on the frame)
Waste toner feeler
Waste toner bottle switch
(on the frame)
Toner collection auger 1
Waste toner bottle
Cleaning blade
OPC belt
[A]
[K]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[J]
[F]
[I]
[H]
[G]
B156D029.WMF
Bottle Detection
The waste toner bottle switch [F] is on the frame, behind the OPC belt cleaning unit.
When the unit is installed, it pushes the switch, which indicates the bottle is in place.
B156/B220
6-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Waste Toner Collection

The cleaning brush [B] and the cleaning blade [J] removes the toner remaining on
the OPC belt [K] surface. ( Photocopying Processes Cleaning Counter
Blade + Brush)
Toner collection auger 1 [G] moves this toner to the front side, where it is collected
in the waste toner bottle [I].
Toner collection auger 2 [H] levels the toner in the bottle.
The waste toner feeler [E] at the rear of the bottle is gradually lifted as the toner
level in the bottle rises. When the feeler pushes the feeler link [C], the waste toner
full sensor [D] is activated and the machine detects that the bottle is full.
When the bottle becomes full, a message appears on the operation panel. The
machine can make 100 more prints, then further printing is disabled.
The bottle has a cap on the waste toner outlet. Empty the bottle when you visit the
customer.
Drive
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]: Development motor for Y,

M
[B]: OPC belt cleaning clutch
[C]: Gear
[D]: Gear
[E]: Cleaning brush
[F]: Toner collection auger 1
[G]: Opening for waste toner
[H]: Toner collection auger 2
[G]
B156D312.WMF
Development motor [A] Gear Timing belt OPC belt cleaning clutch [B]
Gears [C, D] OPC belt cleaning unit (including the brush and toner collection
augers)
The clutch cuts the drive to the cleaning unit when the development motor reverses
(this is done each development to prevent toner blockages in the development unit).
SM
6-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[H]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Drive
[A]
[B]
[A]: Main motor

[B]: Image transfer belt
[C]: Bottom shaft (rubber
coated)
[C]
B156D314.WMF
Main motor [A] Gears Bottom shaft [C]

The bottom shaft can drive the transfer belt because of the friction between the belt
[B] and the rubber coating on the shaft [C].
NOTE: The transfer belt and OPC belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the transfer belt by turning it, you must also turn the OPC belt at the same
time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
Belt Mark Detection
[B]
[A]: Belt mark sensor
[B]: Mark
[A]
B156D030.WMF
The belt mark sensor is a reflective photosensor.

To exactly synchronize the four mono-color toner images on the image transfer
belt, the belt mark sensor [A] monitors the belt speed. The sensor detects the light
reflected by the marks [B] at the rear end of the belt (25 marks per rotation; mark
frequency: 21 mm). The sensor output is used to control the belt speed.
B156/B220
6-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer Roller
[A]
[B]
[A]: Transfer roller
[B]: High voltage supply board
[C]: Terminal plates
[C]
B156D031.WMF
The transfer roller [A] attracts toner from the OPC belt to the image transfer belt by
using a positive charge.
The terminal in the middle of the PCU contacts the terminal on the transfer roller
shaft when the image transfer belt unit is installed in the PCU.
Detailed
Descriptions
The current is adjusted based on environmental temperature and humidity.
SM
6-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

[N]
[A]
[M]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
[M]:
[N]:
Cleaning blade
Image transfer belt
Toner conduit
Waste toner sensor feeler
Waste toner bottle switch
Actuator
Waste toner full sensor
Waste toner bottle
Transfer roller
Cleaning brush
Lubricant bar
Cleaning roller
[B]
[L]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[K]
[F]
[J]
[I]
[H]
[G]
B156D032.WMF
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning

Cleaning roller [N] is positively charged, and transfers this charge to the cleaning
brush [L].
The cleaning brush attracts residual toner from the image transfer belt [C]. This
toner is attracted to the cleaning roller, where it is removed by the cleaning blade
[A].
Waste Toner Collection

The toner removed by the cleaning blade is transported by the toner collection
auger 1 [B] to the rear, where it falls into the toner bottle [I] through the toner
conduit [D].
Toner collection auger 2 [K] levels the toner in the bottle.
There is a shutter on the top of the waste toner bottle. While out of the unit, the
shutter is kept closed by a spring attached to it. When it is put back in the unit, a
hook on top of the shutter is caught by the image transfer belt unit, and the shutter
opens.
Set Switch and Full Sensor

When the bottle is full, a message appears on the operation panel. After this, 100
more prints can be output. Then the machine stops and printing is disabled.
B156/B220
6-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Contact Mechanism
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
REAR VIEW
[B]
B156D034.WMF
B156D033.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid

Half-turn clutch
Lever
Cam
Fusing unit motor
When the toner images are being transferred from the OPC belt to the image
transfer belt, the image transfer belt cleaning unit must be kept away from the belt.
The unit contacts the belt only while cleaning the belt.
NOTE: During standby mode, the cleaning unit is away from the image transfer
belt.
When the image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid [A] is off, it catches a hook
on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B]. As a result, the high point of the cam
pushes the lever [C], and the cleaning unit is away from the transfer belt.
When the solenoid activates, the hook is released, drive from the motor is
transferred from the gear to the clutch, the cam [D] makes half a turn, the lever
drops, and the cleaning unit contacts the transfer belt
SM
6-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The fusing unit motor [E] drives the image transfer belt cleaning unit and the
contact mechanism.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Power Supply
[B]
[A]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
Cleaning brush
Cleaning roller
High voltage supply
Contact spring
Contact spring
Contact spring
[C]
[F]
[D]
[E]
B156D035.WMF
The cleaning roller [B] charges the cleaning brush, and attracts toner from it.
The high voltage supply [C] supplies positive charge to the cleaning roller via the
harness and contact springs (leaf springs) [D, E, and F].
[A]
Drive
[A]: Gear 1
[B]: Image transfer belt cleaning
clutch
[C]: Fusing unit motor
[D]: Drive gear
[E]: Gear 2
[F]: Toner path
[G]: Image transfer belt
[H]: Toner collection auger 1
[I]: Toner collection auger 2
[J]: Turning direction of the
cleaning brush
[B]
[C]
[J]
[F]
[I]
[H]
[D]
[E]
[G]
Fusing unit motor [C] drive gear [D] gears [A] and [E] cleaning brush [J]
and toner collection augers [H and I]
The clutch [B] controls the on/off timing of the mechanism.
B156/B220
6-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
11
10
9
4
5
8
6
B156D037.WMF
SM
LD Unit
Synchronization Detector
Synchronization Detector Mirror
Dust Shield Glass
3rd Mirror
Polygon Mirror Motor Unit
7. W-Toroidal lens (WTL)

8. F Lens
9. 1st Mirror
10. 2nd Mirror
11. Cylindrical Lens
6-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT

Speed
The polygon mirror motor rotates at about 21,024 rpm.
6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

The synchronization detector is on the rear side of the laser unit.
The synchronization detector simultaneously checks 2 laser beams.
6.8.4 LD UNIT
Two laser diodes in the LD unit emit 2 main-scan laser-beams. Having two lasers
speeds up image creation. It also allows the polygon motor to operate at a lower
speed, which cuts down noise emission and makes the motor last longer.
The LD unit does not need any adjustment when replaced.
B156/B220
6-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

Front Door
The LD safety switch is on the upper end of the front door. This switch is linked to
the following covers:
Front door
Right cover
The switch prevents laser emission if any of the above covers is opened (when, for
example, you remove jammed paper or replace a consumable).
Circuit
The LD safety switch is on the 5V circuit leading to the LD unit. Between the switch
and the unit, the line has 2 contacts on the front door and on the right door (series
circuit). When either of the covers is opened, the power supply is interrupted,
preventing laser emission.
BICU
PSU
+5V
+5V
5VLD
5VLDS
LDDR
LD
Control
IC
Detailed
Descriptions
Door SW
B156D500A.WMF
SM
6-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism

The front cover switch [A], right cover switch [B], and interlock switch [C] detect the
positions of the front and right covers. When either or both covers are open, the
message, Open Cover, appears with an illustration indicating which covers are
open.
The tables show the switch patterns and detected cover positions.
[A]
[B]
[C]
Front cover switch

Off
Right cover switch
On
Interlock switch
Off
Front cover open
Front cover switch
Off
Right cover switch
Off
Interlock switch
Off
Front and right covers open
[D]
B156D038.WMF
[E]
Front cover switch

On
Right cover switch
Off
Interlock switch
Off
Right cover open
B156D039.WMF
[A]: Front cover switch

[B]: Right cover switch
[C]: Interlock switch
[D]: Actuator (front cover)
[E]: Actuator (right cover)
B156/B220
6-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
2
B156D351.WMF
K: black, Y: yellow, C: cyan, M: magenta

6.
7.
8.
9.
Memory chip
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge agitators
Development agitator
Development unit
Toner supply roller

Development roller
Doctor roller
OPC belt
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
: Development Mono-component Development Double Development

Roller Process
The development units operate in the following order: K M C Y
SM
6-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

Replacing Units
Each new development-unit spare part contains an empty dummy toner cartridge.
The dummy toner cartridge does not have a memory chip.
When you replace the development unit with a new spare part development unit,
the machine cannot detect the toner cartridge because the dummy toner cartridge
does not contain a memory chip. But the toner cartridge in the used development
unit may still be usable. Because of this, remove the dummy toner cartridge from
the new development unit. Then install the toner cartridge from the old
development unit.
After you install the new development unit, do the SP mode for development
initialization (toner supply & process control) (SP3-929-001 to 004: Development
unit Replace).
Distinguishing the development unit with the one for the B051 series
Top line of caution decal on
the toner cartridge
Indication on the toner
cartridge holder
(development unit side)
This model
Black words on a white
background
B154 (BK only)
CMY development units have
the same indication as the
previous model (B051)
B051 series
White words on a black
background
B051 (BK, C, M, and Y)
Caution decal
Shows B154 for BK

dev units for this model
Shows B051 for a)
CMYK dev units for the
B051 series, and b)
CMY dev units for this
model)
B156R301.JPG
NOTE: B051 is shown on CMY development units for both models. But the units
are not interchangeable.
Memory chip
Each toner cartridge contains a memory chip, which contains information about
which machine it can be used in. If a toner cartridge for the B051 series is installed
in this machine, the machine will not detect the toner cartridge.
B156/B220
6-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

[A]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[H]
[I]
[E]
[J]
[D]
[N]
[L]
[K]
B156D301.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
Development motor for K, C

Development motor for Y, M
Development clutch
Lever
Cam (built into the gear)
Development roller gear
Development unit agitator
Doctor roller
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
[M]:
[N]:
Toner supply roller

Development roller
Toner cartridge agitators
Mylar sheet
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge agitator gear
Drive
Development motor [A, B] development clutch [C] development roller [F]
cam [E] lever [D] agitators [K].
Development motor [A, B] development clutch [C] development roller gear [F]
development roller [J]
SM
6-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[M]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Rollers and Agitators

Each toner cartridge contains two toner cartridge agitators [K]. They are equipped
with several mylar sheets [L], which agitate the toner and send it to the
development unit agitator [G]. The development unit agitator agitates the toner and
sends it to the toner supply roller [I].
Toner cartridge agitators [K]: Evenly mixes the toner in the cartridge, and
sends it to the development unit
Development agitator [G]:
Evenly mixes the toner in the development

unit, and sends it to the toner supply roller
Toner supply roller [I]:
Supplies the development roller with toner
Development roller [J]:
Transfers the toner to the OPC
Doctor roller [H]:
Regulates the amount of the toner on the

development roller
Shutter
Each toner cartridge has a shutter on its right side. The shutter is pushed open
when the cartridge is installed in the development unit, and closed when removed
from the unit.
B156/B220
6-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION

Mechanism
[B]
[A]: Optic fiber

[B]: Light emission
[C]: Gap
An optic fiber [A] in each development unit
except the one for black detects toner
end. Light is emitted from the rear end [B]
of the unit. There is a gap [C] in the optic
fiber.
When the development unit is filled with
toner, the toner breaks the light path
through the gap. When the unit is running
out of toner, the light path is not broken.
[C]
[A]
B156D303.WMF
Toner Near-End Detection

The machine uses two methods simultaneously: pixel count, and toner end sensor.
If either of these methods detects near-end, the machine indicates near-end.
Near-End by Pixel Count (K, C, M, and Y)
Near-End by Toner End Sensor (C, M, Y only)

If the toner end sensor output drops to toner end level, counter 1 is set to 1.
If the above condition (counter 1 is 1) is detected twice accumulated 14 seconds
while the development clutch is activated, counter 2 is set to 1.
If the above condition (counter 2 is 1) is detected twice continuously, the
machine enters the toner supply mode after the job.
The above detection is carried out while the development clutch is activated.
Toner supply mode after the job:
The development unit with the almost-empty cartridge idles for 40 s.
Then, it idles again for another 20 s.
During this 20 s period, the toner end sensor is checked every 10 ms. If a low
toner condition is detected twice or less during this 20 s period, the machine
returns to standby mode after idling all development units for 90 s.
However, if a low toner condition was detected third times or less during that 20 s
period, the machine indicates toner near-end.
SM
6-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The machine counts how many pixels have been printed with each toner cartridge.
When there are 500 prints remaining until the estimated toner end condition, toner
near-end is indicated.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Toner End Detection

When any one of the following conditions occurs, toner end is indicated.
1. If near-end was detected by pixel count:
The remaining pixel count reaches 0.
2. If near-end was detected by toner end sensor:
Either 100 developments or 100 prints at 5% coverage are made since nearend was detected.
3. If near-end was detected by pixel count, and later it was detected by toner end
sensor again before toner end:
Either the remaining pixel count reaches 0, or 100 developments or 100 prints
at 5% coverage are made since near-end by toner end sensor was detected.
Toner End Recovery

CMY
When the machine detects a new toner cartridge, it drives the development unit for
that cartridge for about 3 minutes.
During this time, the development clutch is repeatedly activated for 5 s and
deactivated for 1 s.
The machine checks the toner end condition every 20 s. The end and near-end
conditions are cleared if the sensor detects sufficient toner. However, if the sensor
does not detect sufficient toner after 5 minutes of development unit drive, the toner
end condition remains and a new cartridge must be added.
Bk
When the machine detects a new toner cartridge, it operates the development unit
as shown below. (This is the default setting. You can change it with SP 2-964.)
The development clutch is repeatedly turned on for 5 s and off for 1 s. This is
done for approximately 30 seconds.
Then, the development clutch is repeatedly turned on for 0.8 s and off for 0.8 s.
This is done for approximately 70 seconds.
Then, again, the development clutch is repeatedly turned on for 5 s and off for 1
s. This is done for approximately 30 seconds.
The second step (0.8 s on/0.8 s off) loads toner into the hopper quickly, but it
makes a lot of noise. Because of this, some customers could complain. Then, you
can change SP 2-964 from Quick mode (default setting) to Long mode (quiet).
SP 2-964 also has a Medium mode. This loads toner into the hopper more quickly.
It is also better than Quick Mode and Long mode to prevent dirty background that
occurs immediately after toner replacement. But it is estimated that Quick Mode
and Long mode will not cause this symptom often.
B156/B220
6-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
The three toner-end-recovery modes operate as shown in this table.

Toner End Recovery Procedure
5s on/1s off, for 30s 0.8s on/0.8s off, for 5s on/1s off, for 30s
70s
Approx. 3
minutes
Long (quiet)
On/off timing same as for normal printing

mode, for 360 s
5s on/1s off, for 15s
Approx. 7
minutes
Medium
0.8s on/0.8s off, for 285 s
5s on/1s off, for 50s
Approx. 6
minutes
Quick (default)
Total Time
The Total time column includes process control after cartridge replacement.
Detailed
Descriptions
If you change SP 2-964, the settings of SP 2-960-1 to -016 will change

automatically. Do not adjust SP 2-960 in the field. Only use SP 2-964.
SM
6-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM

Mechanism
Each development unit has an independent clutch. When a development clutch
turns on, a gear under the development unit moves the development unit into
contact with the OPC belt. When the clutch turns off, two springs (one at the front
and one at the rear) detach the development unit from the OPC belt.
Color Processes Color Development Fixed Position Development
Systems Similar to Example 2: Model G033
[B]
[A]
[A]: OPC belt

[B]: Development clutch
B156D040.WMF
B156/B220
6-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Reverse Rotation
The gears reverse every development to prevent toner from clumping. There are
two development motors in this model. While one motor is used to develop a color,
the other is used to clean another development unit. This parallel action reduces
the idle time.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Detailed
Descriptions
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
B156D300.WMF
SM
6-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE

[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
Development unit
Rear-side terminal
Development roller
Bias terminal
Harness terminal
High voltage supply
Doctor roller
[F]
[A]
[G]
B156D041.WMF
Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers

When a development unit [A] comes into contact with the OPC belt, the bias
terminal [D] comes into contact with the harness terminal [E]. Then, a negative
charge is supplied to the unit.
The negative charge on the doctor roller is the same size as the charge on the
development roller and toner supply roller.
Doctor Roller
The doctor roller [G] restricts the amount of toner on the development roller [C].
The high voltage supply [F] applies a charge to the doctor roller through the rearside terminal cable [B]. This charge is the same as the charge applied to the
development roller. However, the development roller charge is applied through a
different terminal [E].
Mono-component Development Toner Metering Blade (similar principle)
B156/B220
6-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.10 PAPER FEED

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
2
3
13
12
5
11
B156D042.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Registration roller
Path from duplex unit
By-pass tray
Friction pad with spring (Tray 1)
Friction pad with spring (Tray 2)
Path from optional paper tray
8. Base plate (Tray 1)

9. Base plate (Tray 2)
10. Paper end fence (Tray 2)
11. Tray 2
12. Tray 1
13. Paper end fence (Tray 1)
The table lists the main and optional paper stations.

Tray
Standard tray
By-pass tray
Paper tray unit
LCT
SM
Number
2
1
2
1
Main/Optional
Main unit
Optional unit
6-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
Transport Speed
Until the registration roller, the paper travels at 240 mm/s. This high initial speed
ensures that the first output time is as short as possible.
From the registration roller to the exit, the paper travels at the following speeds:
178 mm/s (plain paper)
89 mm/s (thick paper or OHP films)
Friction Pad
Handling Paper Paper Feed Paper Feed Methods Friction Pad
NOTE: Replace the roller and pad as a unit (not separately).
[A]
6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
Fusing unit motor

Registration clutch
Feed motor
Feed clutch
Feed roller
Idle roller
Registration roller
Paper
[B]
[I]
[C]
[H]
[D]
[G]
[E]
[F]
B156D043.WMF
Feed and Vertical Transport

The feed motor [C] drives the feed roller [E] and the vertical transport roller [F].
The action of the feed roller is controlled by the feed clutch [D].
Registration
The fusing unit motor [A] drives the registration roller [H], under the control of the
registration clutch [B].
The idle roller [G] facing the registration roller does not have any drive gears. It
turns with the paper [I].
B156/B220
6-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT

Lift Mechanism
The spring under the bottom plate [A] presses the plate upward. When you press
the bottom plate as far down as possible, the hook on lever [C] holds the plate. The
lever releases the bottom plate when it is pressed by the protruding part on the
right tray rail; this happens when the tray [B] is completely pushed into the machine.
[A]
[A]: Bottom plate

[B]: Tray
[C]: Lever
[C]
[B]
B156D044.WMF
Paper End/Near-End Detection

[B]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[C]
Paper near-end sensor

Paper near-end sensor feeler
Paper end sensor
Paper end sensor feeler
[D]
B156D045.WMF
The bottom plate gradually rises as paper is fed. The bottom plate position is
checked with the near-end sensor feeler [B]. The sensor [A] is actuated when
about 50 sheets are left in the tray, and the paper near-end message appears on
the operation panel.
When paper runs out, the paper end sensor feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the
bottom plate. This actuates the sensor [C], and the paper end message appears on
the operation panel.
SM
6-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

Mechanism
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
Tray set switch

Paper size switch
Paper size switch
Paper size switch
Actuator
Lever
End fence
[A]
[G]
B156D046.WMF
The end fence [G] moves the lever [F], which moves a different set of notches on
the actuator [E] into contact with the paper size switches [B][D].
When you put the tray in the main unit, the rear fence of the tray and the actuator
activate the switches; from this the machine detects the presence of the tray, and
the paper size.
Switch Pattern
When the tray is pushed into the machine, the leftmost switch [A] is always
activated by the rear fence of the tray; this switch detects the presence of the tray.
The combination of the other 3 switches [B][D] detects the paper size.
Auto Detection
North America
Europe/Asia
DLT SEF
A3 SEF
LG SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
LT SEF
B5 SEF
10.5" x 7.25" SEF
LT LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
(No tray)
* On: Pushed
Switch*
[A]
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
[B]
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
[C]
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
[D]
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off: Not pushed
NOTE: 1) For the input check table, 5.1.4.

2) Other paper sizes are not detected. Use the System Settings - Tray
Paper Settings - Tray Paper Size user tool to set paper sizes.
B156/B220
6-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
2
3
1
4
6
B156D401.WMF
Image transfer belt

Discharge plate
Separation lever
Spring
5.
6.
7.
8.
Paper transfer roller

Registration roller
Transfer belt sensor
Jammed Paper Release

When you open the right cover, the units release the paper. This mechanism helps
quickly clear paper jams.
Image Transfer and Paper Separation

Photocopying Processes Image Transfer and Paper Separation Transfer
Roller + Discharger Example 2: Models A172/A199
The current is adjusted for paper weight and environmental temperature/humidity.
A user tool (User Tools - System Settings - Tray Paper Settings - Paper Type)
specifies the paper weights. If Plain is selected, then another user tool (User
Tools - Maintenance - Plain Paper Type) defines when the paper is normal or >
90 g/m2, 24lb.
Plain means normal or > 90 g/m2, 24lb.
Thick means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
SM
6-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM

[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
B156D048.WMF
B156D047.WMF
[A]: Fusing unit motor

[B]: Half-turn clutch
[C]: Paper transfer solenoid
[D]: Contact/separation lever
[E]: Cam
Timing
When transferring toner to paper, the paper transfer roller unit contacts the image
transfer belt. At other times during printing, the unit stays away from the image
transfer belt. After printing, the unit contacts the belt and stays there.
NOTE: During standby mode, the unit stays away from the image transfer belt.
Mechanism
Fusing unit motor [A] Gear Paper transfer solenoid [C] Cam [E]
Contact/separation lever [D] Paper transfer roller unit movement
The fusing unit motor [A] drives the mechanism. (It also drives the paper transfer
roller).
The cam [E] is controlled by the half-turn clutch [B] and the paper transfer solenoid
[C].
When the solenoid is off, it catches a hook on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B].
As a result, the high point of the cam pushes the contact/separation lever [D], and
the paper transfer roller unit is away from the belt.
When the solenoid is activated, the hook is released, so the half-turn clutch makes
a half-turnthe unit moves to the right and contacts the image transfer belt.
B156/B220
6-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY

Circuit
High voltage supply [A] Terminal [B] Paper transfer roller shaft [C]
[C]
[B]
[E]
High voltage supply
Terminal
Paper transfer roller shaft
Temperature-humidity sensor
(inside the rear-right cover)
[E]: Discharge plate (negative
charge)
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[D]
[A]
B156D049.WMF
Paper Transfer Roller Bias

Normally, a constant current is applied to the paper transfer roller shaft [C].
The current varies with paper type, size, and thickness as well as humidity.
The discharge plate [E] discharges the remaining charge on the paper going past
the paper transfer roller. This helps the paper separate from the image transfer belt.
Temperature/Humidity Control
The temperature-humidity sensor [D] is inside the rear-right cover. The sensor
output is used to control the current for the paper transfer roller.
The temperature and humidity can be read with SP2-912.
SM
6-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Discharge Plate
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Roller Cleaning
The paper transfer roller is cleaned at the following times:
After the user clears a paper jam
After the user closes the front cover
Just after the main power has been switched on
After paper passes the paper transfer roller, the paper transfer solenoid releases
the paper transfer roller from the image transfer belt.
Then, a certain time after the trailing edge of the paper passes the registration
sensor, the following steps occur:
1) The paper transfer solenoid turns on again, and the paper transfer roller
contacts the image transfer belt.
2) A negative charge is applied to remove toner stuck to the paper transfer
roller.
3) Positive and negative charge is applied alternately to remove any toner that
is still stuck to the paper transfer roller.
Toner removed from the paper transfer roller goes back to the image transfer belt,
where it is removed by the image transfer belt cleaning unit.
B156/B220
6-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1
16
15
14
2
13
12
3
4
11
5
10
9
6
B156D050.WMF
Hot roller
Metal cleaning roller
Pressure roller
Pressure roller fusing lamp (350W)
Pressure roller thermistor
Heating roller thermistor
Thermostat
Heating roller fusing lamp (770W)
9. Heating roller
10. Fusing belt
11. Oil overflow sensor
12. Oiling roller
13. Oil supply roller
14. Fusing sponge roller
15. Spring roller
16. Metal cleaning roller
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The fusing unit divides into two subunits: the fusing subunit and the oil supply
subunit.
SM
6-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[I]
[D]
[H]
[E]
[G]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[F]
B156D051.WMF
Hot roller
Pressure roller gear
Cover disengagement gear
Fusing unit motor
Drive gear
Fusing belt
Heating roller
Oil supply roller
Oiling roller
The fusing unit motor [D] drives the fusing unit through gears [C] and [E].
The hot roller [A] turns the fusing belt [F] as a result of the friction between the two.
When the right cover is open, gear [C] moves away, which allows jammed paper to
be removed from the fusing unit and exit easily.
B156/B220
6-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
Fusing belt
Heating roller
Lamp (770 W)
Thermostat
Thermistor
Pressure roller
Lamp (350 W)
Thermistor
Thermofuse
Pawl
[D]
[E]
[A]
[J]
[I]
[H]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[G]
B156D052.WMF
Fusing Belt
This machine uses a fusing belt [A]. The paper goes between the fusing belt and
the pressure roller [F].
Heating Roller Lamp and Pressure Roller Lamp
Detailed
Descriptions
The heating roller lamp (770W) [C] and pressure roller lamp (350W) [G] give more
heat to the front and rear edge of the fusing belt and pressure roller. The lamps
give more heat to the front edge than the rear edge. This makes fusing better for
large paper (larger than B4). If the lamp is installed in the orientation, unsatisfactory
fusing and/or paper creasing can occur.
SM
6-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[G]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
High voltage supply

Terminal
Fusing belt
Hot roller
Heating roller
Pressure roller
Oiling roller
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[F]
B156D053.WMF
Fusing Bias
The high voltage supply [A] provides the fusing bias in a new fusing unit until 2K
prints are made. The fusing bias is a negative voltage that quenches static
electricity created on the belt [C] and rollers [D][F] in a new fusing unit by the
paper. This prevents the belt and rollers from attracting dust and dirt, which can
cause offset image in black areas and/or white spots in half tone images because
of toner attracted to the fusing belt.
After 2K prints, the static electricity is not very high. If the bias is applied to the
oiling roller, this can attract dust and dirt to the oil supply felt area. Because of this,
the bias is turned off after 2K prints.
With SP2-503, you can select the status of bias control (Always off, Always on, or
Auto [turns off after 2k prints]). After a new fusing unit is installed, fusing bias must
be applied during the first 2K prints. To do this, you must reset the PM counter of
the fusing unit with SP7-804-7, and fusing bias control will automatically switch on
(the machine uses the Auto setting).
SP2-501 shows the current status of fusing bias control. The setting is changed
from 1 (ON) to 0 (OFF) when 2K prints from the new unit are made or when SC420
is detected. At this time, the fusing bias is stopped.
Fusing Unit SCs

If a thermistor/thermostat problem occurs, a fusing unit SC may be displayed on
the operation panel. Fusing unit SCs disable the machine ( 4.1.1). To reset
fusing unit SCs, use SP5-810 ( 5.1.2).
B156/B220
6-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY

Oil Supply
Photocopying Processes Fusing Oil Supply
[B]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[C]
[E]
[A]
Oil tank
Air inlet
Oil pump
Oil pipe
Fusing unit
[D]
[F]
B156D054.WMF
[I]
[J]
[K]
[L]
[H]
[D]
Oil reservoir
Felt
Oil supply unit
Oil supply roller
Oiling roller
Fusing sponge roller
Metal cleaning roller
[F]
[G]
B156D055.WMF
The technician adds oil to the oil tank [A] in the bottom-left corner inside the rear
cover.
The oil pump [C] pumps oil along the oil pipe [D] to the oil reservoir [F] in the oil
supply unit.
The air inlet [B] equalizes the pressure inside the oil tank [A].
The oil goes to the fusing belt as follows:
Oil tank [A] Oil pipe [D] (oil pump [C]) Oil reservoir [F] Felt [G] Oil
supply roller [I] Oiling roller [J]
The fusing sponge roller [K] removes excess oil from the fusing belt. The metal
cleaning roller [L] removes foreign substances from the belt.
SM
6-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Oil Supply
[C]
[A]: Oil end sensor
[B]: Oil overflow sensor
[B]
[A]
B156D056.WMF
The oil end sensor [A] controls the supply of oil from the oil tank in the bottom of
the machine, via the oil pump, to the reservoir in the oil supply unit.
The oil end sensor detects oil by emitting a beam through the protruding part of the
tank bottom (the bottom is transparent).
When oil is detected, the pump does not supply oil up from the lower tank. So, the
reservoir is normally less than half full (maximum capacity: 70 grams).
When oil has been used up so that the level in the reservoir falls below the sensor,
the sensor detects oil end. Then, the oil pump turns on to pump oil up from the oil
tank, until the oil end sensor detects oil.
If the oil end sensor fails, the oil overflow sensor [B] detects when the reservoir is
full [C], and the pump stops (SC571 will be generated, and the machine must be
repaired). This failsafe measure prevents oil flooding inside the machine.
B156/B220
6-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Oil End Detection and Recovery
Detailed
Descriptions
If the oil tank at the bottom of the machine has no oil in it, the following occurs:
1) The oil pump operates for 50 milliseconds and waits for 150 milliseconds. If
the oil end condition still exists, this step is repeated. If the sensor still does
not detect oil, this step can be repeated up to 150 times (total maximum time
taken: 30 seconds).
2) If oil is still not detected, the pump stops for 30 seconds.
3) The oil pump repeats steps 1 and 2 until oil is detected. The pump can
repeat these steps up to 9 times. So, the machine can pump for up to 9
minutes if oil is not detected ([30 seconds + 30 seconds] x 9).
4) If oil is still not detected, the oil end counter starts. This counts the pages fed
through the fusing unit. Every 100 pages, the oil pump operates again for 50
seconds to try to get oil into the fusing unit.
5) When the counter goes up to 50, the operation panel indicates oil near end
(the counter is not reset).
6) When the counter goes up to 500, the code SC 570 appears on the display,
and printing stops.
7) To clear the oil end condition, a technician adds some oil to the oil tank in
the bottom of the machine and clears the SC code (this is a Level A code).
Then, the oil pump resumes steps 1 through 3.
NOTE: Do not switch the machine on with the fusing unit out of the machine
if an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and
the machine incorrectly detects oil.
8) If the oil end condition is cleared, the procedure ends. If not, the code SC
570 appears again.
SM
6-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

The table lists default settings and variable ranges for temperature control.
External temperature (*1)
Roller
Fusing idling start (*2)
Print ready (*3)
Ready (standby mode)
Energy saver
Normal
paper
>90 g/m2,
24 lb (*4)
Printing
Thick
OHP
Duplex (*5)
Variable range (*6)
Panel off 1
Panel off 2
Low power
mode
Auto off
mode
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
More than 15C ~

less than 30C
Heating
Press.
145
10
155
65
160
115
175
120
165
115
15C or lower
30C or higher
Heat.
150
Heat.
140
Press.
10
Press.
10
140
100
Room
temp.
155
160
165
170
165
170
165
175
150
155
100 ~
190
Room
temp.
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Heat.: +5
Adjustable with
SP1-105-27
Press.: +0
Adjustable with
SP1-105-28
Heat.: 5
Adjustable with
SP1-105-29
Press.: +0
Adjustable with
SP1-105-30
30 ~ 200
0 ~ +20
0 ~ 20
*1: External temperature is measured (temperature/humidity sensor) when the main switch is
turned on and when a job start signal is received.
*2: The pressure and heating rollers start idling.
*3: Fusing idling stops when both roller temperatures reach the print ready condition. The
printer can process jobs when the rollers reach this temperature during warm-up.
*4: A user tool (User Tools - System Settings - Tray Paper Settings - Paper Type) specifies the
paper type in each tray (plain, thick, or OHP). If plain is selected, then another user tool
(User Tools - Maintenance - Plain Paper Type) defines whether the paper in the tray is
normal or >90 g/m2, 24 lb. ( 5.1.2). >90 g/m2, 24 lb means greater than or equal to
90 g/m2, 24 lb.
Thick means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
*5: Both sides of the paper are processed with the same roller temperatures.
*6: Use SP1-105 to adjust the default fusing temperatures ( 5.1.2).
B156/B220
6-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview
Operation Sw. Off

-orAuto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 45 min.)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key ON

-orPanel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 60 s)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off

-orAuto Off Timer
Panel-Off Mode
Return Time Less Than 10s
Energy Saver Timer

(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off
-orAuto Off Timer
Low Power Mode
Return Time Less Than 30 s
Auto Off Mode

Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.
Printer Data in
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than 99 s
After Printing
Off Stand-by Mode
B156D903.WMF
This machine has three types of energy saver mode as follows.

1) Panel-off mode
2) Low power mode
3) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
Panel off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Panel Off
Timer
Energy saver timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings
Energy Saver Timer
Auto off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Auto Off
Timer
SM
6-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode
The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done.
The panel off timer runs out.
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.
If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the
energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode without going into
the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel off timer is
larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode effective, specify
a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and auto off timer.
What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at
the temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page, and the operation
panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power
LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the panel off mode is about 10 seconds.
Mode
Panel off
B156/B220
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Temperature
On
On
Heating roller: 165 C

Pressure roller: 115oC
+24V
System +5V
On
On
6-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Low Power Mode

Entering the low power mode
The machine enters the low power mode when the energy saver timer runs out.
What happens in low power mode

When the machine enters the low power mode, the fusing lamps are kept at the
temperatures indicated in the table, and the operation panel indicators are turned
off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the low power mode is about 30 seconds.
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Low power
On
On
Fusing Temperature
+24V
System +5V
Heating roller: 140oC

Pressure roller: 100oC
On
On
Detailed
Descriptions
Mode
SM
6-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machines condition when it
enters the Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following
is done.
The auto off timer runs out.
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.
Error or SC condition
Image data is stored in the memory
During memory TX or polling RX
The handset is off hook
An original is in the ADF
The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
return time is about 99 seconds.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Lamp
+24V
System +5V
Off
Stand-by
Off
Off
Off
(On when printing)
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
B156/B220
6-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Note
+5VE is
supplied
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
Interface gear
Pressure roller gear
Drive gear (fusing unit)
Cover disengagement gear
Fusing unit motor
Fusing exit sensor feeler
Turning direction of the
fusing exit sensor feeler
Fusing exit sensor
[I]
Paper exit sensor
Turning direction of the
paper exit sensor feeler
Paper exit sensor feeler
Paper
[A]
[K]
[L]
[B]
[C]
[J]
[G]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B156D057.WMF
[H]
Drive
Fusing unit motor [E] gear [D] fusing unit drive gear [C] pressure roller
gear [B] gear [A] exit rollers.
Paper Jam Detection

The fusing exit sensor [H] and the paper exit sensor [I] detect paper jams.
[A]
[B]
[D]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Feeler
Paper overflow sensor
Paper
Tray
[C]
B156D058.WMF
When the paper overflow sensor [B] is deactivated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height exceeded the limit and stops printing.
SM
6-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINT DATA PROCESSING
6.13 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

6.13.1 RPCS DRIVER
Host
ICM Engine/
ICMprofile
Profile
ICM
RGB
RPCS Driver
Matching
RCM profile
Printer
Engine
Controller
RGB
Corrected
RGB
CMYK
Gray
Correction
OR
UCR/BG
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits
Dithering & ROP
CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
B156D562.WMF
6.13.2 PCL5C DRIVER

Host
Printer
Engine
Controller
(Matching by Host)
RGB
RGB 8 bits
PCL Driver
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
RGB
Decode
&
Scale
8 bits
RGB
8 bits
Color
Matching
CMY
8 bits
BG/UCR,
CMY
8 bits
Negative Correction
Correction
Toner Limitation
CMY
1 bit
Dithering
&
ROP
CMYK
1 bit
B156D563.WMF
B156/B220
6-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.13.3 PS3 DRIVER
XYZ
Color
Matching
CMYK
8 bit
Fine
Fine Super
RGB
Vivid
Super Vivid
None
Gamma
XYZ
PS Driver
RGB
to
XYZ
BG/UCR
(RGB
Correction)
CMYK
CMYK
8 bit
CMYK
CMYK
Dither and RIP
CRD
Toner Limitation
CIE
to
XYZ
Gray Correction
CIE ABC
CMYK
1 bit
CMM/
ICC/ICM
Profile
B529D564.WMF
CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5e, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to Off.
Gray Correction
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
SM
6-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Gray correction processes gray with K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
Default: 180% for text, 250% for photo
Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts the 8-bit data to 1-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
RIP: Raster Image Processing
ROP: Raster Operation
B156/B220
6-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
6.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models, DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy and print jobs from the
document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this software-based
conversion was slow for many users.
So, for this machine, this conversion has been made hardware-based, using the
optional File Format Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print
jobs cannot be downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.
Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be
selected by the SP modes: JPEG, and TIFF.
Detailed
Descriptions
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files will be shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first
then converts it to PDF. Therefore, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened
with the File Format Converter.
SM
6-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.15 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

6.15.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY
A document scanned in the copier or scanner mode, or data sent from a printer
driver for printing, is stored temporarily on the hard disk of the machine. Even after
the copy or print job is completed, it remains in the hard disk as temporary data.
Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by writing over it.
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten

The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory
Data not overwritten by

Auto Erase Memory
Copier
Printer
Copy jobs
1) Print jobs
2) Sample Print/Locked Print jobs(*1)
3) Spool Printing jobs
Scanner(*2)
1) Scanned files sent by e-mail
2) Files sent by Scan to Folder
3) Documents sent or retrieved by using Web
Image Monitor, Desk Top Binder, Scan Router
Fax
PC fax print jobs, Internet fax transmission jobs
Document Server Temporary data that still remains in the
Document Server even after user erases the
data in the Document Server.
1) Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using the
Copier, Printer or Scanner functions
2) Information registered in the Address Book (*3)
3) Counters stored under each user code
4) Network setting
NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.
*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in
HDD, so TWAIN scanner functions can be used together with DOS
unit.
*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.
Overwrite timing
Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print and scanner job is completed.
Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.
If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is beign overwritten,
the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.
B156/B220
6-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT)
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
2 laser beam & dry electrostatic transfer system
Original Type:
Sheet/Book/object
Original Size:
Max: A3/11"x17"
Copy Paper Size:
Max:
Min:
Paper Weight
(excluding by-pass tray):
A3/11" x 17"
A6 SEF (100 x 148 mm)/8.5" x 5.5"
Width: 100 ~ 297 mm (3.9" ~ 11.5")
Custom size:
Length: 148 ~ 432 mm (5.8" ~ 17")
*Printable area is 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17").
64 to 163 g/m2, 16 lb. to 44 lb.
Printing Speed
(A4/8.5" x 11" LEF):
Model
TH-C1b
TH-C1c
Paper Capacity:
Color
Black & White
Color
Black & White
Plain
Paper
10 cpm
24 cpm
10 cpm
32 cpm
Thick
OHP
4 cpm
6.5 cpm
4 cpm
6.5 cpm
2 cpm
3.2 cpm
2 cpm
3.2 cpm
Main
250 sheets x 2 tray
Paper tray unit (Option) 500 sheets x 2 trays
By-pass (Option)
100 sheets
LCT (Option)
1,000 sheets x 2
*Maximum capacity is 2,600 sheets.
A4/LT or smaller:
B4 or larger:
Up to 500 sheets
Up to 250 sheets
First Copy Time

(A4/8.5" x 11" LEF):
Color:
Black & White:
18 seconds or less
7.8 seconds or less
Warming-up Time:
Approx. 99 seconds or less
No. of Continuous Copies:
1 to 100
Memory:
768 MB
Hard Disk:
40 GB
Reproduction Ratios:
5 Enlargement & 7 Reduction

A4/A3 version
400, 200, 141, 122,
115%
100%
93, 82, 75, 71, 65,
50, 25%
Enlargement
Full Size
Reduction
SM
7-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Copy Tray Capacity:
LT/DLT Version
400, 200 155, 129,
121%
100%
93, 85, 78, 73, 65,
50, 25%
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Zoom:
25% to 400% in 1% steps (Platen mode)

25% to 200% in 1% steps (ADF mode)
Scanning System:
3-line 1-chip CCD sensor (600 dpi)
Light Source:
1 xenon lamp
Photoconductor:
OPC belt
Charging:
Corona wire with grid plate
Print System:
Two laser beam, 600 dpi
Development System:
Mono component toner
Transfer:
Image transfer: Transfer belt with bias roller

Paper transfer: Roller
Separation:
Discharge pin
Fusing:
Heating rollers and fusing belt
Cleaning:
OPC belt: Blade

Image transfer belt: Cleaning brush
Quenching:
Lamp
Toner Supply:
Cartridge
Power Source:
NA
EU & Asia
Voltage
100 to 120 V
220 to 240 V
Power Consumption:
Frequency
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Mainframe only
Less than 1.5 kW
Less than 1.2 kW
Less than 200 W
5.7 W
Maximum:
Copying:
Stand-by:
Auto Off:
Amperage
12 A
8A
Full System
Less than 1.5 kW
Less than 1.3 kW
Less than 200 W
15.5 W
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge
Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Noise Emission:
Stand-by:
Copying:
Mainframe only
Less than 40 dB (A)
Less than 65 dB (A)
Full System
Less than 40 dB (A)
Less than 70 dB (A)
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge
Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Dimensions (W x D x H):
NA:
640 x 682 x 945 mm (25.2 x 26.85 x 37.2)
EU/CHN: 550 x 682 x 781 mm (21.65" x 26.85" x 30.74")
ASIA:
550 x 682 x 945 mm (21.65" x 26.85" x 37.2)
Weight:
NA:
Less than 106 kg (234 lb)
EU/CHN: Less than 88 kg (197 lb)
ASIA:
Less than 98 kg (220 lb)
B156/B220
7-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
2.1
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
13
14
12
11
10
9
7
B156V500.WMF
Specifications
SM
7-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Version
Copier
Fax
Printer/
Scanner
Machine
Code
B156
B220
B810
B484
B456
B457
B480
B510
B509
B490
Item
Base Machine
Base Machine
ARDF (Optional NOTE 1))
Platen Cover (Optional)
Paper Tray Unit (Optional)
LCT (Optional)
1-bin Tray (Optional)
Shift Tray (Optional)
Duplex Unit (Optional NOTE 1))
By-pass Tray (Optional NOTE
1))
Interchange Unit
(Optional NOTE 1))
Bridge Unit (Optional)
1000-sheet Finisher (Optional)
Adjustment Table (Optional)
500-sheet Finisher (Optional)
Key Counter Bracket (Optional)
Fax Option (Optional)
G3 Interface Unit (Optional)
Memory Unit (Optional)
Handset (Optional)
PS3 (Optional)
IEEE1394 (Optional)
IEEE1284 (Optional)
Wireless LAN (Optional)
Bluetooth
Media Link Board (Optional)
Data Overwrite Security Unit
(Optional)
No.
14
14
2
1
8
7
3
13
5
6
B481
B482
B408
B488
B458
B508
B750
B751
G578
B433
B769
B581
B679
G813
B736
B609
B735
12
10
9
11
Common
with
NOTE 2)
NOTE 2)
NOTE 2)
NOTE 2)
NOTE: 1) N. America: ARDF, Duplex Unit, By-pass Tray and Interchange Unit are
standard.
Asia (except China): ARDF is standard.
2) The color of the exterior is changed to blue.
B156/B220
7-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
[F]
[A]
I/F Card Slot

Format
A File
Converter
B Option
SD Card Slot
1 Option
2 Option
[B]
Service
[D]
[E]
[C]
B156I402.WMF
Machine
Code
Item
Remarks
USB 2.0:
Standard
Ethernet:
Standard
B609
IEEE 802.11b: [B]
G813
Bluetooth: [C]
B736
IEEE 1284: [D]
B679
IEEE 1394: [E]
B581
Hard Disk Drive
PostScript 3: [F]
B769
Data overwrite security unit: [F]
B735
SM
You can only install one of these at

the same time.
Standard
Specifications
File Format Converter: [A]
7-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
ARDF
Original Size:
Standard sizes
Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Double-sided mode: A3 to A4, DLT to LT
Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only)
Max. width 297 mm
Min. width 105 mm
Max. length 1,260 mm
Min. length 128 mm
Original Weight:
Single-sided mode: 52 to 128 g/m2, 14 to 34 lb

Double-sided mode: 52 to 105 g/m2, 14 to 28 lb
Table Capacity:
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Original Position:
Center
Separation:
FRR with feed belt
Original Transport:
Roller transport
Original Feed Order:
From the top original
Reproduction Range:
25 to 200 % (Sub scan direction only)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption:
50 W
550 x 470 x 110 mm
Weight:
10 kg
Bridge Unit
Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
52 g/m2 to 135 g/m2, 16 lb to 42 lb
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
413 x 435 x 126 mm
Weight
3.0 kg (6.6 lbs)
B156/B220
7-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
By-pass Tray Unit

Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm (3" to 12")
Length: 148 to 457.2 mm (5.83" to 18")
Paper Weight:
60 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 16 lb to 43.6 lb
310 x 380 x 275 mm
Weight:
3 kg (6.6 lbs)
Duplex Unit
Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Paper Weight:
64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 20 lb to 28 lb
Tray Capacity:
1 sheet
Power Consumption:
40 W
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V
90 x 495 x 452 mm
Weight:
6 kg
Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Paper Weight:
52 g/m2 to 135 g/m2, 16 lb to 36 lb
Power Consumption:
10 W
117 x 447 x 92 mm
Weight:
1.6 kg
SM
7-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Interchange Unit
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
LCT
Paper Size:
A4 sideways/LT sideways
Paper Weight:
60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2, 16 lb to 34 lb
Tray Capacity:
2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection:
5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
30 W (Max.)/25 W (Ave.)
Weight:
25 kg (55 lbs)
Size (W x D x H):
540 x 600 x 270 mm
Paper Tray Unit

Paper Feed System:
FRR
Paper Height Detection:
4 steps (100%, 50%, Near End, and Empty)
Capacity:
500 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight:
60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size:
A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source:
DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption:
Less than 30 W
540 x 600 x 270 mm
Weight:
25 kg (33 lb.)
Shift Tray Unit

Paper Size:
Standard Size:
A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
60 to 105 g/m, 16 to 28 lbs.
Tray Capacity:
125 sheets (80 g/m, 20 lbs.): B4 or larger

250 sheets (80 g/m, 20 lbs.): A4 or smaller
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
17 W
Weight:
1.1 kg
Size (W x D x H):
530 mm x 410 mm x 120 mm
B156/B220
7-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
1-Bin Tray Unit

Paper Size:
Standard Size:
A5 Lengthwise to A3
HLT Lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
60 ~ 105 g/m, 16 ~ 28 lbs.
Tray Capacity:
125 sheets (80 g/m, 20 lbs.)
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
0.5 W
Weight:
1.1 kg
Size (W x D x H):
530 mm x 435 mm x 120 mm
500-Sheet Finisher
A3, B4, A4, B5 sideways (Metric)
DLT, LG, LT (Inch)
Paper Weight
52 to 128 g/m2, 14 to 34 lb.
Staple Capacity:
30 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Stack Capacity
(Maximum):
500 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

250 sheets (A3, B4, DLT and LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Stapling Positions:
Staple Replenishment:
Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
40 W
Weight:
8.3 kg (18.4 lbs.)
350 x 490 x 230 mm

Specifications
Paper Size:
SM
7-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
1000-sheet Finisher
Upper Tray
Paper Size:
A3 to A6
DLT to HLT
Paper Weight:
60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb)
Paper Capacity:
250 sheets (A4 sideways/LT sideways or smaller: 80

g/m2, 20lb)
50 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Lower Tray
Paper Size:
No staple mode:
A3 to B5
DLT to HLT
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5
DLT to LT
Paper Weight:
No staple mode: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 42 lb)

Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Stapler Capacity:
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)

50 sheets (A4, B5 sideways, LT)
Paper Capacity:
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Staple mode:
(80 g/m2, 20 lb, number of sets)
Set Size
Size
A4/LT sideways
B5 sideways
A4/LT Lengthwise
A3, B4, DLT, LG
2 to 9
10 to 50
10 to 30
31 to 50
100
100 to 20
100 to 20
100
50
50 to 10
50 to 10
50 to 10
Staple positions:
1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear)

2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left)
Staple Replenishment:
Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
50 W
Weight:
25 kg (55.2 lbs)
527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1")
B156/B220
7-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1
1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 2
1.3 MOTORS...................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR.................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS........................................................................... 5
1.4.1 PREPARATION................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES..........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 11
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 13
DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16
Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 16
4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE................................................................................. 21
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN PCB

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 MAIN PCB

[A]
B408R109.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[B]
B408R110.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Side cover [A] ( x 2)
[B]
[C]
2. Open exit guide plate [B]

3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2)
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1)
[E]
5. Front cover [E]
[F]
6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out.
[J]
10. Bracket [J] ( x 2)

[H]
[G]
[I]
B408R114.WMF
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R123.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR

1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR

1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4, x 2)
3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4)
[A]
4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4)
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Main PCB (1.1)
2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2, x
1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

[A]
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover (1.2)
[B]
2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1)
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D].
[D]
6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR

1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x
1)
[A]
2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR

1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R119.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR

1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Shift
Staple
Content
Entrance sensor:
On check
Entrance sensor:
Off check
Lower tray exit sensor:
On check
Tray exit sensor:

Off check
Stapler tray entrance sensor:
On check
Stapler tray entrance sensor:

Off check

On check

Off check
B408
Jam
The entrance sensor does not turn on

within the normal time after the main
machine exit sensor turns on
The entrance sensor does not turn off
within the normal time after it turns on.
The lower tray exit sensor does not turn
on within the normal time after the
entrance sensor turns off.
The tray exit sensor does not turn off
within the normal time after it turns on.
The stapler tray entrance sensor does
not switch on within the normal time
after the entrance sensor switched on.
The staple tray entrance sensor does
not turn off within the normal time after it
turns on.
The lower exit sensor does not turn on
after the feed-out pawl feeds out the
outputs.
The lower exit sensor turns on when the
feed-out pawl returns to its home
position after feeding out the outputs.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
1
0
1
2
0
0
Description
Normal operation mode (Default)
Packing mode.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2
1
13
4
5
6
12
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B408
Upper Tray
Upper Tray Exit Roller
Entrance Roller
Tray Junction Gate
Upper Transport Roller
Stapler Junction Gate
Lower Transport Rollers
8. Stapler
9. Stack Feed-out Belt
10. Positioning Roller
11. Shift Roller
12. Lower Tray
13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
11
4
5
10
12
19
13
18
14
20
21
17
15
16
B408D103.WMF
1. Upper Cover Switch

2. Paper Limit Sensor
3. Entrance Sensor
4. Exit Guide Plate Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
6. Front Door Safety Switch
7. Stack Height Sensor
8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor
9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch
10. Shift HP Sensor
11. Shift Motor
SM
12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor

13. Positioning Roller Solenoid
14. Stapler HP Sensor
15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
17. Stapler Hammer Motor
18. Staple Sheet Sensor
19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
21. Staple Sensor
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
B408D102.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
22
32
31
30
29
28
27
23
26
25
24
B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid

23. Lower Tray Lift Motor
24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
25. Stapler Motor
26. Jogger Fence Motor
27. Stack Feed-out Motor
28. Main Board
29. Lower Transport Motor
30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
31. Exit Motor
32. Upper Transport Motor
B408
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
Name
Function
Upper
Transport
Lower
Transport
Jogger Fence
Staple Hammer
Stack Feed-out
Exit Guide Plate
Exit
Lower Tray Lift
Shift
Stapler
Drives the entrance roller and upper transport

rollers.
Drives the lower transport rollers and the
positioning roller.
Drives the jogger fences.
Drives the staple hammer.
Drives the stack feed-out belt.
Opens and closes the exit guide plate.
Drives the exit roller.
Moves the lower tray up or down.
Moves the shift roller from side to side.
Moves the stapler unit from side to side.
Entrance
Detects copy paper entering the finisher and

checks for misfeeds.
Detects when the paper stack height in the
upper tray is at its limit.
Detects when the jogger fence is at home
position.
Detects when the shift roller is at home position.
Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home
position.
Detects when the stapler is at home position.
Detects when the exit guide plate is at home
position.
Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and
checks for misfeeds.
Checks for misfeeds.
Detects the top of the copy paper stack.
Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit
position.
Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler
tray.
Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet.
Detects when the staple hammer is at home
position.
Detects whether there are staples in the staple
cartridge.
Index No.
32
29
26
17
27
4
31
23
11
25
Sensors
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
Paper Limit
Jogger Fence
HP
Shift HP
Stack Feed-out
Belt HP
Stapler HP
Exit Guide Plate
HP
Stapler Tray
Entrance
Lower Tray Exit
Stack Height
Lower Tray
Lower Limit
Stapler Tray
Paper
Staple Sheet
Stapler Rotation
HP
Staple
3
2
12
10
19
14
5
15
8
7
24
16
18
20
21
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SM
Tray Junction
Gate
Stapler Junction
Gate
Drives the tray junction gate.

Drives the stapler junction gate.
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
22
30
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
S1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Symbol
SOL3
Name
Positioning
Roller
Function
Moves the positioning roller.
Lower Tray
Upper Limit
Front Door
Safety
Upper Cover
Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit

position.
Cuts the dc power when the front door is
opened.
Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is
opened.
Main
Controls the finisher and communicates with the

copier/printer.
Index No.
13
Switches
SW1
SW2
SW3
9
6
1
PCBs
PCB1
B408
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
28
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

1
B408D106.WMF
B408D105.WMF
7
8
9
B408D107.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SM
Exit Motor
Upper Transport Motor
Lower Transport Motor
Shift Motor
Exit Guide Plate Motor
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lower Tray Lift Motor

Stack Feed-out Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode

The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray.
Sort/Stack Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid
remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly.
Staple Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

[G]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)
Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)
After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM

[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B408D110.WMF
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[E]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF
[B]
[F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE

[B] [C]
[A]
B408D111.WMF
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM

[B]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B408D116.WMF
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer.

The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the
stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at
the stapling position.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this.
The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism
returns to home position after each stack has been stapled.
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
B408
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
B408D117.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stackfeed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
PAPER TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
REAR COVER.............................................................................................. 1
PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 1
LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 2
PAPER FEED MOTOR ................................................................................ 2
CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................... 2
PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 3
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... 4
UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS................................ 4
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................5

2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 5
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 6
2.3 PAPER FEED............................................................................................... 7
Paper Feed Mechanism........................................................................... 7
Drive Path ................................................................................................ 7
2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 8
2.5 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE ............................ 9
2.6 PAPER LIFT ............................................................................................... 10
2.7 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION .................................................. 11
Paper Height Detection.......................................................................... 11
Paper End and Bottom Plate ................................................................. 12
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REAR COVER

CAUTION

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
: Clip ring
1.1 REAR COVER

1. Joint brackets [A] ( x 1 each)
[A]
[B]
B456R002.WMF
1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES
[A]
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)

2. Brackets [A][B] ( x 1)
[A]
3. Clutches [C][D] (1 bearing, x 1)

[C]
[B]
[D]
B456R008.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LIFT MOTORS
1.3 LIFT MOTORS

[A]
2. Lift motors [A][B] ( x 2, x 1)
[B]
B456R005.WMF
1.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,
x 3)
NOTE: Remove the motor with
its bracket, then
separate the motor from
the bracket.
[A]
B456R007.WMF
1.5 CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 2)
[A]
B456R006.WMF
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Vertical transport guide plate of the
copier [A] ( x 1)
[A]
[B]
B456R001.WMF
3. Paper feed clutch ( 1.2)

4. Gears [C], [D]
5. x 1 [E]
[C]
[E]
[C]
B456R003.WMF
6. Paper feed unit [F] ( x 2)
[F]
B456R004.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
2. Vertical transport guide plate of the

paper feed unit [B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1.7 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

1. Paper tray [A]
[B]
2. Pickup roller [B] (1 hook)

3. Paper feed roller [C] ( x 1)
[C]
4. Separation roller [D] ( x 1)
[D]
[A]
B456R009.WMF
1.8 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS

1. Paper feed unit ( 1.6)
[D] [E]
2. Relay sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
3. Relay sensor [B]

4. While pushing the release lever
[C], remove the following:
Upper limit sensor [D]
Paper end sensor [E].
[C]
B456R113.WMF
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
9
10
21
11
20
12
19
13
18
17
16
15
14
B456D001.WMF
12. Reverse roller

13. Paper guide
14. Tray lift arm
15. Lift arm shaft
16. Bottom plate
19. End plate
20. Tray
21. Copier

3. Paper height sensor 1
5. Pickup roller
6. Paper end sensor
7. Feed roller
8. Relay sensor
9. Relay roller
10. Idle roller
11. Right cover
NOTE: Listed above are the components of tray 1 (upper tray). Tray 2 (lower tray)
has the same components as tray 1.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

3
5
6
7
8
15
9
14
10
11
13
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B456D002.WMF
9. Paper feed clutch

10. Tray lift motor
12. Relay sensor
13. Anti-condensation heater (Optional)
Paper size switch 2

Paper size switch 1
Paper size switch 3
Paper size switch 4
Main board
Paper feed motor
Paper end sensor
Upper limit sensor
NOTE: Listed above are the components of tray 1 (upper tray), except for the right
cover switch and anti-condensation heater (there is only one each of these
for the entire unit). Tray 2 (lower tray) has the same components as tray 1.
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.3 PAPER FEED

[A]
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
B456D004.WMF
Paper Feed Mechanism

An FRR (feed and reverse roller) feed mechanism is used ( Paper Feed
Methods).
Drive Path
Tray 1 (upper tray) and tray 2 (lower tray) have identical paper feed systems. The
paper feed motor [A] drives all the rollers in the unit. The paper feed clutches [B]
control the pickup roller [E], paper feed roller [C], and reverse roller [D].
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[D]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
B456D007.WMF
Four paper size switches [C to F] detect paper size. They use the paper tray
actuator [A], which is linked with the end plate [B]. The table lists the combinations
of switch status and detected paper size.
Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF
B4 SEF
81/2" x 11" SEF
A4 SEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
B5 LEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
Switch Location
1 [C]
2 [D]
3 [E]
4 [F]
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1: Pushed, 0: Not pushed
NOTE: 1) Other paper sizes cannot be automatically detected. The user must
select them at the operation panel with a user tool.
2) The machine disables feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be
detected (when the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
2.5 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
[C]
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
[E]
[A]
[B]
B456D108.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
B456D109.WMF
The pickup roller and separation roller release the paper when it is not being fed.
This helps remove jammed paper easily.
When the paper tray [A] is not in the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from
the paper feed roller [C] and the pickup roller stays in its upper position.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E].
This causes the pickup roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of
paper, and causes the reverse roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed
roller.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER LIFT
2.6 PAPER LIFT

[B]
[A]
[C]
B456D005.WMF
The tray lift motor [C] raises/lowers the tray bottom plate [A] (via the coupling gear
[B]), based on the signals from the paper size switches, paper end sensor, and
upper limit sensor.
The motor starts to lift the plate when all of the following three conditions exist: any
of the paper size switches is pushed, the paper end sensor actuator is in the
sensor, and the upper limit sensor actuator is out of the sensor. The motor stops
lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor.
B456
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
2.7 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION

[B]
[C]
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
Paper Height Detection

[A]
[D]
B456D006.WMF
Two paper height sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray. The actuator [A]
on the lift arm shaft [D] turns counterclockwise, passing through the paper height
sensor 2 [C] and the paper height sensor 1 [B].
Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Paper height sensor 2 [C]

ON
OFF
OFF
Paper height sensor 1 [B]

ON
ON
OFF
On: Actuator inside sensor, Off: Actuator not inside sensor
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
Paper End and Bottom Plate
[A]
[B]
[C]
B456D106.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects paper end. When the paper is all used, the paper
end sensor feeler [B] drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate.
When paper end is detected, the tray lift motor ( 2.6) lowers the bottom plate.
B456
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 TRAY............................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 2
Paper Height Sensors of Paper Storage Side.......................................... 2
Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2 ............................................ 2
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE....................................................................... 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 3
1.5 TRAY MOTOR.............................................................................................. 4
1.6 MAIN BOARD............................................................................................... 4
1.7 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH ................................................................... 5
1.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 5
1.9 PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 6
1.10 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ....................................... 7
1.11 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END 1, AND RELAY SENSORS.......................... 7

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
SM
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 8

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 9
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 10
PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 11
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE...................... 12
TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 13
PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION ................................................................. 14
PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE .................................. 15
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT ................................................................... 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY

CAUTION
: Clip ring
Large
Capacity Tray
B457

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
1.1 TRAY
While pressing the stopper [A]
attached to the guide rail, pull out the
large capacity tray.
NOTE: When reinstalling the tray, set
the tray on the guide rail and
carefully push the tray in,
making sure to keep the tray
level.
[A]
B457R001.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SENSORS
1.2 SENSORS
[B]
Paper Height Sensors of Paper

Storage Side
[A]
[C]
1. Tray ( 1.1)
2. Rear fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 2)
4. Paper height sensors [C] ( x 2)
B457R002.WMF
Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2

5. Bottom cover [D] ( x 1)
[E]
[F]
6. Left fence HP sensor [E]
[D]
7. Paper end sensor 2 (paper

storage side) [F]
B457R003.WMF
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE

[A]
1. Fence screws [A through D]

2. Change the position of the fences.
[B]
[C]
[D]
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
NOTE: Before fastening the screws,

set paper in the tray.
B457R004.WMF
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Right cover [B] ( x 2)
[B]
[A]
B457R105.WMF
3. Tray lift motor [C] ( x 1 , x 3)
[C]
B457R005.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR
1.5 TRAY MOTOR

2. Tray motor [A] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B457R006.WMF
1.6 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board [A] ( x #, x 1)
[A]
B457R007.WMF
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1.7 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH

[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
2. Clutch bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Bushing [B]
4. Gear [C]
B457R008.WMF
1.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

2. Paper feed clutch bracket [A]
( x 1)
3. Bushing [B]
[A]
4. Paper feed clutch [C] ( x 1)
[C]
[B]
B457R009.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
5. Stack transport clutch [D]

( x 1)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.9 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Paper feed clutch ( 1.8)
2. Gears [A][B]
3. x 1 [C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B457R010.WMF
4. Open the vertical transport guide

plate [D].
5. Paper feed unit [E] ( x 2)
[E]
[D]
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457R011.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1.10 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

1. Tray ( 1.1)
[C]
[B]
2. Separation roller [A] ( x 1)

3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Pickup roller [C]
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[A]
B457R012.WMF
1.11 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END 1, AND RELAY

SENSORS
[D] [E]
1. Paper feed unit ( 1.9)
[B]
[A]
2. Relay sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Relay sensor [B]
4. While pushing the release lever
[C], remove the following:
Upper limit sensor [D]
Paper end sensor 1 [E] (paper
feed side)
[C]
B457R013.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
4
5
6
10
B457D001.WMF
1. Pickup Roller
7. Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3
2. Upper Limit Sensor
8. Lower Limit Sensor
3. Paper Feed Roller
9. Paper End Sensor 2
4. Relay Sensor
10. Paper Height Sensors 4,5
5. Relay Roller
6. Separation Roller
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

1
4
5
8
B457D002.WMF
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
17
10
11
12
16
13
15
14
B457D003.WMF
1. Main board
10. Paper height sensors 1, 2, 3
2. Tray sensor
11. Lower limit sensor
3. Stack transport clutch
12. Upper limit sensor
4. Tray motor
5. Paper feed clutch
14. Relay sensor
6. Tray lift motor
16. Left fence HP sensor
8. Paper size sensor
17. Paper height sensors 4, 5
9. Side fence sensor
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
Name
Function
Tray
Tray Lift
Drives all rollers.

Drives the paper tray up or down.
Paper End 1
(paper feed side)
Informs the copier/printer when the paper in

the right side (paper feed side) of the tray has
been used up. If there is a paper stack in the
left side (paper storage side), this is moved
into the paper feed side. If there is no paper
stack in the left side, paper end is indicated.
Detects the copy paper coming to the relay
roller and checks for misfeeds.
Detects when the paper is at the correct paper
feed height.
Detects when the tray is completely lowered,
to stop the LCT motor.
Detects the amount of paper remaining in the
right side of the tray.
Detects the amount of paper remaining in the
left side of the tray.
Detects when the left fence is at its home
position
Detects whether the tray is correctly set.
Detects whether the side fence is open or
closed. (The fence opens when the left-tray
paper stack is moving to the paper feed side.)
Detects whether the side fence is at the LT or
A4 position.
Informs the copier/printer when there is no
paper in the left side (paper storage side) of
the tray.
Index No.
4
6
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Relay
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
Paper Height 1, 2, 3
Paper Height 4, 5
Left Fence HP
Tray
Side Fence
S9
S10
S11
Paper Size
Paper End 2
(paper storage side)
Switches
SW1
Right Cover
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
Paper Feed
Stack Transport
MC2
13
14
12
11
10
17
16
2
9
8
15
Detects whether the right cover is open.
Drives the paper feed roller.

Drives the rear fence of the paper storage
side.
5
3
PCBs
PCB1
B457
Main
Controls the LCT and communicates with the

copier/printer.
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.4 PAPER FEED
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[A]
[B]
[C]
B457D005.WMF
This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

The paper feed unit consists of the pickup roller [A], paper feed roller [B],
separation roller [C], and relay rollers.
There is a torque limiter in the back of the separation roller (ferrite powder type).
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE
2.5 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER

RELEASE
[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
B457D008.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
B457D009.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C], and the pickup roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pickup roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
B457
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT
2.6 TRAY LIFT
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[B]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[C]
B457D010.WMF
[F]
B457D009.WMF
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray switch on the back turns
on and the tray lift motor [B] starts. The base plate lift shaft [C] is coupled to the lift
motor at the shaft [D], so the base plate [A] of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pickup roller and lifts it up. Then the motor
stops lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor (
2.2).
When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is gradually lowered, and the
actuator leaves the upper limit sensor [F]. When this happens, the lift motor begins
turning again. The tray will then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit
sensor again).
When the tray is removed from the copier, the coupling between the lift motor [B]
and base plate lift shaft [C] is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free
fall (using a damper [E] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION
2.7 PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION

The table lists the sensors that are used to detect
the amount of remaining paper.
Paper feed side

Paper storage side
Paper Storage Side
Paper Feed Side

Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper end sensor 1

Paper height sensors 1 to 3
Paper height sensors 4 and 5
Paper end sensor 2
Paper Height
Sensor 5
Paper Height
Sensor 2
Paper Height
Sensor 4
Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
The table shows the change of sensor patterns

after the storage side and the feed side are fully
loaded.
Storage
side
H4
H5
PE2
Feed
side
PE1
H1
H2
H3
B457D112.WMF
Indication
^ >
Remarks
When the paper

in the feed side is
The
all used, the base
base
plate returns to
As the paper in the feed
As the paper in the feed The LCT
plate is side is used, the base plate the bottom. The side is used, the base plate
is
at the
is lifted.
paper in the
is lifted.
empty.
bottom.
storage side is
carried to the feed
side.
PE12: Paper end sensor 12, H15: Paper height sensor 15,
: Actuated, :Not actuated
The table shows the change of sensor patterns after the storage side is half loaded
and the feed side is fully loaded.
Storage
side
H4
H5
PE2
Feed
side
PE1
H1
H2
H3
Indication
Remarks
^
>
When the paper in the feed

side is all used, the base
The
plate returns to the bottom. As the paper in
As the paper in the feed
The LCT
base
The paper in the storage the feed side is
plate is side is used, the base plate
is
side is carried to the feed used, the base
at the
is lifted.
empty.
plate is lifted.
side. The bottom plate is
bottom.
lifted until paper end
sensor 1 detects the paper.
PE12: Paper end sensor 12, H15: Paper height sensor 15,
B457
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
: Actuated, :Not actuated
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE
2.8 PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE

[A]
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[B]
[C]
B457D006.WMF
[E]
[D]
B457D007.WMF
The paper end sensor 1[A] detects when copy paper in the paper feed side runs
out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the feeler [B] and the actuator
enters the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and the actuator leaves
the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in the tray.
When the user puts back the tray, the lever [E] lowers the pickup roller and the
feeler. When, on the other hand, the tray is pulled out, the lever lifts the roller and
feeler.
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT
2.9 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT

[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B457D004.WMF
When the paper in the paper feed side is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack
transport clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from
the paper storage side to the paper feed side.
NOTE: During paper feed, the stack transport clutch ( 2.2) does not switch on,
so drive from the tray motor only transfers to the relay roller and not to the
fence mechanism.
While the stack is in motion, it pushes the side fence [D] aside, and the side fence
sensor [E] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved all the way across, a spring in the side fence
moves the side fence back, and the side fence sensor detects that the fence is
closed. Then, the tray motor reverses until end fence home position sensor [F] is
deactivated.
B457
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
500-SHEET FINISHER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 EXTERIOR ................................................................................................... 1
Front Cover.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT......................................... 4
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE ....................................................................... 5
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR/PADDLE ROLLER SOLENOID.......................... 5
1.5 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 6
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT .................................................................................. 6
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER ................................................................. 7
1.8 MAIN MOTOR .............................................................................................. 7
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR ........................................................................................ 8
1.10 CONTROL BOARD .................................................................................... 8
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT................................................................................. 9
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ....................................................... 10
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................... 10
Mechanical Component Layout ............................................................. 10
Drive Layout........................................................................................... 11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 12
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS................................. 13
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................... 14
2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM........................................................... 14
Stack Height Detection .......................................................................... 14
Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism ......................................................... 15
2.2.2 PAPER FEED.................................................................................... 16
Straight Feed Out Mode......................................................................... 16
Shift Sorting Mode ................................................................................. 17
Stapling Mode........................................................................................ 19
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS ............................................................................ 20
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION......................................................................... 20
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
1.1 EXTERIOR
[A]
B458R156.WMF
Pull out the lever [A] under the finisher while lifting the finisher off the machine.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
Front Cover
[A]: : Front cover ( x 1)
[A]
B458R101.WMF
Rear Cover
[B]: Rear cover ( x 1)
[B]
B458R102.WMF
Top Cover
[C]: Top cover (2 links)
[C]
B458R105.WMF
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
Front Lower Guide
[A]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458R116.WMF
[B]
B458R104.WMF
[A]: Output tray ( x 2)

[B]: Front lower guide ( x 2)
NOTE: 1) When re-attaching the lower guide, be sure that it is not in contact with
the exit lower guide and that the exit lower guide moves smoothly.
2) Make sure that the blue and black cables are in the correct position, as
engraved on the inside of the front lower guide.
Right Cover
[C]: Grounding plate ( x 1)
[D]: Right cover ( x 2)
[C]
[D]
B458R103.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT

[H]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B458R106.WMF
Front, rear, and top covers and front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Entrance upper guide ( x 2, x 1)
[B]: Paddle gear spring
[C]: Paddle gear ( x 1)
[D]: Paddle gear holder
[E]: Bushing ( x 1)
[F]: Paper exit unit holder ( x 1)
[G]: Rear paper exit unit holder ( x 1)
[H]: Exit unit
NOTE: Keep the paper exit unit stays in
the upper position. Rotate the
paddle roller into the position
shown in the illustration [a]. Then,
insert the paddle gear, making
sure that the pawl on the gears
outer frame is resting on the
clutch link [b].
[a]
[b]
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458R107.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE

[D]
Entrance upper guide ( 1.2 Entrance

upper guide/Exit unit)
Exit unit (1.2 Entrance upper guide/
Exit unit)
[A]: Release tension bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Reverse roller gear bracket ( x 2)
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Entrance lower guide
[A]
NOTE: When re-attaching the tension

bracket, rotate the main motor
counterclockwise to tighten the
timing belt.
[B]
[C]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458R108.WMF
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR/PADDLE ROLLER

SOLENOID
Front cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Gear bracket ( x 3)
[B]: Paper exit unit gear
[C]: Paddle roller solenoid ( x 1)
[C]
[B]
B458R109.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
1.5 STAPLER UNIT

Rear cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Stapler unit bracket ( x 2, x 1)
[B]: Stapler unit ( x 3)
[A]
[B]
B458R115.WMF
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT

Entrance upper guide and paper exit
unit ( 1.2 Entrance upper guide /
paper exit unit)
Entrance lower guide ( 1.2 Entrance
lower guide)
Paper exit unit gear and Paddle roller
solenoid ( 1.4 Paper exit unit gear/
Paddle roller solenoid)
Stapler unit ( 1.5 Stapler unit)
[A]: Jogger tray unit holders ( x 2)
[B]: Jogger tray unit ( x 1, x 3)
NOTE: Be sure to connect the black cable
to the paper exit sensor and the
blue one to the jogger home
position sensor.
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[A]
B458R110.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER

Jogger tray unit ( 1.6 Jogger tray unit)
Jogger motor ( 1.9 Jogger motor)
[A]: Paper exit sensor feeler
[A]
B458R121.WMF
1.8 MAIN MOTOR

Right cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Release tension bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Main motor ( x 2, x 1)
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[A]
[B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458R113.WMF
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER MOTOR
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR

Front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Jogger motor ( x 2, x 3)
[A]
B458R114.WMF
1.10 CONTROL BOARD

Front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Control board ( x 1, x 12)
B458R112.WMF
[A]
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OUTPUT TRAY UNIT
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT

[D]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B458R118.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458R117.WMF
[G]
[F]
B458R119.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
Output tray cover ( x 2)

Tray holder ( x 1)
Links
Connector cover
Output tray motor link unit ( x 1)
Rear cover ( x 1)
Output tray motor ( x 1)
NOTE: When re-attaching the motor link

unit, the arrows on each of the
gears need to face each other as
shown in the illustration.
B458R120.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Mechanical Component Layout
9
8
7
10
5
B458D101.WMF
B458
1. Output tray
6. Lower entrance guide
2. Stack height detection lever
7. Upper entrance guide
3. Paper exit roller
8. Paper exit unit
4. Jogger tray
9. Paddle roller
5. Reverse roller
10. Lower exit guide
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Drive Layout
7
2
B458D103.WMF
SM
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
1. Main motor
5. Output tray link gears
2. Exit roller timing belt
6. Paper exit unit drive gear
3. Main motor timing belt
7. Reverse roller
4. Output tray motor
8. Paper exit roller
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
7
11
10
B458D102.WMF
See the next page for the component description table.
B458
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
Name
Function
Index No.
Main
Jogger
Output Tray
Stapler
Drives all the rollers

Drives the jogger fence
Drives the tray up and down
Drives the stapler
6
9
12
16
Entrance
Exit
Stack height
Lever
Jogger home
position
Top cover
Tray upper limit
Detects paper at the entrance

Detects paper at the exit
Detects the top of the paper stack
Detects the position of stack height lever
Detects the position of the jogger fence
3
15
13
14
Detects if the top cover is open

Detects when the tray is lifted to the upper
limit
Detects when the tray is at its lowest limit
(almost full)
Stack near-limit
11
10
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
Symbols
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
Exit unit gear

Paddle roller
Stack height lever
Moves the paper exit unit up and down

Switches paddle roller rotation on and off.
Moves the stack height lever into contact
with the top of the stack.
Switches
SW1
SW2
Paper exit unit

Staple unit cover
Switches DC for the stapler unit on and off.

Cuts DC when staple unit cover is open.
18
17
PCBs
PCB1
Main control
Controls all finisher functions
SOL3
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
5
8
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM
Stack Height Detection
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B458D104.WMF
Stack height detection lever [A]: Driven by stack height lever solenoid [B].
Two sensors detect the height of the stack in the output tray: the stack height [C]
and lever [D] sensors.
Stack height
sensor
Lever sensor
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Status
The stack height is below the target. The output tray is
then lifted to the target position.
Target stack height position
The stack height is above the target. The output tray is
then lowered to the target position.
The stack height detection lever is at home position.
Off: Actuator not in sensor
At the start of a print job, the solenoid turns off. The stack height detection lever
comes down, to detect the current stack level.
When a sheet of paper is being fed out, the solenoid turns on and the lever goes
back up to home position (inside the unit).
After paper has been fed out, the solenoid turns on again, and the lever detects the
level of the stack.
B458
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism
[D]
[E]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[B]
[A]
[C]
B458D105.WMF
Overview
The output tray motor gear [A] lifts/lowers the tray if the stack height is not at the
target position.
Gears [B] and [C] keep the angle of the tray constant at any tray position.
Output Tray Downward Movement

The top of the paper stack is checked after every page (or set of pages) has been
fed out. If the top of the stack is higher than the target level, the output tray motor
moves the tray down.
When the stack near-limit sensor [D] detects the actuator on gear [C], a stack nearlimit signal is transferred to the main frame. The tray cannot move any lower. The
next time the top of the stack height is above the target level, printing stops.
Output Tray Upward Movement

If paper is removed from the stack, the top of the stack will be lower than the target
level, and the output tray motor moves the tray up.
When the tray upper limit sensor [E] detects the actuator on gear [B], the tray
cannot be moved up any more, so the motor stops.
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.2.2 PAPER FEED

Straight Feed Out Mode
[A]
[F]
[H]
[J]
[E]
[I]
[G]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[C]
B458D109.WMF
B458D106.WMF
Before the job, the exit unit [A] is up, and the exit unit gear solenoid [B] is on,
pulling lever [C] away from the exit unit gear [D].
At the start of the job, the stack height detection lever detects the top of the stack.
The tray moves up or down if the top of the stack is not at the correct level.
When the paper exit sensor in the main frame turns on, the finisher main motor
starts. It drives the exit unit gear [D] through idle gear [E]. The gear pulls paper exit
unit [A] down, using the paper exit link [F]. The link also moves the paper exit roller
[H] up through the exit roller drive gear [G].
When the motor starts, the solenoid switches off and a spring pushes lever [C] into
contact with the exit unit gear [D].
When a part of the exit unit gear without threads [I] faces the idle gear, the gear
stops turning (see the left-hand diagram). The lever [C] catches a peg on the exit
unit gear, to make sure that it stops at the correct position. The paper exit rollers
[H] now contact each other and the main motor feeds out the paper.
When the last page has been fed out, the solenoid turns on to pull the lever away
from the gear. The gear starts turning, to lift the exit unit to the standby position.
When the other part of the exit unit gear without threads [J] faces the idle gear, the
exit unit gear stops. Then, the main motor stops and the solenoid turns off.
B458
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Shift Sorting Mode

[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458D111.WMF
[E]
[F]
B458D113.WMF
At the start of the job, and for odd numbered sets of copies, the mechanism is the
same as the straight feed out mode. However, even numbered sets are fed back to
the jogger tray, which shifts the sets to one side before feeding them out.
This section describes what happens for even-numbered sets (sets 2, 4, 6 etc) of
the job.
A short time after the entrance sensor [A] detects the first page of the set, the
paper exit unit solenoid turns on to restart the rotation of the paper exit unit gear,
raising the paper exit unit to the standby position. It stays there until after the last
page of the set.
The paper cannot feed out (because the feed rollers are not contacting each other),
so it drops into the jogger tray [B]. The paddle roller solenoid [C] turns on and the
paddle roller [D] feeds the paper to the reverse roller [E]. The reverse roller feeds
the paper to the end fence [F] of the jogger tray.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B458D107.WMF
After the paper reaches the end fence [A], the jogger fence [B] shifts the paper
across. The jogger motor [C] drives the jogger fence. The home position sensor [D]
detects when the jogger fence has returned to home position.
When the next set begins, the paper exit unit moves down, and the machine
operates the same way as straight feed out mode. At this time, the entire set in the
jogger tray is fed out at the same time as the first page of the next set. However,
the set coming from the jogger tray has been shifted to one side.
If the last set is an even-numbered set, the paper exit unit must be pulled down to
feed the final set out of the jogger tray. Then the exit unit moves back up to the
standby position.
The capacity of the jogger tray is 30 sheets. If the set contains more than 30 sheets,
the machine feeds out the first 30 from the jogger tray, then continues with the rest
of the set, using the jogger tray.
B458
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Stapling Mode
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B458D112.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[B]
B458D114.WMF
[A]
[G]
B458D106.WMF
The stapler is attached to the jogger tray, so all sets go to the jogger tray.
After all pages of a set have entered the jogger tray and been shifted across, the
paper exit link [A] pulls the paper exit unit [B] down until knob [C] on the exit unit
pushes the link lever [D] for the exit unit switch [E]. This turns on the exit unit switch.
When this switch is on, dc is supplied to the stapler unit [F] and the main motor is
turned off.
The exit unit switch is activated when the exit unit is pulled part-way down. After
stapling the set of prints, the paper exit unit is pulled down again until the unit
comes in contact with the paper exit roller [G], and the stapled set is fed out.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS

Remaining paper detection
Sensors
Entrance
Exit
Conditions
Either the entrance or exit sensor detects
paper just after the unit is initialized.
The entrance sensor is not activated within a
certain period after the paper exit sensor
detects paper.
The entrance sensor is not de-activated after
paper is fed 1.3 times the length of the
paper.
The exit sensor is not activated within a
certain period after the entrance sensor
detects paper.
The exit sensor is not de-activated after
paper is fed for a certain period.
The exit sensor is de-activated during paper
shifting or stapling.
Non-feed at the entrance

Entrance
Jamming at the entrance
Entrance
Non-feed inside the unit
(Straight feed out mode only)
Exit
Jamming at the exit
Exit
Jogger tray
Exit
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION

Jogger motor error
Jogger motor home position
detection error
Stapler error
Output tray upper limit error
Output tray motor error
Stack height detection error
Conditions
The jogger home position sensor does not shut off after the
jogger motor starts.
The jogger home position sensor does not turn on after
paper shifting.
The stapler home position sensor (inside the stapler unit)
does not turn on after stapling.
The tray upper limit sensor is activated.
The output tray is away from the target position for more
than 10 seconds.
The stack height detection lever does not return to its home
position before going to detect the stack height.
NOTE: The above errors are indicated as Finisher jam at the first occurrence.
If the same error happens again in the next job, finisher error is indicated.
B458
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
1-BIN TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL....................................................................... 1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION .............................................................2

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SM

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 3
BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
1-Bin Tray
Unit
B480
B480R101.WMF
1. 1-bin tray
2. 1-bin sorter unit [A]
3. Paper sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
B480D500.WMF
6
5
B480D501.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B480
Exit Rollers
Junction Gate Gear
Drive Gear
Paper Tray
Paper Sensor
Junction Gate (Interchange Unit)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
2
B480D004.WMF
1. Paper Sensor
2. 1-bin Sorter Exit Tray LED
(located in the copier)

Name
Function
Index No.
Paper
Detects whether there is paper on the tray.
1 Bin Exit Tray
Indicates when there is paper in the tray. This is

located in the copier.
LEDs
LED1
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
1-Bin Tray
Unit
B480
Symbol
Sensors
S1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BASIC OPERATION
2.4 BASIC OPERATION

[B]
[C]
[A]
B480D502.WMF
[C]
[D]
B480D004.WMF
At the appropriate time after the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper
reaches the copiers registration roller, the junction gate solenoid [A] in the
interchange unit turns on to switch the junction gate to direct the paper to the tray
[B].
The junction gate solenoid turns off at the appropriate time after the paper is
directed to the tray. The main motor in the copier stops after the final sheet passes
the paper sensor [C] and arrives on the tray.
The paper sensor [C] turns on when there is paper in the tray, and the paper
indicator [D] turns on.
The tray can be opened for easier jam removal by swinging the tray to the left.
B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
INTERCHANGE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION .............................................................2

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT ................................... 3
2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 4
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge
Unit, or the Finisher) ................................................................................ 4
To the 1-bin Tray...................................................................................... 4
To the Duplex Unit ................................................................................... 4
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Interchange
Unit
B481
[A]
[B]
B481R001.WMF
1. Interchange unit
2. Upper cover [A] of the interchange unit
3. Exit sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2
1
4
5
7
B481D001.WMF
1. 1-bin Tray (Option)

2. Exit Sensor
3. Duplex Junction Gate
4. Duplex Unit (Option)
5. Exit Junction Gate
6. Fusing Unit (Inside the Copier)
7. Exit Roller
8. Bridge Unit
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT

2
5
4
Interchange
Unit
B481
B481D503.WMF
B481R554.WMF
1. Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
4. Exit Roller
2. Exit Sensor
5. Drive Gear
3. Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM

[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B481D504.WMF
[F]
[E]
[A]
[G]
[B]
B481D003.WMF
[A]
B481D002.WMF
Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up, left, or right by the
exit junction gate [A] and the duplex junction gate [B]. These are controlled by the
exit junction gate solenoid [C] and the duplex junction gate solenoid [D].
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge
Unit, or the Finisher)
The exit junction gate solenoid stays off and the paper is directed to the copier exit
or bridge unit [E].
To the 1-bin Tray

The exit junction gate solenoid turns on and the duplex junction gate solenoid stays
off. The paper is directed to the 1-bin tray [F].
To the Duplex Unit
The exit junction gate solenoid and the duplex junction gate solenoid both turn on
and the paper is directed to the duplex unit [G].
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
BRIDGE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT B482

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ........................................ 1
1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ....................................................... 2
1.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............................................................. 2

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
SM

DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 4
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 6
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B482R103.WMF
NOTE: When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
1. Bridge unit ( Installation Procedure in the base copier manual)
Bridge Unit
B482
3. Bridge unit drive motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[C]
[B]
B482R104.WMF

3. Paper tray [A]
4. Exit guide [B] ( x 2)
5. Tray exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
1.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
B482R102.WMF

2. Stand the bridge unit up as shown in the illustration and remove the sensor [A].
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10
1
2
B482D500.WMF
6. 2nd Transport Roller
2. Tray Exit Sensor
7. 3rd Transport Roller
3. Junction Gate
8. Left Exit Roller
4. Cooling Fan
9. Relay Sensor
5. 1st Transport Roller
10. Paper Tray
Bridge Unit
B482
1. Upper Exit Roller
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

5
4
2
B482D502.WMF
1. Left Exit Roller

4. Upper Exit Roller
5. 3rd Transport Roller
Bridge Unit Drive Motor
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

5
6
7
4
3
2
8
B482D501.WMF
5. Cooling Fan Motor
2. Right Guide Switch
6. Relay Sensor
3. Junction Gate Solenoid
7. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
4. Tray Exit Sensor
8. Bridge Unit Control Board
Bridge Unit
B482
1. Left Guide Switch
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
Name
Function
Index No.
Cooling Fan
Drive Motor
Cools the transport unit.

Drives the bridge unit.
5
7
Sensors
S1
S2
Tray Exit
Relay

4
6
Switches
SW2
SW3
Right Guide
Left Guide
Detects when the right guide is opened.

Detects when the left guide is opened.
2
1
Junction Gate
Moves the junction gate to direct the paper

to the upper tray (on top of the bridge unit)
or to the finisher.
Solenoids
SOL1
PCBs
PCB1
B482
Bridge Unit Control

Board
Controls the bridge unit.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM

[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B482D104.WMF
The junction gate [B] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper
tray (on top of the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been
selected.
Bridge Unit
B482
If the junction gate solenoid [A] has been activated, the junction gate [B] points
downward and directs the paper to the upper tray [D] (dotted line path in
illustration). When the solenoid is off, the junction gate points upward and the
paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and left exit rollers (solid line).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
PICKUP/FEED ROLLER .............................................................................. 1

PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 2
REVERSE ROLLER ..................................................................................... 2
PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD................................................................... 3

2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 DRIVE.................................................................................................. 5
Power Source .......................................................................................... 5
Rollers...................................................................................................... 5
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ............................................................... 6
Pickup Roller Mechanism ........................................................................ 6
Paper End Detection................................................................................ 6
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 7
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP/FEED ROLLER

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 PICKUP/FEED ROLLER

1. Bypass tray ( x 3)
[A]
2. Upper cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Lift the paper end sensor feeler

[B].
[C]
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)

5. Paper feed roller [D] ( x 1)
[D]
[B]
B490R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
B490R101.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1. Upper cover ( 1.1)
[D]

3. Gear holder [B] ( x 3)
[B]
4. Gears [C][D]
[C]
[A]
B490R153.WMF
5. Clutch [E] ( x 1)
[E]
B490R104.WMF
1.3 REVERSE ROLLER

1. Bypass tray ( 1.1)
[A]
2. Turn the unit upside down.

3. Bottom cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Reverse roller [B] ( x 1)
Bottom of unit
Top of unit
[B]
B490R105.WMF
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD
1.4 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD

1. Paper tray [A] ( x 2)
[A]

[B]
B490R001.WMF
3. Paper size sensor board [C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
B490R002.WMF
Reassembling
1. Move the side fences to the centermost positions [D].
2. Align the sensor-board position mark [E] with the side-fence position mark [F]
and install the sensor board.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
2
3
15
4
5
6
14
13
12
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B490
7
10
8
B490D101.WMF
9. Reverse roller
10. Paper path (optional paper tray)
11. Paper path (bypass tray)
12. Friction pad (copier)
13. Feed roller (copier)
14. Vertical transport roller (copier)
15. Registration sensor (copier)
Registration roller (copier)

Registration guide
Paper end sensor
Feeler link
Pickup roller
Side fence
Bypass tray
Feed roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.2 PAPER FEED

2.2.1 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B490D103.WMF
Power Source
The paper feed motor [A] inside the copier drives all the rollers and gears in the
bypass tray unit by way of a timing belt and gears. The transport roller gear [F] (in
the copier) contacts the leftmost gear [B] (in the bypass unit).
An FRR (feed and reverse roller) feed mechanism is used ( Paper Feed
Methods). The pickup roller [D] and feed roller [E] turn only when the clutch [C]
transmits the drive power.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
Rollers
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B490D104.WMF
Pickup Roller Mechanism

When paper is not being fed, the pickup roller [B] stays away from the paper stack.
When paper feed starts, the pickup solenoid [A] turns on and lowers the pickup
roller by way of a mechanical link.
Paper End Detection

When the paper on the tray is all used, the feeler [C] falls into the cutout. This
action is detected by the paper end sensor [D] by way of a mechanical link.
The paper end sensor also functions as a paper set sensor.
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B490D554.WMF
The side fences [A] are mechanically linked with the gear on the paper size sensor
board [B]. The gear turns when the fences are moved. The gear has terminals
which make different electric circuits when the gear is turned, so the machine
determines the width of the paper in the by-pass tray by the signals from the paper
size sensor board.
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
The paper length is not detected by this sensor (see Original Size Detection in the
manual for the base copier).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
DUPLEX UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT B509

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
EXTERIOR COVER ..................................................................................... 1

ENTRANCE/EXIT SENSORS ...................................................................... 1
INVERTER MOTOR ..................................................................................... 2
CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................... 2
TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................................. 2

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 3
DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER.................................................................. 6
2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF................................................................. 6
2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF................................................................................ 7
2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM ............................................................................. 8
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVER

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
[A]
B509R101.WMF
1.2 ENTRANCE/EXIT SENSORS

1. Exterior cover ( 1.1)
[A]
[B]
Entrance Sensor
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
[C]
3. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1, x

1)
Exit Sensor
4. Exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
B509R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
Duplex Unit
B509
1. Exterior cover [A] ( x 4)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INVERTER MOTOR
1.3 INVERTER MOTOR

2. Inverter motor [A] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B509R103.WMF
1.4 CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Controller board [A] ( x 5, x 3)
[A]
1.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR
B509R104.WMF

2. Controller board ( 1.4)
3. Transport motor [A] (1 spring, x 1, x 2)
[A]
B509R105.WMF
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
3
5
8
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D101.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
SM
Interchange unit
Paper entrance
Inverter gate
Entrance sensor
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inverter roller
Inverter section
Exit sensor
Paper exit path
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
B509D102.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
B509
Entrance sensor
Duplex unit open switch
Inverter gate solenoid
Cover sensor
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inverter motor
Controller board
Transport motor
Exit sensor
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D103.WMF
1. Inverter motor
2. Transport motor
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER
2.4 DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER

2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF
The feed path through the duplex unit can only hold one sheet of paper.
The example below shows how the paper is handled to print out 8 pages in mono
color mode: The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if shaded, this
indicates the second side).
[A]
[B]
B509D519.WMF
B509D518.WMF
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER
2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF

The feed path through the duplex unit can hold 2 sheets of paper
The example below shows how the paper is handled to print out 8 pages in mono
color mode: The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of print paper (if shaded,
this indicates the second side).
[A]
[B]
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D520.WMF
B509D517.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REVERSE MECHANISM
2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM

[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[G]
[C]
[H]
B509D104.WMF
The duplex unit starts when the entrance sensor [E] detects paper coming in.
1. Duplex junction gate [A] in the interchange unit
Directs the paper to the duplex unit (up to A3 SEF)
2. Inverter roller [B]
Sends the paper to the inverter section [C]
3. Entrance sensor [E]
Detects the trailing edge of the paper
4. Inverter gate solenoid (behind [D])
Activates the inverter gate [D]
5. Inverter gate [D]
Switches the paper path
6. Inverter roller [F]
Changes its rotation direction (sends the paper to the exit path [G])
7. Transport roller [H]
Sends the paper to the main unit registration roller
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
SHIFT TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 1
1.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL................................................................... 1
1.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT............................................................ 1
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................... 2
1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR ....................................................... 2
1.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR........................................... 2

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................... 3
2.2 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 4
2.3 PRIMARY MECHANISMS ............................................................................ 5
2.3.1 TRAY SHIFT........................................................................................ 5
2.3.2 HALF TURN DETECTION................................................................... 6
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT

[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B510R151.WMF
1.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL

1. Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of
the cover.
1.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT

NOTE: The right side of the tray cover should be attached first.
2. Align the square [E] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray
cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
3. Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
Shift Tray
Unit
B510
1. Fit the pawls [C] (just below the cover fin) around the thin bar [D] on the shift
tray.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR

REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B510R101.WMF
1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR

1. Slip disc [A]
2. Tray motor [B] ( x 1)
1.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR

1. Half turn sensor [C] ( x 1).
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
3
4
B510D151.WMF
4
B510D102.WMF
1. Half Turn Sensor

2. Tray Cover
3. Slip Disc
4. Tray Motor
Shift Tray
Unit
B510
5. Driver PCB
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BASIC OPERATION
2.2 BASIC OPERATION

[A]
B510D500.WMF
The shift tray allows copies to be sorted into separate piles on one tray.
From the left-right movement of the tray cover [A], the piles of copies are offset into
two positions, slightly overlapping one another.
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
2.3 PRIMARY MECHANISMS

2.3.1 TRAY SHIFT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B510D101.WMF
As stated above, the shift tray [A] moves from left to right to create two possible
positions for the copies to stack up. This motion is driven by the tray motor [B],
which connects to the slip disc [C] via a small shaft. The shaft is connected at the
rotational center of the disc. However, there is an off-centered white square
attached to the top surface of the disc. When the tray cover is attached to the unit,
this square fits into a groove [D] (approximately equal to its width) that runs
lengthwise along the underside of the tray.
Shift Tray
Unit
B510
When the motor is running, the disc rotation causes the off-centered white square
to change position. The square only has freedom of movement along the groove
[D], so the only net motion of the tray is from left to right.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
2.3.2 HALF TURN DETECTION
[C]
[A]
[B]
B510D101.WMF
Half turn detection is performed through a combination of two components: the slip
disc [A] and half turn sensor [C].
The slip disc has a rim extending below the top surface. However, the rim only
extends 180 around the disc. The half turn sensor is below the edge of the disc,
opposite the tray motor. The sensor is positioned so that the rim of the disc passes
between the LED and the photodiode when the disc turns.
While the motor [B] is rotating the disc and moving the tray cover, the disc rim is
not between the diode and LED. After the disc has turned its maximum 180, the
rim passes between these two parts and blocks the signal to the LED, stopping the
motor. The tray stays in place until the motor is activated again to move the tray
across to receive another copy of the original.
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
FAX OPTION TYPE 3232
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX OPTION B750

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 FAX UNIT (B750) ......................................................................................... 1
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 1
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 2
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS .................................................................................... 7
1.2.1 G3 INTERFACE UNIT ......................................................................... 7
Accessory check ...................................................................................... 7
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 8
1.2.2 EXPANSION MEMORY..................................................................... 15
1.2.3 HANDSET ......................................................................................... 16
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................17

2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT............................................. 17
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................18
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 18
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 30
3.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 33
3.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 33
3.3.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 33
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 34
4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................35
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 35
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 35
Entering and Exiting SP Mode ............................................................... 35
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 36
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 37
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 37
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................. 38
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 44
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 44
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 54
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 60
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 66
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 74
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 81
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 87
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 87
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 87
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 93
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ....................................... 102
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..................................................... 102
4.4.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 103
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 106
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................115

5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 115
5.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 116
5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 116
5.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 117
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD.................................................................................... 118
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 119
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 119
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 120
Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 120
JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 120
Adjustments ......................................................................................... 120
5.3.2 RECEPTION.................................................................................... 121
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 122
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT................................................................................... 122
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 123
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 124
Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 124
Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 125
Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 127
Secure Internet Reception ................................................................... 127
Transfer Request ................................................................................. 128
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 129
Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 129
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 129
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 129
E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 130
Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 131
Handling Reports ................................................................................. 132
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 133
What is IP-FAX? .................................................................................. 133
T.38 Packet Format ............................................................................. 133
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................134
1.
2.
3.
4.
B750
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 134

CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .......................................... 135
IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 136
IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 137
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ............................................................. 138
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Rev. 06/2005
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 FAX UNIT (B750)
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against this list.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Fax key
Fax panel
Jack cover
G3 decal
Screws
Stamp
FCU
Speaker assembly
Operating Instructions Fax Basic
Features (Except EU model)
Operating Instructions Fax Advanced
Features (Except EU model)
Handset Bracket (NA only) (not shown)
Telephone Line (NA only)
FCC Decal (NA only)
Serial Number Decal
10
11
12
13
14
Qty
2
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
B750I100.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
CAUTION
Before installing this fax unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[B]
[A]
B750I102.WMF
3. Remove the connector cover [C].
[C]
4. Install the jack cover [D].
[D]
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750I106.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
FAX UNIT (B750)
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[B]
B750I103.WMF
[D]
[E]
B750I104.WMF
5. Remove the screw [A] ( x 1) and loosen the eight screws [B] ( x 8).
6. Move the controller box cover [C] to the right side and remove it.
7. Attach the FCU [D] to the BICU ( x 4).
8. Change the MBU battery jumper switch connector [E] from the "OFF" position
to the "ON" position.
9. Carefully push down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is installed in the correct position. If not, an SC
occurs (SC819, SC672 etc.).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
[A]
[E]
B750I105.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
B750I101.WMF
10. Install the speaker assembly [A] ( x 2, x 2).

11. Reattach the controller box cover.
NOTE: When reassembling, use caution not to damage harnesses and
electrical circuits.
12. Replace the dummy keypad [B] with the fax keypad [C].
13. Replace the third key-slot cover [D] with the fax key [E].
14. Attach the decal (SUPER G3) [F] to the front cover.
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
15. Install the stamp cartridge [A] if the

ARDF [B] has been installed.
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[B]
[A]
B502I006.WMF
16. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2).

17. Attach the FCC decal [C] and serial
number decal [D].
NOTE: The FCC decal is for the
U.S. and Canada only.
[C]
[D]
B750I501.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Rev. 06/2005
[A]
B750I107.WMF
18. Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack [A].
19. Put the power plug into the outlet and turn the main switch ON.
NOTE: Make sure that the outlet is grounded.
NOTE: SRAM has been formatted is displayed after you turn ON the main
switch. Turn the main switch OFF and ON to use the machine. If the
display reoccurs, check the battery on the MBU board (step 8) is in the
ON position and the MBU is seated correctly on the FCU board.
20. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2005
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

1.2.1 G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Accessory check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against this list.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Flat cable
Harness
Screws
Clamps
CCU drive board
Telephone line (NA only)
SG3 board unit
FCC Decal (NA only)
Qty
1
1
7
2
1
1
1
1
SM
6
B751I106.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
CAUTION
Before installing this optional unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[B]
B751I102A.WMF
[A]
3. Remove the left connector shield [C]

(LINE 2). Then use a file to make the
edge smooth.
If you install one more G3 interface unit,
also remove the right connector shield
[D] (LINE 3). Then use a file to make the
edge smooth.
[D]
[C]
B751I107.WMF
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B751I501.WMF
[B]
[B]
B751I103A.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
[E]
[I]
B751I101.WMF
4. Remove the screw [A] and loosen eight screws [B].

5. Move the controller box cover [C] to the right side and remove it.
6. Remove the FCU [D] ( x 2, x 4) if the fax unit was installed.
7. Connect the flat cable [E] with blue side outside and the harness [F] to the CCU
drive board [G].
NOTE: Connect the end that is near the binding [H] to the CCU drive board.
8. Connect the flat cable [B], with the blue side out, to the FCU as shown.
9. Attach the CCU drive board [G] to the FCU bracket [I] ( x 4).
NOTE: The G3 Interface Unit Type 3232 package contains one CCU drive
board. When installing the two optional units at once, only one of the
two interfaces is necessary.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2005
10. Install the clamps [A] and hold the

cable with them.
[A]
IMPORTANT: Make sure to attach

the clamps in the two positions as
shown in the illustration. If you do not
do this, you cannot attach the flat
cable.
Clamp Positions
[B]
B751I102.WMF
11. Attach the FCU [C] to the BICU ( x 4).

NOTE: Make sure that the jumper
switch on the MBU is set to
"On".
[C]
12. Carefully push down the MBU.

NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is
installed in the correct position.
If not, an SC occurs (SC819,
SC672 etc.).
B751I103.WMF
13. Remove the speaker assembly [D]

( x 2) if the speaker assembly was
installed.
14. Power ON. If the machine displays

SRAM has been formatted due to
problem with SRAM, power OFF/ON
again.
B750
[D]
B751I502.WMF
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
From this point, the procedure for installation of one G3 port is different from
the installation of two G3 ports.
To install one G3 port: First do the For Single G3 Port Installation

procedure. Then do the For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
To install two G3 ports: First do the For Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
Then do the For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
For Single G3 Port Installation
[A]
B751I104.WMF
1. Attach the SG3 board unit [A] to the I/O board cover bracket ( x 3, x 1).
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
For Dual G3 Port Installation

Two G3 interface units (Type 3232) are necessary when you install two G3 ports.
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B751I151.WMF
1. From the second G3 interface unit, remove the telephone jack bracket [A]
( x 2), then remove the telephone jack [B].
2. Remove the G3 interface unit cover bracket [C] ( x 4).
3. Remove the G3 interface board [D] ( x 2).
B750
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[G]
B751I152.WMF
[H]
B751I104.WMF
4. From the first G3 interface unit, remove the telephone jack bracket, telephone
jack, and G3 interface unit cover bracket as shown in steps 1 and 2.
5. Attach the second G3 interface board [A] to the right-hand connector on the G3
interface unit bracket [B] ( x 2).
6. Install the telephone jack harnesses [C, D] as shown. Then attach the G3
interface unit cover bracket [E] ( x 4).
7. Attach the telephone jack [F] to the telephone jack bracket [G].
8. Attach the telephone jack bracket [G] to the G3 interface unit cover bracket [E]
( x 2).
9. Attach the dual-SG3-board unit [H] to the I/O board cover bracket
( x 2, x 1).
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation

[B]
[A]
B751I105.WMF
1. Attach the speaker assembly [A] to the I/O board cover bracket ( x 3, x 2).
2. Hold the harnesses with clamps [B].
3. Reattach the controller box cover.
NOTE: When reassembling, use caution not to damage harnesses and
electrical circuits.
4. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2).
5. Connect the telephone line/s to the
jack/s [C]
For a single G3 interface unit: LINE 2
For a dual G3 interface unit:
LINE 2 and 3
[C]
6. Put the power plug into the outlet and

turn the main switch on.
NOTE: Make sure that the outlet is
grounded.
7. Start the service mode and set bit 1 of
communication switch 16 to 1
(Fax SP1-104-023).
8. If you install two G3 interface units, also
set bit 3 of communication switch 16
to "1" (Fax SP1-104-023).
B751I107A.WMF
9. Turn the main switch off and on.

10. Print out the system parameter list and check that G3-2 (single port) and G3-3
(dual ports) is listed as an option (Fax SP6-101).
11. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2/PSTN-3 communications.
12. Turn the main switch off and on.
B750
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2005
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
12. Attach the FCC decal [A].

NOTE: The FCC decal is for U.S.
and Canada only.
13. Attach the FCC decal [B] if you

have installed the dual G3 ports.
14. Turn the main switch OFF and
ON.
[B]
[A]
1.2.2 EXPANSION MEMORY

[A]
1. Remove the rear cover ( x 2).

2. Remove the controller box cover
( 1.2.1).
3. Install an expansion memory [A].
4. Check if the MBU battery jumper
switch is at "ON".
NOTE: The MBU battery jumper
switch has been already
at "ON" if the fax unit has
been correctly installed.
6. Install the controller box cover
and the rear cover.
7. Print out the system parameter
list, and check that the correct
memory size is shown (Fax SP6101).
SM
B750I109.WMF
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
1.2.3 HANDSET
NOTE: The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
[E]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[F]
B750I108.WMF
1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. Attach the cradle [D] to the
bracket [B] ( x 2), then replace the label [C].
4. Install the handset [E] on the cradle [D].
5. Connect the cable [F] to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine.
B750
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750

2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
1. When replacing the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU
board and install it on the new FCU board.
2. Adjust the date and time (UP System Settings Timer Setting Set
Date/Set Time).
NOTE: 1) Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).
2) Print out the system parameter list (SP6-101) to check the settings.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected within
40 s of Start being pressed
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
0-03
Incompatible modem at the

other end
CFR or FTT not received
after modem training
0-04
0-05
B750
Unsuccessful after modem

training at 2400 bps
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-06
Meaning
The other terminal did not
reply to DCS
0-07
No post-message response
from the other end after a
page was sent
0-08
The other end sent RTN or

PIN after receiving a page,
because there were too
many errors
0-14
Non-standard post message

response code received
SM
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-15
Meaning
The other terminal is not
capable of specific
functions.
0-16
CFR or FTT not detected

after modem training in
confidential or transfer mode
0-20
Facsimile data not received

within 6 s of retraining
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line)

from the other end not
received within 5 s of the
previous EOL signal
0-22
The signal from the other

end was interrupted for
more than the acceptable
modem carrier drop time
(default: 200 ms)
B750
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
following functions, or the other terminals memory
is full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
Defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-23
Meaning
Too many errors during
reception
0-30
The other terminal did not

reply to NSS(A) in AI short
protocol mode
0-32
The other terminal sent a

DCS, which contained
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
Polarity changed during
communication
FCE does not detect the
SG3-V34.
0-52
0-55
0-56
0-70
The stored message data

exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3-V34.
The communication mode
specified in CM/JM was not
available
(V.8 calling and called
terminal)
0-74
The calling terminal fell back

to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect ANSam
after sending CI.
0-75
The called terminal fell back

could not detect a CM in
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
SM
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
Check the protocol dump list.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

Retry communication.
FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
The other terminal did not have a compatible
communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was
a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal
when polling rx was initiated from the calling
terminal.
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to noise, etc.
ANSam was too short to detect.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The terminal could not detect ANSam.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-76
0-77
0-79
0-80
0-81
0-82
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86
0-87
0-88
B750
Meaning
The calling terminal fell back
could not detect a JM in
response to a CM
(CM timeout).
The called terminal fell back
could not detect a CJ in
response to JM
(JM timeout).
The called terminal detected
CI while waiting for a V.21
signal.
The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 2 line probing.
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 3 equalizer training.
due to a timeout in the V.34
phase 4 control channel
start-up.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart
sequence.
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 phase 4 control
channel start-up.
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 control channel restart.
because the other terminal
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
The control channel started
after an unsuccessful
primary channel.
because PPR was
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
noise, etc.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
noise, etc.
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
JM to the other end.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
T.30 mode.
The guard timer expired while starting these
phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
signal level can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
dedicated tx parameters.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.

If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The other terminal was incompatible.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
The receiving terminal restarted the control

channel because data reception in the primary
channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error communication.
Try using a lower data rate at the start.
Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
2-12
2-13
Meaning
Only one V.21 connection
flag was received
Modem clock irregularity
Modem initialization error
Replace the FCU.
2-23
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
2-24
JBIG ASIC error
2-25
JBIG data reconstruction

error (BIH error)
error (Float marker error)
error (End marker error)
error (Timeout)
JBIG trailing edge maker
error
The machine resets itself for
a fatal FCU system error
The machine resets itself
because of a fatal
communication error
Snd msg() in the manual
task is an error because the
mailbox for the operation
task is full.
Line current was cut
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-50
2-51
2-53
4-01
4-10
5-10
5-20
5-21
Communication failed
because of an ID Code
mismatch (Closed Network)
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible because
of a lack of memory
Memory overflow
5-23
Print data error when

printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
5-25
SAF file access error
SM
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Code
2-11
Replace the FCU.

Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
JBIG data error
Check the senders JBIG function.
Update the MBU ROM.
FCU defective
Check the destination device.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
The user did the same operation many times, and

this gave too much load to the machine.
Check the line connector.

Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
Replace the FCU or the NCU.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
Replace the FCU.

Temporary memory shortage.
Test the SAF memory.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
Test the SAF memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
6-00
6-01
6-02
6-04
Meaning
G3 ECM - T1 time out
during reception of facsimile
data
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - RTC not detected
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data

frame not received within 18
s of CFR, but there was no
line fail
6-06
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
6-08
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received

in reply to PPS.NULL
6-09
G3 ECM - ERR received
6-10
G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other end
after all communication
attempts at 2400 bps
6-21
V.21 flag detected during

high speed modem
communication
The machine resets the
sequence because of an
abnormal handshake in the
V.34 control channel
6-22
6-99
13-17
13-18
B750
V.21 signal not stopped

within 6 s
SIP user name registration
error
SIP server access error
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Defective FCU.
The other terminal may be defective.
The other end pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
Check for line noise.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
The other terminal may be defective or
incompatible.
Check for line noise.
If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Double registration of the SIP user name.
Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
Defective SIP server.
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
14-00
Meaning
SMTP Send Error
14-01
SMTP Connection Failed
14-02
No Service by SMTP
Service (421)
Access to SMTP Server
Denied (450)
14-03
14-04
14-05
14-06
14-07
Access to SMTP Server

Denied (550)
SMTP Server HDD Full
(452)
User Not Found on SMTP

Server (551)
Data Send to SMTP Server
Failed (4XX)
14-08
Data Send to SMTP Server

Failed (5XX)
14-09
14-10
Authorization Failed for

Sending to SMTP Server
Addresses Exceeded
14-11
Buffer Full
14-12
Data Size Too Large
14-13
Send Cancelled
SM
Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
because the server could not be found.
The IP address for the SMTP server is not stored
in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Defective PC that does file transfer
SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD
is full.
SMTP Server hard disk full.
Insufficient HDD space in the PC that does file
transfer
The user does not exist locally.
transmission fails.
transmission fails.
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
Incorrect setting for file transfer
Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit
for the SMTP server.
The send buffer is full so the transmission could not
be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-toEmail while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
Transmission was cancelled because the detected
size of the file was too large.
Processing is interrupted because the user pressed
Stop.
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
14-30
Meaning
MCS File Creation Failed
14-31
UFS File Creation Failed
14-32
Cancelled the Mail Due to

Error Detected by NFAX
No Mail Address For the
Machine
Mail Job Task Error
14-33
14-50
14-51
UCS Destination Download

Error
14-60
Send Cancel Failed
14-61
Notification Mail Send Failed

for All Destinations
POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
Registered
15-01
15-02
15-03
15-10
15-11
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account

Information Not Registered
Mail Address Not Registered
DCS Mail Receive Error
Connection Error
15-12
Authorization Error
B750
Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
due to a software error.
Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
address of the network administrator is registered.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:
Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
Software error.
Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
All addresses for return notification mail failed.
At startup, the system detected that the IP address
of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
registered.
The mail address has not been registered.
Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
15-13
Meaning
Receive Buffer Full
15-14
Mail Header Format Error
15-15
Mail Divide Error
15-16
15-17
Mail Size Receive Error

Receive Timeout
15-18
15-31
Incomplete Mail Received

Final Destination for
Transfer Request Reception
Format Error
Send/Delivery Destination
Error
15-39
15-41
SMTP Receive Error
15-42
Off Ramp Gateway Error
15-43
Address Format Error
15-44
Addresses Over
15-61
15-62
Attachment File Format

Error
TIFF File Compatibility Error
15-63
TIFF Parameter Error
15-64
TIFF Decompression Error
SM
Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission
cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-toEmail.
The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no
boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
May occur during manual receiving only because
the network is not operating correctly.
Only one portion of the mail was received.
The format of the final destination for the transfer
request was incorrect.
The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
destination:
Destination file format is incorrect.
Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting.
The delivery destination address was specified with
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
The attached file is not TIFF format.
Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
15-71
Meaning
Not Binary Image Data
15-73
MDN Status Error
15-74
MSDN Message ID Error
15-80
Mail Job Task Read Error
15-81
Repeated Destination
Registration Error
15-91
Send Registration Error
15-92
Memory Overflow
15-93
Memory Access Error
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
15-95
Transfer Station Function
22-00
Original length exceeded the

maximum scan length
22-01
Memory overflow while

receiving
22-02
Tx or rx job stalled due to

line disconnection at the
other end
The machine cannot store
received data in the SAF
22-04
B750
The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
Could not repeat receive the transmission because
the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
Divide the original into more than one page.
Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machines printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
The job started normally but did not finish normally;
data may or may not have been received fully.
Restart the machine.
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
23-00
25-00
F0-xx
F6-xx
SM
Meaning
No G3 parameter
confirmation answer
Data read timeout during
construction
The machine software
resets itself after a fatal
transmission error occurred
V.34 modem error
SG3-V34 modem error
Defective FCU board or firmware.
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Code
22-05
Restart the machine.

Replace the FCU
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3-V34 board.
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Route
Item
Action
Remarks
Check that the LAN

cable is connected to
the machine.
Check that the LEDs
on the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity
Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
1. Network settings on Check the network
Is the IP address
the PC
settings on the PC.
registered in the
TCP/IP properties in
the network setup
correct? Check the IP
address with the
administrator of the
network.
2. Check that PC can Use the ping
At the MS-DOS
connect with the
command on the PC
prompt, type ping then
machine
to contact the
the IP address of the
machine.
machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in the Check the LAN
Use the Network
machine
parameters
function in the User
Tools.
Check if there is an IP
address conflict with
If there is an IP
other PCs.
address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. LAN settings in the Check the LAN
Use the Network
machine
parameters
function in the User
Tools.
Check if there is an IP
address conflict with
If there is an IP
other PCs.
address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. Connection with
the LAN
General LAN
Between IFAX
and PC
Between
machine and email server
B750
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Route
Item
2. E-mail account on
the server
Between
machine and email server
3. E-mail server
1. E-mail account on
the Server
2. E-mail server
Between e-mail
server and
internet
3. Destination e-mail
address
SM
Action
Make sure that the
machine can log into
the e-mail server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Make sure that the
client devices which
have an account in
the server can
send/receive e-mail.
Remarks
Ask the administrator
to check.

to check.
Send a test e-mail
with the machines
own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
Make sure that the PC Ask the administrator
to check.
can log into the e-mail
server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Make sure that the
to check.
client devices which
have an account in
Send a test e-mail
the server can
with the machines
send/receive e-mail.
own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
Make sure that the email address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Route
Item
4. Router settings
Between e-mail
server and
internet
Between e-mail
server and
internet
B750
1. Error message by
e-mail from the
network of the
destination.
Action
Remarks
Use the ping command Ask the administrator

to contact the router.
of the server to check.
Check that other devices
connected to the router
can sent data over the
router.
Check whether e-mail Inform the
can be sent to another
administrator of the
LAN.
address on the same
network, using the
application e-mail
software.
Check the error e-mail
message.
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3 FAX SC CODES

3.3.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it resets itself automatically
(default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory or
resetting the switches.
For details on Fax SC Codes 1201, refer to the following sections.
If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to 1, when the FCU detects a Fax SC
Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax
unit is initialized using one of the following methods:
Hold down the 7 and 9 keys for more than 10 s.
Turn off the main power switch and turn it back on.
3.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the OFF position.
The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.
SD card connection was loose.
SM
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
FAX SC CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX SC CODES
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

SC Code
Description
1001
FCU error
1201
Unrecoverable FCU SRAM error

Software error
1299
1305
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405
B750
Suggested
Action
Initialize the fax unit.
(See section 3.3.1.for
the initialization
procedure)
Refer to section 3.3.2.
Initialize the fax unit.
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 0
Automatic
reset
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 1
SC Code
display
Service Call
display
Automatic
reset
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED (
) lights or flashes while the platen cover or

ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP Mode
1.
Press the Clear Mode key.
2. Use the keypad to enter 107.
3.
Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Fax SP
4.
5.
On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.

Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
Exit
SM
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B750S500.WMF
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
B750
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Not used for the Fax SP mode.
Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
click the appropriate button to expand the list.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 4.1.2)
2. Click the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
B750S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 4.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key pressed is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SM
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
111
Mode No.
System Switch
001 032
00 1F
Function
Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
Ifax Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for internet fax

settings for the fax option
Printer Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for printer settings

for the fax option
Communication Switch
001 032
00 1F
Change the bit switches for communication

settings for the fax option
G3-1 Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for the protocol

settings of the standard G3 board
G3-2 Switch
001 016
00 0F

settings of the optional G3 board
G3-3 Switch
001 016
00 0F

settings of the optional G3 board
G4 Internal Switch
001 032
00 1F
G4 Parameter Switch
001 016
00 0F
IP fax Switch
001 016
00 0F
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
parameters
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2
101
102
B750
Mode No.
RAM Read/Write
001
Function
Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
Memory Dump
001
G3-1 Memory Dump
Print out RAM data for the fax board.

Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
102
103
104
105
002
Mode No.
G3-2 Memory Dump
003
G3-3 Memory Dump
004
G4 Memory Dump
G3-1 NCU Parameters

001 023 CC, 01 22
G3-2 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22
G3-3 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22
Function
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU parameter settings for the standard

G3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3
101
102
103
104
SM
Mode No.
Service Station
001
Fax Number
002
Select Line
Serial Number
000
PSTN-1 Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled

001
Select Line
Function
Enter the fax number of the service station.
Select the line type.
Enter the fax units serial number.
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the G32 line.
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled

line, change this SP to on.
004
Transmission
Disabled
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3
105
Mode No.
Function

001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
106
107
201
Transmission
Disabled
ISDN Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings
001
H323 Port
002
SIP Port
003
RAS Port
004
Gatekeeper port
005
T.38 Port
006
SIP Server Port
007
IPFAX Protocol
Priority
FAX SW
001 032 00 1F
Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If

the machine is installed on a PABX line,
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the G33 line.
line, change this SP to on.
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
Select "H323" or "SAP".
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
B750
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
Mode No.
FCU ROM Version
Error Codes
G3-1 ROM Version
G3-2 ROM Version
G3-3 ROM Version
G4 ROM Version
Charge ROM Version
Function
Displays the FCU ROM version.
Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
Displays the G3-1 modem version.
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5
101
102
103
104
Mode No.
Initialize SRAM
000
Erase All Files
000
Reset Bit Switches
000
Function
Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
Factory setting
000
Resets the bit switches and user

parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6
101
102
103
103
104
SM
Mode No.
System Parameter List
000
Service Monitor Report
000
G3 Protocol Dump List
001
G3 All
Communications
002
G3-1 (All
Communications)
003
G3-1
(1 Communication)
004
G3-2
(All Communications)
005
G3-2
(1 Communication)
006
G3-3
(All Communications)
007
G3-3
(1 Communication)
G4 Protocol Dump List
001
Dch + Bch 1
002
Dch
003
Bch 1 Link Layer
004
Dch Link Layer
005
Dch +Bch 2
006
Bch 2 Link Layer
Function
Touch the ON button to print the system
parameter list.
Touch the ON button to print the service
monitor report.
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for all G3 lines.
communications for the G3-1 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-1 line.
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6
105
106
Mode No.
All Files print out
000
108
The machine prints all the communication

records on the report.
The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
Specified Date
Log List Print out

001
All log files
002
Printer
003
SC/TRAP Stored
004
Decompression
005
Scanner
006
JOB/SAF
007
Reconstruction
008
JBIG
009
Fax Driver
010
G3CCU
011
Fax Job
012
CCU
013
Scanner Condition
IP Protocol Dump List
001
All Communications
002
B750
Prints out all the user files in the SAF

memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
Journal Print out

001
All Journals
002
107
Function
These log print out functions are for

designer use only.

communications for the IP fax line.
communication for the IP fax line.
1 Communication
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
Function
G3-1 Modem Tests
G3-1 DTMF Tests
Ringer Test
G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
Recorded Message Test
G3-2 Modem Tests
G3-2 DTMF Tests
G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
G3-3 Modem Tests
G3-3 DTMF Tests
G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode)

9
702
SM
Mode No.
Design Switch DFU
Function
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
Confidential RX message print

out without the password.
Technical data printout on the

Journal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
transmission parameters.
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1: Confidential RX messages can be printed out
without the password. Use this bit if the customer
forgot the password for the confidential messages.
Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RX
messages.
1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
are listed on the Journal for each G3
communication.
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04

(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
B750
44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
2
Rx level calculation
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the rx level.
3
4
5
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
Not used
Do not change this setting.
Line error mark print
When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on
the printout if a line error occurs during reception.
0: OFF, 1: ON (print)
G3/G4 communication
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display
parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled
because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
Protocol dump list output after
This is only used for communication
each communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On
this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
Not used
Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate
Resolution
Compression mode
Communication
mode
SM
336: 33600 bps

168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps
144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps
120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps
96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps
72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps
48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps
24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
ECM: With ECM
NML: With no ECM
45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Width and
reduction
I/O rate
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
0: 0 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
Note:
40 is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
File retention time
0: Depends on User Parameter
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
5
Not used
6-7 Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6
Setting
0
0
Always disabled
0
1
User selectable
1
0
User selectable
1
1
Always enabled
System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length of time that RDS is
to temporarily switched on when
7
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to User selectable
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
Dial Lists
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750
SP No. 1-101-003
COMMENTS
Do not change these settings.
1: A file that had a communication error will not be
erased unless the communication is successful.

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
SP No. 1-101-004
COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.
SP No. 1-101-005
COMMENTS
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
each).
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
4-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-005
COMMENTS
System Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Margin setting for Create
to Margin Transmission
7
SP No. 1-101-007
COMMENTS
71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0
Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on
the transmission result report
1
Inclusion of communications on
the Journal when no image
data was exchanged.
2
Automatic error report printout

Printing of the error code on the

error report
0: No 1: Yes
Not used
Power failure report
4
5
SM
Conditions for printing the

protocol dump list
0: Print for all communications
1: Print only when there is a
communication error
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
page of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.
0: Communications that reached phase C (message
tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
This switch becomes effective only when system
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
dump list only for communications with errors.
47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
7
Priority given to various types
of remote terminal ID when
printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Automatic port selection
1-2 Not used
3
Continuous polling reception
Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external telephone is
off-hook
On hook dial
Not used
6-7
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
This bit determines which set of priorities the
machine uses when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
SP No. 1-101-011
COMMENTS
When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically
selected if the selected port is not used.
This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
0: On hook dial is disabled.
Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Action when the external
handset goes off-hook
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: Memory tx and rx operation
(the display remains the same)
4-7
B750
Not used
SP No. 1-101-015
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
possible.
1: The display stays in standby mode even when
the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Country/area code for
to functional settings (Hex)
7
00: France 11: USA
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK
13: Japan
03: Italy
14: Hong Kong
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland
19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz.
1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain
22: Hungary
0F: Israel
23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland
System Switch 10
No
FUNCTION
0
Threshold memory level for
to parallel memory transmission
7
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1
TSI (G3) printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
2
Not used
3
TTI used for broadcasting
0: The TTIs selected for each
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
SM
SP No. 1-101-016
COMMENTS
This country/area code determines the factory
settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code:
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
SP No. 1-101-017
COMMENTS
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).
Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints

information that the customer considers to be
important.
Do not change the factory settings.
1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
destinations during broadcasting.
49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
4
Type of TTI used for
transmission using the ten-key
pad
0: TTI_1
1: TTI_2
5-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
polling transmission and manual transmission using
the handset.
System Switch 12
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position in the main
to scan direction
7
SP No. 1-101-019
COMMENTS
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an
A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50
mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 15
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Going into the Energy Saver
mode automatically
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2-3 Not used
4-5 Interval for preventing the
machine from entering Energy
Saver mode if there is a
pending transmission file.
Bit 5 4
Setting
0 0
1 min
0 1
30 min
1 0
1 hour
1 1
24 hours
6
Print user codes on reports.
7
Not used
B750
SP No. 1-101-022
COMMENTS
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
active even in the Energy Saver mode.
If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
selected period.
After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
mode.
1: User codes are printed out on the Journal or

other reports.
50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
0
Parallel Broadcasting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Priority setting for the G3 line.
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-023
COMMENTS
1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
using all available ports during broadcasting.
This function allows the user to select the default G3
line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to
use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.

System Switch 19
No
FUNCTION
0-5 Not used
6
Extended scanner page
memory after memory option
is installed
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Special Original mode

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-101-026
COMMENTS
0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
MB.
1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
or letterhead which has a colored or printed
background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and
Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D
No
FUNCTION
0
RTI/CSI/CPS display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Not used
2
Destination telephone number
display limitation
0: OFF, 1: ON
3-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-101-030
COMMENTS
1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
LCD panel during communication.
When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
number display is limited and redial is disabled.
51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1E
No
FUNCTION
0
Communication after the
Journal data storage area has
become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
Action when the SAF memory

has become full during
scanning
0: The current page is erased.
1: The entire file is erased.
RTI/CSI display priority

0: RTI 1: CSI
File No. printing

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Action when authorized
reception is enabled but
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not
yet programmed
0: All fax reception is disabled

1: Faxes can be received if the
sender has an RTI or CSI
6-7
B750
Address display priority in the

AI redial mode
0: RTI/CSI
1: Telephone number
Not used
SP No. 1-101-031
COMMENTS
This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
0: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
machine will not be able to receive any fax
messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
messages from senders that do not include an RTI
or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
telephone number information, the machine displays
RTI/CSI.
1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
Do not change the settings
52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 1F
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Report printout after an original
jam during SAF storage or if
the SAF memory fills up
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3
4-6
7
Not used
Received fax print start timing
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
Not used
Action when a fax SC has
occurred
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
SP No. 1-101-032
COMMENTS
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want
to have a report in these cases.
Memory tx Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
0: The machine prints each page immediately after
the machine receives it.
1: The machine prints the complete message after
the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
resets itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
SM
53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
Original Width of TX
Attachment File
0
1
2
3-6
7
SP No. 1-102-001
COMMENTS
This setting sets the maximum size of the original
that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0: On, 1: Off
NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to
1, the larger size has priority. For example,
if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the
maximum size is A3 (Bit 2).
A4
B4
A3
Reserved
Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the

receiving machine at the destination, so the sending
machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving
machine. The original width selected with this switch
is used as the RX machines original width setting,
and the original is reduced to this size before
sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.
I-fax Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
Original Line Resolution of TX
Attachment File
0
200x100 Standard
200x200 Detail
200x400 Fine
Reserved
400 x 400 Super Fine
5-6
SP No. 1-102-002
COMMENTS
This setting sets the maximum resolution of the
original that the destination can receive.
Reserved
0: Not selected, 1: Selected

NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the higher resolution has priority.
For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).
B750
54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 01
7
mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
SP No. 1-102-002
When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
I-fax Switch 02
SP No. 1-102-003
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and
Subject address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
SM
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This
allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 02
SP No. 1-102-003
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
5-6
7
B750
00: Dispatched
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
dispatched in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The dispatched string is included in the Subject string.
01: Displayed
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
displayed in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The displayed string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
00 (for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.
56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 03
SP No. 1-102-004
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
1
Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
4-7
SM
Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request

This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors
in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and
returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked
to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
Not Used
57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 04
SP No. 1-102-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
1-7
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Not Used
I-fax Switch 05
SP No. 1-102-006
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast
to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 1-102-007
SP No. 1-102-008
I-fax Switch 08
SP No. 1-102-009
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.
B750
58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4-7 Restrict TX Retries
SP No. 1-102-010
COMMENTS
This setting determines the number of retries when
connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 1-102-011
SP No. 1-102-012
SP No. 1-102-013
SP No. 1-102-014
SP No. 1-102-015
I-fax Switch 0F
SP No. 1-102-016
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used
SM
59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Page separation mark
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-103-001
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than
the printer paper
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Prints the date and time on

received fax messages
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-7
Not used
Printer Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3-4 Maximum print width used in
the setup protocol
Bit 4 3
Setting
0 0
Not used
0 1
A3
1 0
B4
1 1
A4
5-6 Not used
7
Received message width
restriction in the protocol signal
to the sender
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750
COMMENTS
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a 2 inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
0: The next page continues from where the previous
page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
- bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages) is enabled.
1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
SP No. 1-103-002
COMMENTS
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
switch 01 is 1.

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the print width depending on the paper size
available from the paper feed stations.
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size
A4 or 8.5" x 11"
B5
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5"
No paper available (Paper end)
Printer Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
1st paper feed station usage for
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1
2nd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3rd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3
4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4
LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7 Not used
SM
Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)

297 mm width
256 mm width
216 mm width
216 mm width
SP No. 1-103-003
COMMENTS
0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
messages and reports.
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
for printing fax messages and reports.
Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
Selection feature.
61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length reduction of received
data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-3
4
to
7
SP No. 1-103-004
COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
Not used
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)
0
0
1
1
and so on until
F
15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switch 04
SP No. 1-103-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4
N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
5
6
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
place.
0
1
0
1
=4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
0
0
1
1
7
B750
Not used.
62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is
enabled.
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used.
Printer Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
Reduction for Journal printing
0: Off
1: On
2-3 Not used.
4
List of destinations in the
Communication Failure Report
for broadcasting
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
5-7 Not used.
SP No. 1-103-007
COMMENTS
Cross reference
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5

SP No. 1-103-008
COMMENTS
1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
there is enough space in the left margin for punch
holes or staples.
1: Only destinations where communication failure
occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
Report.

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Paper size selection priority
0: Width
1: Length
1
3
to
4
5-6
7
B750
Paper size selected for

printing A4 width fax data
0: 8.5" x 11" size
1: A4 size
Page separation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Printing the sample image on

reports
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting
0
0
The upper half
only
0
1
50% reduction
in sub-scan only
1
0
Same size
1
1
Not used
Not used
Equalizing the reduction ratio
among separated pages
(Page Separation)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
SP No. 1-103-015
COMMENTS
0: A paper size that has the same width as the
received data is selected first.
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
This switch determines which paper size is selected
for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
Same size means the sample image is printed at
100%, even if page separation occurs.
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 to enable this switch.
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
this feature.

0: When page separation has taken place, all the
pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
paper size when page separation has taken place.
Other pages are printed without reduction.
64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Smoothing feature
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
1
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Disabled
1
0
Enabled
1
1
Not used
2
Duplex printing
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3
Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4
Printing fax messages in user
code mode
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-103-016
COMMENTS
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
receives halftone images from other manufacturers
fax machines frequently.
1: The machine always prints received fax

messages in duplex printing mode:
1: The machine holds the received fax messages

until the machine exits the restricted access mode
(user code or key counter).
If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Compression modes available
to in receive mode
1
Bit 1 0 Modes
0
0 MH only
0
1 MH/MR
1
0 MH/MR/MMR
1
1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2
to in transmit mode
3
Bit 3 2 Modes
0
0 MH only
0
1 MH/MR
1
0 MH/MR/MMR
1
1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
4
Not used
5
JBIG compression method:
Reception
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6
JBIG compression method:
Transmission
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7
Closed network (reception)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750
SP No. 1-104-001
COMMENTS
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.
These bits determine the compression capabilities

to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

Change the setting when communication problems
occur using JBIG compression.
Change the setting when communication problems

occur using JBIG compression.
1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the

other terminal does not match the ID code of this
terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No
FUNCTION
0
ECM
0: Off 1: On
1
2
to
3
4-5
6
to
7
Not used
Wrong connection prevention
method
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI
Not used
Maximum printable page length
available
Bit 7 6 Setting
0
0 No limit
0
1 B4 (364 mm)
1
0 A4 (297 mm)
1
1 Not used
No
FUNCTION
0
Burst error threshold
0: Low 1: High
1
2
SM
Acceptable total error line ratio

0: 5% 1: 10%
Treatment of pages received
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
SP No. 1-104-002
COMMENTS
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
dialed telephone number. This does not work when
manually dialed.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is
done from the external telephone.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi200 dpi
400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm
15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6
12
24
High settings 12
24
48
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
3
Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
received during G3 immediate
transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
4-7
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
Not used
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum number of page
to retransmissions in a G3
7
memory transmission
SP No. 1-104-004
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Point of resumption of memory
transmission upon redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1
1-6 Not used
7
Emergency calls using 999
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
B750
SP No. 1-104-011
COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
normal memory transmission.
If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
end receivers
1
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
2
Use of Label Insertion for the
End Receivers in a Transfer
operation
3
Conditions required for
Transfer Result Report
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there was
an error
4
Printout of the message when

acting as a Transfer Station
Action when there is no fax

number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which meets
the requesting terminals own
fax number
0: Transfer is disabled
1: Transfer is enabled
6-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-104-012
COMMENTS
These bits determine whether the machine uses the
Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
This bit determines whether the machine uses the

Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
Request, even if there were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
this bit determines whether the machine prints the
fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the last N digits of the
requesting terminals own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
is the number programmed in communication switch
0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Number of digits compared to
to find the requesters fax number
4
from the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials when acting
as a Transfer Station
5-7
Not used
Communication Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0
The available memory
to threshold, below which ringing
7
detection (and therefore
reception into memory) is
disabled
Communication Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Minimum interval between
to automatic dialing attempts
7
SP No. 1-104-013
COMMENTS
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the own telephone number sent
from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
SP No. 1-104-014
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
SP No. 1-104-015
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)
B750
70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission:
to Maximum number of dialing
7
attempts to the same
destination
SP No. 1-104-017
COMMENTS
01 - FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission: Interval
to between dialing attempts to the
7
same destination
SP No. 1-104-019
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) minutes
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-to-mm conversion during
transmission
1-5
6
to
7
Not used
Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used
SP No. 1-104-021
COMMENTS
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored
data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
SM
71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0
Standard G3 unit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Japan Only)
4
5
6
Optional G3 unit (G3-2)

0: Not installed
1: Installed
Optional ISDN unit
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Optional G3 unit (G3-3)
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Not used
Not used
Use of the I-G3 line
0: Tx or rx
1: Tx only
G4 Dual communication
0: Enabled
1: Disabled (Japan Only)
No
FUNCTION
0
SEP reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
SUB reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
PWD reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-6 Not used
7
Action when there is no box
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
SP No. 1-104-023
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the
ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3
communications. However, for ISDN on hook
dialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.
Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but this
bit is changed to disabled, no document can be
transmitted.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
G3 unit.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
ISDN unit.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the second
optional G3 unit.
Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires.
1: The machine uses only one B channel for

communication. This enables a customer to occupy
another B channel for other purposes such as
internet communication.
SP No. 1-104-024
COMMENTS
0: Polling transmission to another makers machine
using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
0: Confidential reception to another makers
machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
disabled.
0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
signal reception.
Change this setting when the customer requires.

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
B750
72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 1B
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (0 to 7)
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
7
0: On
1: Off
Communication Switch 1C
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (8 and
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
1
0: On
1: Off
2-7
Not used
SP No. 1-104-028
COMMENTS
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
SP No. 1-104-029
COMMENTS
Refer to communication switch 1B.
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Monitor speaker during
1
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
memory transmission
3-7 Not used
G3 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
AI short protocol (transmission

and reception)
Short preamble
B750
SP No. 1-105-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
SP No. 1-105-002
COMMENTS
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
SP No. 1-105-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
V.8 protocol in manual
reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)
Modem rate used for the next
page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change 1: Fallback
V.8 protocol in manual
transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-105-004
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
when starting a manual reception.
1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
reception.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower

modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode)
or four times (ITU-T mode).
This bit is ineffective in V.34 communications.
1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
during manual transmission.
SP No. 1-105-005
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SP No. 1-105-006
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SP No. 1-105-007
B750
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you

need to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
COMMENTS
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
Cross reference
76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 PSTN cable equalizer
to (tx mode: Internal)
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
67
SM
SP No. 1-105-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
SP No. 1-105-008
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
PSTN cable equalizer

(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Not used

communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
Keep this bit at 1.

77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum allowable carrier
1
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
2-3 Not used
4
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
6
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
B750
SP No. 1-105-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
3
Protocol requirements: France
4
PTT requirements: Germany
5
PTT requirements: France
6
Not used
7
DTS requirements : Germany
G3 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
G3 Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Not used
2
Data rate threshold during V.34
to reception
5
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 Normal
0 1 1 1 Lower by
one step
1 1 1 1 Lower by
two steps
6
Not used
7
B signal detection time for V.34
polling transmission
0: 75 ms (default setting)
1: 65 ms
SP No. 1-105-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

Change this bit manually if required.
SP No. 1-105-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.

SP No. 1-105-014
COMMENTS
The machine changes the modulation parameters in
the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to 0111,
the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
This switch reduces transmission time if the
machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
reception.
Change this switch only when there are
communication errors during V.34 polling
transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
modem.
G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM
79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Alarm when an error occurred
in Phase C or later
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Alarm when the handset is offhook at the end of
communication
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2-7 Not used
B750
SP No. 1-105-016
COMMENTS
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
error communication, change this bit to 1.
If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the

handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
change this bit to 1.
80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Monitor speaker during
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
memory transmission
3-6 Not used
SP No. 1-106-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
G3-2 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
SP No. 1-106-002
COMMENTS
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3-2 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
AI short protocol (transmission

and reception)
Short preamble
SM
SP No. 1-106-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
Not used
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-106-004
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
6
7
Modem rate used for the next

page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change
1: Fallback
Not used
Not used
G3-2 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
B750
Not used
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
SP No. 1-106-005
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-2 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4
Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-006
COMMENTS
transmission.
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SP No. 1-106-007
SM
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you

need to change this for specific receivers.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
COMMENTS
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
Cross reference
83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-2 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
to (tx mode: Internal)
1
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
6-7
B750

(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Not used
SP No. 1-106-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
SP No. 1-106-008
COMMENTS
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Communication error
communications.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
Keep this bit at 1.

84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum allowable carrier
1
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0
Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
2-3 Not used
4
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
6
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
SM
SP No. 1-106-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
frequent.

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
3
Protocol requirements: France
4
PTT requirements: Germany
5
PTT requirements: France
6
Not used
7
Not used
G3-2 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

SP No. 1-106-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B750
86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES

The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00
No.
FUNCTION
0
Not used
IP Fax Transport
1
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection
2
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data
port) selection
3
IP Fax Gatekeeper
4
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse
5
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting
0: Not affected, 1: Affected
6
SM
IP Fax received telephone number

confirmation
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation
SP No. 1-111-001
COMMENTS
Reverses the T30 bit signal.

When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does
not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.
When "0" is selected, fax data is received
without checking the telephone number.
When "1" is selected, fax data is received only
when confirming that the telephone number
from the sender matches the registered
telephone number in this machine. If this
confirmation fails, the line is disconnected.
87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 01
No.
FUNCTION
IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0).
IP Fax preamble wait time setting
4-7
SP No. 1-111-002
COMMENTS
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
IP Fax Switch 02
No.
FUNCTION
0
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
0: Maker code setting
1: Internal bit switch setting
3-7
B750
IP Fax transmission speed setting

0: Modem speed
1: No limitation
SIP transport setting
0: TCP
1: UDP
Not used
SP No. 1-111-003
COMMENTS
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the maker code.
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
communication.
This bit switch sets the transport that has
priority for receiving IP Fax data.
This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 03
No.
FUNCTION
0
Effective field limitation for G3
standard function information
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1
Switching between G3 standard
and G3 non standard
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
2
AI modem rate function
3
ECM frame size selection at
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4
DIS detection times for echo
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5
CTC transmission selection
0: PPRx1
1: PPRx4
6
Shift down setting at receiving

negative code
0: OFF, 1: ON
Not used
IP Fax Switch 04
No.
FUNCTION
TCF error threshold
0
1
2
3
4-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-111-004
COMMENTS
When "0" is selected, the transmission

condition is decided by error frame numbers.
When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.

SP No. 1-111-005
COMMENTS
Sets the TCF error threshold level.
[00 to 0f]
The default is "1111" (0fH).
89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 05
SP No. 1-111-006
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for transmission
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0K bps
14.4K bps
16.8K bps
19.2K bps
21.6K bps
24.0K bps
26.4K bps
28.8K bps
31.2K bps
33.6K bps
Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Bit 5
0
0
1
1
4-5
6-7
B750
Not used
Bit 4
0
1
0
1
V29
V17
V34
Not used
90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 06
SP No. 1-111-007
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0K bps
14.4K bps
16.8K bps
19.2K bps
21.6K bps
24.0K bps
26.4K bps
28.8K bps
31.2K bps
33.6K bps
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem for reception. The default is "0010" (V27ter, V29).
4-7
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 6
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 5
0
1
1
0
0
Bit 4
1
0
1
0
1
V27ter
V27ter, V29
V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)
V27ter, V29, V17
V27ter, V29, V17, V34
IP Fax Switch 07
No.
FUNCTION
0
TSI information
0: Not added, 1: Added
1
DCN transmission setting at T1
timeout
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
2
Not used
3
Hang up setting at DIS reception
disabled
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4
Number of times for training
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5
Space CSI transmission setting at
no CSI registration
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
6-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-111-008
COMMENTS
Adds or does not add TSI information to
NSS(S).
Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
timeout.
Selects the number of times training is done at

the same bit rate.
When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
all spaces.
91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 03
No.
FUNCTION
0-1 T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
2-3
4-5
SP No. 1-111-004
COMMENTS
T4 timer adjustment
Adjust the T4 timer.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
35 sec
40 sec
50 sec
60 sec
Bit 3
0
0
1
1
Bit 2
0
1
0
1
3 sec
3.5 sec
4 sec
5 sec
T0 timer adjustment
Bit 5 Bit 4
0
0
75 sec
0
1
120 sec
1
0
180 sec
1
1
240 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data
transmission and T.38 phase decision.
If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
6-7
B750
Not used
92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 (e.g.
680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
SM
93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680500
Function
Unit
Remarks
Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Decimal Hex
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
0A
11
0B
12
0C
13
0D
14
0E
15
0F
17
11
18
12
Hong Kong 20
South Africa 21
Australia
22
New Zealand 23
Singapore 24
Malaysia
25
China
26
Taiwan
27
Korea
28
Greece
33
Hungary
34
Czech
35
Poland
36
680501
680502
680503
Line current detection time

Line current wait time
Line current drop detect time
20 ms
680504
Hz (BCD)
680508
680509
68050A
68050B
68050C
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
PSTN dial tone detection time
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PSTN dial tone continuous tone time
PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
68050D
68050E
68050F
PSTN wait interval (LOW)

PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ring-back tone detection time
680510
PSTN ring-back tone off detection

time
680505
680506
680507
B750
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
21
22
23
24
Line current detection is

disabled.
Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 680508 contains FF(H),

the machine pauses for
the pause time (address
68050D / 68050E).
Italy: See Note 2.
20 ms
Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
20 ms
94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
680512
680513
680514
680515
680516
680517
680518
680519
Function
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
68051A
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
68051B
68051C
68051D
68051E
68051F
680520
680521
680522
680523
PABX dial tone detection time

PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PABX dial tone continuous tone time
PABX dial tone permissible drop time
PABX wait interval (LOW)
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
PABX ringback tone detection time
PABX ringback tone off detection
time
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(LOW)
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Busy tone ON time: range 1
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
680524
680525
680526
680527
680528
680529
68052A
68052B
68052C
68052D
68052E
SM
Unit
20 ms
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Address
680511
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 68051B contains FF,

the pause time (680520 /
680521).
20 ms
20 ms

disabled.
disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
68052F
680530
680531
680532
680533
Function
Unit
Remarks
20 ms
Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ONOFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
680534
680535
680536
680537
680538
680539
68053A
68053B
68053C
68053D
68053E
68053F
680540
680541
680542
680543
680544
680545
680546
B750
75% Bits 2 and 3 must always

50% be kept at 0.
25%
12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

Hz (BCD)
International dial tone frequency
upper limit (high byte)
disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD)
lower limit (high byte)
disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
International dial tone detection time 20 ms
If 680538 contains FF,
International dial tone reset time
the pause time (68053D /
(LOW)
68053E).
International dial tone reset time
(HIGH)
Belgium: See Note 2.
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
International dial wait interval (LOW)
International dial wait interval (HIGH)
Hz (BCD)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (HIGH)
disabled.
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
disabled.
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone detection time
20 ms
If 680543 contains FF,
Country dial tone reset time (LOW)
the pause time (680548 /
Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)
680549).
Country dial tone continuous tone
time
96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
68054B
Function
Country dial tone permissible drop
time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing the
DO relay and opening the OHDI
relay
Break time for pulse dialing
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
68054D
Time between final OHDI relay

closure and DO relay opening or
closing
1 ms
68054E
20 ms
680550
Minimum pause between dialed

digits (pulse dial mode)
Time waited when a pause is
entered at the operation panel
DTMF tone on time
680551
DTMF tone off time
680552
Tone attenuation level of DTMF

signals while dialing
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
680553
Tone attenuation value difference

between high frequency tone and
low frequency tone in DTMF signals
-dBm x 0.5
680554
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level

after dialing
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level
after dialing
Not used
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
-dBm x 0.5
1 ms
680558
Time between 68054Dh (NCU

parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU
parameter 15)
Not used
680559
Grounding time (ground start mode)
20 ms
68055A
Break time (flash start mode)
1 ms
680548
680549
68054A
68054F
680555
680556
680557
SM
Unit
20 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Address
680547
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-012 (parameter
11).
See Note 3.
12).
See Note 3.
13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
See Note 3 and 8. SP2103-016 (parameter 15).
16). See Note 3.
17).
18).
19).
See Note 5.
20).
The setting must be less
than 5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
21). See Note 5.
See Note 5
Do not change the
settings.
This parameter takes
effect when the country
code is set to France.
Do not change the
setting.
The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
68055B
68055C
Function
International dial access code (High)
International dial access code (Low)
68055D
PSTN access pause time
68055E
Progress tone detection level, and

cadence detection enable flags
68055F
to
680564
680565
680566
Not used
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

Do not change the
settings.
Long distance call prefix (HIGH)

Long distance call prefix (LOW)
BCD
BCD
680567
to
680571
680572
Not used
For a code of 0:
680565 - FF
680566 - F0
Do not change the
settings.
Acceptable ringing signal frequency:

range 1, upper limit
range 1, lower limit
range 2, upper limit
range 2, lower limit
Number of rings until a call is
detected
1000/ N
(Hz).
680577
Minimum required length of the first

ring
20 ms
680578
Minimum required length of the

second and subsequent rings
Ringing signal detection reset time
(LOW)
Ringing signal detection reset time
(HIGH)
20 ms
02).
03).
04).
05).
06).
The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
07).
08).
09).
10).
680573
680574
680575
680576
680579
68057A
B750
Unit
BCD
Remarks
For a code of 100:
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
20 ms
This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
20 ms
98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
68057B
to
680580
680581
680582
Function
Unit
Not used
Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit
1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Remarks
Do not change the
settings.
Factory setting: 500 ms
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit
3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
680583
to
6805A0
6805A1
6805A2
6805A3
6805A4
6805A5
6805A6
6805A7
6805A8
6805A9
6805AA
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

Not used
Do not change the

settings.
Acceptable CED detection frequency

CED detection time
Acceptable CNG detection frequency
Not used
6805AB
6805AC
6805AD
CNG on time
CNG off time
Number of CNG cycles required for
detection
6805AE
Not used
SM
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)
20 ms
20 ms
99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

disabled.
disabled.
Do not change the
setting.
The data is coded in the
same way as address
680533.
Do not change the
settings.
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
6805AF
6805B0
6805B1
6805B2
6805B3
6805B4
6805B5
6805B6
6805B7
6805B8
6805B9
6805BD
6805BE
to
6805C6
6805C7
6805C8
to
6805D9
6805DA
6805E0
bit 3
6805E5
B750
Rev. 03/2006
Function
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (high byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: Tx level from the modem
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)
Not used
Unit
Hz (BCD)
Remarks
disabled.
Hz(BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
-N 3 dBm
01).
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
See Note 7.
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
See Note 7.
- dBm
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
-37-0.5N
(dBm)
Do not change the
settings.
Bits 0 to 3 Not used.

Bit 4 V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 Not used.
Not used
Do not change the
settings.
T.30 T1 timer
Maximum wait time for post
message
1s
0: 12 s
1: 30 s
Signal Detection Method
80h: Auto
Edge
81h or 83h:
Fixed Edge
100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1: Maximum wait time for

post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to 1 if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
Signal detection method,
Auto Edge (80h) or Fixed
Edge (81h or 83h).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU PARAMETERS
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
SM
101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.
5. When the programmed dial
number is displayed, press
Start.
Make sure that the LED of
the Start button is lit as
green.
B750S104.WMF
6. The settings for the switch

01 are now displayed.
Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the
parameter switches, either:
8. Select the next switch:
press Next
or
Select the previous switch: Prev. until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
B750S105.WMF
9. After the setting is changed, press OK.

10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
B750
102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
Tx level
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
4
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 -1
0 0 0 1 0 -2
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4
:
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
5
Cable equalizer
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting
7
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 Low
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS
If communication with a particular remote terminal
often contains errors, the signal level may be
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the results
are better.
If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01
setting is used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
the modem and the telephone exchange when
calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
SM
103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
to Bit3
2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2,400
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200
0 1 0 0 9,600
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400
0 1 1 1 16,800
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600
1 0 1 0 24,000
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4-5
6
Other settings: Not used

Not used
AI short protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
Not used
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-mm conversion before tx
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Inch-mm
conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
2
DIS/NSF detection method
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
3
0
0
First DIS or
NSF
0
1
Second DIS or
NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
B750
COMMENTS
If training with a particular remote terminal always
takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
must be changed to 0.
left.
used.

used.
COMMENTS
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy
may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
machine uses mm-based resolutions.
used.
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
used.
104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
4
V.8 protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
6
7

in transmit mode
0: MH only
1: Disabled
ECM during transmission
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0
0
Off
0
1
On
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
COMMENTS
If transmissions to a specific destination always end
at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
used.
This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
to the other terminal during transmission.
used.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
the (0, 0) setting.
Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
used.
Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM
105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
B750
106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report

printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
SM
107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
B750
108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)

Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
SM
109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and subscan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC fax (LAN fax) error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0
0 min.
0 0 0 1
1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message
0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
B750
110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750

Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1
0
Setting
0
0
File retention impossible
0
1
24 hours
1
0
File retention impossible
1
1
72 hours
Bit 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Auto switching 0: Fax, 1: Telephone
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F)
: Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the
specified type
0: Paper output priority
Priority order
1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order
Priority order
1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used
SM
111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches

680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B0(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) - Hour
680385(H) - Minute
680386(H) - Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2
Bit 5: G3-3
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
B750
112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)

680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number
6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM
113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6A0DD0(H) - RAS/SIP back-up server: IP address (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)

6A0DD4(H) - SIP back-up server: Host name (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub
6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main
6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub
6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number
B750
114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

5.1 OVERVIEW
FCUIF
MBU
to BICU
CCUDRV
Memory DIMM
GWFCU3
CCUIF
SG3
SG3
B750D501.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM
115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
10 February 2005
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
SAF
BACKUP
SDRAM
(16MB)
DIMM
(32 MB)
FCU
BICU
FCUIF
DMA BUS
PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS
SRAM
(256kB)
MBU
v.34
MODEM
FROM
(3MB)
Speaker
Drive
BACKUP
& RESET
CCUIF
G3
NCU
Circuit
Line
TEL
CCUDRV
G3
Speaker
B750D502.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)

CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
B750
116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory
: 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory
: 4MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item
SW1
SM
Description
Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
10 February 2005
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD

G3 Board
SG3-D
SG3-D
NCCP
FROM
(1MB)
CPU
(Ru30)
SDRAM
(8MB)
DPRAM
DMAC
FCU
DCR
Line
JBIG
CODEC
DSP
(modem)
+5V
REG
AFE
NCU
+3.3V
B750D902.WMF
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in

combination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board
as the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the
specifications of the SG3 board do not change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3 board.

CPU (RU30)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
DMA controller
JBIG
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
8Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
B750
118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
VIDEO DATA PATH
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.3
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
BICU
FCU
FBI
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF
SG3
DCR
QM-CODER
DCR
QM-CODER
Modem
Modem
NCU
NCU
Analog G3
Analog G3
NCCP
B750D511.WMF
SM
119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
10 February 2005
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
format. The BICU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1
B750
120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
Analog G3
Analog G3
NCU
NCU
Modem
Modem
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.3.2 RECEPTION
QM-CODER
SAF
CCD (DCR)
DCR
DCR
QM-CODER
NCCP
Page Memory
FACE3
SG3
FBI
FCU
BICU
Printer
B750D512.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the BICU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the BICU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
SM
121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take
place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.
Option
Available Line Type
Standard only
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single)
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double)
PSTN
PSTN + PSTN
PSTN + PSTN +PSTN
B750
122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Available protocol
Combinations
G3
G3 + G3
G3 + G3 +G3
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Scanner
BICU
Controller
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER

Comoressed
MMR
Page
Memory
HDD
FCU
FBI
FACE3
DCR
Modem
NCU
To
PSTN
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B750D514.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BICU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as FAX001. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting Print 1st page, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
SM
123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10 February 2005
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Transmission
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
Reply To
To
Bcc
Subject
Content Type
Content Transfer Encoding
Message Body
Content
Mail address of the sender
Destination requested for reply
Mail address of the destination
Backup mail address
From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
B750
124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machines Auth. E-mail RX feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the SMTP RX File Delivery Setting is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.
SM
125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10 February 2005
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp
Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
B750
126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the From
or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header
Content-Type
Charset
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Supported Types
Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The email will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for Abnormal files.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to Abnormal
files above).
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to On)
SM
127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10 February 2005
Transfer Request
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Transfer Request
Request by Mail
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
To
Bcc
Subject
Content-Type
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Mail body (text part)
Message body
B750
Content
E-mail address of the requesting terminal
Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Backup mail address
From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01.
MIME-converted TIFF-F.
128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type
Subject Entry
---
No Subject
Entry
Confirmation
of Reception
Mail delivery,
memory
transfer,
SMTP
receiving and
delivery
Entry Condition
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
3. CSI
4. None
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
CSI not registered
3. CSI
RTI not registered
4. None
CSI, RTI not registered
From
From
RTI or CSI of
the station
designated for
delivery
RTI or CSI of
sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail error
notification
CSI not registered

RTI not registered
CSI, RTI not registered
---
Fax Message No.

+
File No.
Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
You can select
displayed with IFAX
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
Error:
Return Receipt
(processed/error)
Mail delivery
Mail sending from G3
memory
Fax Message No. + File

Number
Memory sending
SMTP receiving and
delivery (Off Ramp
Gateway)
Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
Items of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
IFAXD919.WMF
SM
129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10 February 2005
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item
Number of Lines
Line Length
Name Length
B750
Maximum
5 lines
80 characters
20 characters
130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

Internet/LAN Fax Boards E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other partys machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
The other partys machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other partys machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1) The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
SM
Normal reception:
Return Receipt (dispatched) in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3)
Return Receipt (displayed) in the Subject line
Error:
Return Receipt (processed/error) in the Subject line
131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10 February 2005
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an A in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with OK in the Result column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E
in the Result column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in
the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How
to set up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
Report Sample
DATE
MAY. 5
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME
PAGE
RESULT
10:15
fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co.
Mail SM
0'09"
--
10:16
fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co.
Mail SMQ 0'05"
--
10:17
s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09"
OK
10:19
m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05"
--
IFAXD921.WMF
B750
132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.5 IP-FAX
What is IP-FAX?
Internet/LAN Fax Boards IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format

TCP is selected by default for NIC FAX; you can change this to UDP with LAN
switch 10 bit 1.
UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01
No.
FUNCTION
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 Level 0
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
4-7
Not used.
COMMENTS
Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
many transmission errors are occurring on the
network.
If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3:
4 Redundant packets
Settings
User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage
0: No, 1: Yes
LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
SM
133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
IP-FAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Desktop type transceiver
Circuit:
PSTN (max. 3ch.)

PABX
Connection:
Direct couple
Original Size:
Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(Single-sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method:
Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution:
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
Transmission Time:
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)

200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
NOTE: 1. Optional Expansion Memory required
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression:
MH, MR, MMR

JBIG
Protocol:
Group 3 with ECM
Modulation:
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate:
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
B750
134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Memory Capacity:
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (4 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item
Quick Dial
Groups
Destination per Group
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall
Programs
Auto Document
Communication records for Journal stored in the
memory
Specific Senders
Standard
2000
100
500
100
100
6
200
30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Memory Transmission
file
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
( Note1)
Without the
Expansion Memory
With the Expansion

Memory
400
400
1000
1000
320
2240
NOTE: Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard
resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
SM
135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Protocol
Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Resolution
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to 1.
Data rate
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Transmission Time
1 s (through a LAN to the server)
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document
(Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH
POP before SMTP
A-POP
Remark
The machine must be set up as an email client before installation. Any
client PCs connected to the machine
through a LAN must also be e-mail
clients, or some features will not work
(e.g. Autorouting).
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)
must be set to 1.
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
B750
136
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
4.
Network:
LAN: Local Area Network

Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX,
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density:
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character),

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character),
8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion
memory required),
16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine
character: optional expansion memory required)
Original size:
Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)
Maximum scanning size:
Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm
Transmission protocol:
Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol,

TCP, UDP/IP communication
Compatible machines:
IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission
function:
Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax

compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax
connected to the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
IP-Fax reception function:
Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax

through a network.
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax
connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
SM
137
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1
4
13
5
6
12
7
11
No.
1, 3
2, 4, 6
5
7
8
Description
SG3-D board
Modular jack
CCU interface board
Expansion memory
MBU board
Item
Fax Option Type 3232
G3 Interface Unit Type
3232
Handset Type 1018
Expansion Memory
Marker Type 30
B750
10
Machine Code
B750
B751
9
No.
9
10
11
12
13
Description
FCU board
FCU interface board
Controller board
CCU drive board
Speaker
No.
6, 8, 9, 10, 13
1, 2, 5, 12
B433
G578
H903
B750V101.WMF
Remarks
When using the dual G3 port
unit, this has 3, 4, 5, 12.
USA only
7
Refill ink for stamp
138
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

B810
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS................................................................... 1

ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 2
LEFT COVER ............................................................................................... 2
PICK-UP ROLLER........................................................................................ 3
FEED BELT .................................................................................................. 3
SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................... 4
ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS...................................... 4
ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR ........................... 5
ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .............................................................................. 6
DF Feed Clutch........................................................................................ 6
Pick-up Solenoid ...................................................................................... 6
Transport Motor ....................................................................................... 6
DF Feed Motor......................................................................................... 6
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR......................................................................... 7
1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ................................ 8
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................9

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 10
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 11
DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 12
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 13
MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ................................................................. 16
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .................................................................... 17
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 18
2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 18
2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................... 19
2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR............................................. 20
2.9 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 21
2.10 TIMING CHART........................................................................................ 22
2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION.......................................................... 23
2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT .......................................................... 24
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................25
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 25
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CAUTION
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B386R506.WMF
1. Open the DF feed cover.

2. Front cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Open the reverse table [C].
5. Original exit table [D] ( x 3)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[A]
B386R500.WMF
1. Open the left cover.

2. Detach the paper feed unit by sliding it toward the front of the machine (springloaded side) and then lifting the far side.
1.3 LEFT COVER
[B]
[A]
B386R507.WMF
1. Front and rear covers

2. Left cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Lower left stay unit [B] ( x 2)
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP ROLLER
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

[A]
1. Original feed unit.

2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
B386R501.WMF
1.5 FEED BELT

[A]
1. Original feed unit

2. Open the paper feed guide [A].
3. Belt holders [B]
4. Feed belt [C]
Push in on the bottom of the roller
and lift slightly to remove the belt.
B386R204.WMF
[C]
[B]
B386R205.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER
1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER

[A]
[C]
[B]
B386R502.WMF
1. Lift the original feed guide [A].

2. Separation roller cover [B]
3. Separation roller [C]
1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B386R201.WMF
1. Open the left cover.

2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B].
3. Original set sensor [C]
4. Original reverse sensor [D]
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE

SENSOR
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B386R503.WMF
B386R504.WMF
1. Open the original table [A].

2. Upper part of the table ( x 3)
3. Replace the width sensor board [B], length sensor (-1 [C] and -2 [D]) and
trailing edge sensor [E].
[F]
NOTE: To ensure proper detection of paper
size, after wiping off the sensor
board and terminal plate with a dry
cloth (or cloth with alcohol), apply
silicone grease (KS-660) to the
terminal plate [F].
B386R505.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE

[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B386R202.WMF
[E]
First remove the rear cover. Then follow the instructions below for each part
replacement:
DF Feed Clutch
1. DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Pick-up Solenoid
1. Pick-up solenoid [B] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
Transport Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. Transport motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)
DF Feed Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. DF feed motor [D] ( x 2, x 1)
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGISTRATION SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR
[B]
[A]
B386R508.WMF
1. Front and rear covers

2. Transport guide plate [A]
3. Registration sensor [B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

[A]
[B]
[C]
B386R509.WMF
[D]
B386R203.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 1)
2. Upper cover and the exit tray
3. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver into
one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and
pushing firmly.
4. Stamp solenoid [C] ( x 1)
5. Original exit sensor [D] ( x 1)
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3
19
B386D201.WMF
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
11. Reverse Roller
2. Paper Feed Belt
12. Junction Gate
3. Pick-up Roller
13. Exit Roller
4. Original Set Sensor
14. Original Exit Sensor
5. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
15. Stamp
6. Original Width Sensor Board
7. Original Length Sensor 1
17. Original Exposure Guide
18. Registration Sensor
9. Original Table
10. Reverse Table
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

1
17
16
6
7
15
8
14
13
9
10
12
11
B386D202.WMF
1. DF Feed Clutch
10. DF Feed Motor
2. Feed Cover Sensor
11. DF Transport Motor
3. Original Width Sensor Board
12. Original Exit Sensor
13. Stamp Solenoid
5. DF Pick-up Solenoid
14. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
15. Original Set Sensor
7. Junction Gate Solenoid
16. Original Reverse Sensor
8. DF Drive PCB
17. Registration Sensor
9. DF Position Sensor
B810
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
Name
DF Feed
DF Transport
Sensors
S1
DF Position
Registration
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Feed Cover Open

Sensor
Original Width
Sensor Board
Original Length - 1
Original Length - 2
Original Set
Original Exit
S8
S9
S10
Original Trailing
Edge
Original Reverse
Sensor
Solenoids
DF Pick-up
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
Stamp
Junction Gate
Magnetic Clutches
DF Feed
MC1
Function
Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and
reverse table rollers.
Drives the transport and exit rollers
Detects whether the DF is lifted or not.

Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
off the DF feed and transport motors, detects
the original exposure timing, and checks for
original misfeeds.
Detects whether the feed-in cover is opened or
not.
Detects the original width.
Detects the original length.
Detects the original length.
Detects if an original is on the feed table.
Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
on the junction gate solenoid and checks for
original misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn
off the transport and feed motor and junction
gate solenoid.
In single-sided mode, used to detect original
misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the last original to
stop copy paper feed and to turn off the
transport motor, and checks for original
misfeeds.
Detects when the original is fed from the
reverse area during duplex scanning.
Controls the up-down movement of the original

table.
Energizes the stamper to mark the original.
Opens and closes the junction gate.
Index No.
10
11
9
17
2
3
4
6
15
12
14
16
5
13
7
Transfers transport motor drive to the pick-up

roller and feed belt.
Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier,

and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid and
motor drive signals from the copier.
PCBs
DF Drive
PCB1
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

4
1
10
9
8
B386D203.WMF
6. DF Feed Motor
2. Original Feed Belt
7. Reverse Table Roller
3. Pick-up Roller
4. DF Feed Clutch
9. Exit Roller
5. DF Transport Motor
DF Feed Motor: Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and reverse table rollers
DF Transport Motor: Drives the transport and exit rollers
B810
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A]
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[B]
[C]
B386D503.WMF
The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board
[A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output
of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size
of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the
next page.
Note that the width sensors terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the
widths of the originals must all be the same.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
A3 (297 x 420)
B4 (257 x 364)
A4 (Lengthwise)
(210 x 297)
A4 (297 x 210)
(Sideways)
B5 (182 x 257)
(Lengthwise)
B5 (257 x 182)
(Sideways)
A5 (148 x 210)
(Lengthwise)
A5 (210 x 148)
(Sideways)
11" x 17" (DLT)
11" x 15"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (LG)
8.5" x 13" (F4)
8" x 13" (F)
8.5" x 11"
(Lengthwise)
8.5" x 11"
(Sideways)
10" x 8"
(Lengthwise)
5.5" x 8.5"
(Lengthwise)
(HLT)
5.5" x 8.5"
(Sideways) (HLT)
NA
EU
Original
Width-1
Original
Width-2

P
P
L
L
L
H
Original Width-3
P4
P3
P2
P1
ON
ON
Original
Length-1
Original
Length-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P
P
P
P

P

P
P
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Key
: No, P: Yes
ON: Paper present
NA: North America, EU: Europe
NOTE: 1) P1-P4 represent the four positions on the width sensor board. ON
indicates the presence of the terminal plate in a given position. Original
Width-1 and Original Width-2 are the outputs from the sensor board to
the DF main board. The state of these outputs (L or H) depends on the
position of the terminal plate on the sensor board (P1, P2, P3, or P4).
For example, if the terminal plate is at P4, both outputs are L.
2) A reading of L on either of the width sensor outputs indicates that the
terminal plate is connecting the GND pattern with the width sensor
output signal line.
3) The machine cannot detect more than one size of originals in the same
job.
B810
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
Original Width Sensor Board

GND Pattern
Original Width 1
Original Width 2
Original Side
Guide Position
P4
P3
P2
P1
A3/A4S
B4/B5S
A4L/A5S
B5L/A5L
The signal is "L" when the terminal plate is connected to the GND pattern.
B386D501.WMF
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE
2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size
mode.
Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original
document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but
the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed
is slightly slower.
Document length detection
From when the registration sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts
the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the
original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the
image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the
originals length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined
before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
The originals follow this path:

1. Length detection Scanning glass Inverter table
2. Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table (restores the original order)
3. Inverter table Scanning glass (image scanned) Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement
ratio has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the
scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm
length) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected original
length is read from memory and printed.
B810
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
[A]
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B386D504.WMF
[F]
[G]
B386D505.WMF
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and
the original set sensor [E] is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate
[C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pickup roller then feeds the top sheet of paper.
After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and
separation roller [G].
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B386D506.WMF
The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at
maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the
motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again,
and feed the original through scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area
contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After
scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].
B810
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[G]
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

[F]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B386D204.WMF
[A]
[E]
[D]
[F]
B386D205.WMF
When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF
feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the
transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone
reactivates to drive the first [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller
[F]. The front side of the original is then scanned.
When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the
junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is
then transported towards the reverse table [H].
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction
gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original
has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The
original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first
transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[H]
[I]
B386D206.WMF
[J]
B386D207.WMF
The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over.
This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in
the exit tray [J] in the correct order.
2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance
(while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The trailing
edge sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the
trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier
from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
B810
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
2.9 STAMP
[C]
[A]
[B]
B386D507.WMF
This function is only for fax mode.

There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and
its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly.
When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300
milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the
page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully
(memory transmission). After stamping, the DF feed motor starts again to feed out
the document, and its speed is about 1.3 times the normal speed.
The stamping position on the original can be changed by adjusting SP6-010.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
TIMING CHART
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.10 TIMING CHART
LT SIDEWAYS STAMP MODE (DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE)

RXD
Original Feed
Exit Sensor
Original Set
Sensor
Stamp
Solenoid
Rreverse
Solenoid
DF Pick-up
Solenoid
DF Feed
Clutch
Transport
Motor
Feed Motor
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MAX
READ
OFF
MAX
READ
OFF
1000ms
Original Scan Start
JAM 1A, 1B
JAM 3
Stamp & Reverse
JAM 8
JAM 2
JAM 4
Feed Completion
Original Size
Original Set Size Code
Next Original Check Stamp Stop Position
Reverse
Sensor
ON
OFF
TXD
Trailing Edge
Sensor
ON
OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
Original Scan Start
Stamp Stop Position
Stamp & Reverse
Original Scan Start
Stamp & Reverse
Feed Completion
Original Size
Exit Completion Original Not Set
Stamp Stop Position
Next Original
Check
Feed motor turns if sub-scan
is 238mm or more.
Original Stop
JAM 5
Original Scan Start
Original Stop
Stamp & Reverse
Stamp Stop Position
Exit Completion
Feed motor turns if sub-scan

is 238mm or more.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
22
B810
Registration
Sensor
FGATE
B386D101.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION

JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 114 mm x 2 since the
feed motor started (twice the distance between the original set position
and the (registration sensor).
JAM 1B: Duplex mode only: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 161
mm x 1.5 since the feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between
the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 2:
If the registration sensor does not turn off within 1260 mm x 1.1 since the
feed motor started (1.1 times the distance between the paper stop
position at registration and the maximum original length).
JAM 3:
If the original exit sensor does not turn on within 92 mm x 1.5 since the
feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between registration sensor
and exit sensor)
JAM 4:
If the original exit sensor does not turn off within original length + 120
mm since the transport motor started after the exit sensor turns on
JAM 5:
Duplex mode only: If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within
161 mm x 1.4 since the feed motor started (1.4 times the distance
between the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 6:
If the feeding original is removed.
JAM 7:
If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted while the ADF is in operation.
JAM 8:
If an area outside the maximum scannable area is selected.
JAM 9:
If scanning of the previous original is not completed when the registration

sensor detects the leading edge of the current original.
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction
Gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors
all DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular
intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information.
The DFmainframe connection is checked automatically just after power is
supplied to the mainframe.
Main
Frame
Interface
ADF Control
CPU
DF Feed Motor
Driver
DF Transport
Motor
Registration Sensor
Original Set Sensor
DF Position Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor
Original Width Sensor Board
Original Length Sensor 1
Original Length Sensor 2
Original Trailing Edge Sensor
Original Exit Sensor
Original Reverse Sensor
DF Feed Clutch
Junction Gate
Solenoid
Driver
DF Pick-up
Solenoid
ADF Control Board
Stamp Solenoid
B386D500.WMF
B810
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SM
SW100
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
Normal operating mode (Default)
No function
Free run with two-sided original 100%
DF feed clutch operates
Free run with one-sided original 32.6%
DF pick-up solenoid operates
Motors rotate
No function
Free run with one-sided original 100%
Junction gate solenoid operates
Free run without two-sided original 100%
No function
Free run without one-sided original 100%
Stamp solenoid operates
Free run with two-sided original 32.6%
Free run without two-sided original 100%
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810

AF3224C MS - v00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AF3224C MS - v00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Symbols and Abbreviations

Short Edge Feed (SEF)

Long Edge Feed (LEF)

1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-43

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1.2 SC TABLE ........................................................................................4-2

1000-SHEET FINISHER B408

PAPER TRAY UNIT B456

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B457

500-SHEET FINISHER B458

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480

INTERCHANGE UNIT B481

BRIDGE UNIT B482

BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490

DUPLEX UNIT B509

SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510

FAX OPTION B750

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480

BRIDGE UNIT B482

PAPER TRAY UNIT B456

B750 FAX OPTION TYPE 3232

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510

10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) (humidity to be 54% at

15% to 80% Rh (temperature to be 27C, 80.6F at

2000 lux or less (keep the machine out of direct

Air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person or more

Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10 6 oz/yd3)

6. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS

A: Over 100 mm (4")

1.2 COPIER (B156/B220)

1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Unpack the copier

Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit or LCT?

Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT

Install the copier

Install the By-pass Tray

Does the user require the Finisher?

Install the Bridge Unit

Install the Finisher

Does the user require the Shift Tray?

Install the Shift Tray

Install the Interchange Unit

Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit

Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)

1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK

1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

7. Reinstall the development units, and close the left cover.

9. Install the filters [A] and ducts [B] as shown.

1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)

1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)

PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)

= Necessary, --- = Not necessary